initial commit of ebook 24565HEADmain

1 files changed, 10377 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/24565.txt b/24565.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..436554f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/24565.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10377 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Two Gallant Sons of Devon, by Harry Collingwood
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Two Gallant Sons of Devon
+       A Tale of the Days of Queen Bess
+
+Author: Harry Collingwood
+
+Illustrator: Edward S. Hodgson
+
+Release Date: February 10, 2008 [EBook #24565]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TWO GALLANT SONS OF DEVON ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+
+
+
+Two Gallant Sons of Devon, by Harry Collingwood.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+The story opens in the town of Devonport, now a naval dockyard, in the
+year 1577, on a light June evening.  Two young men, close friends, meet
+after work, and go for a sail in a lugger borrowed from a boat-builder,
+but while they are out, there is a violent change in the weather, with
+the wind reversing and increasing to a point in which the lugger is
+swamped, and about to sink.  They are picked up by a passing vessel,
+which turns out to be a privateer, and her captain refuses to waste time
+by landing them.  So they are found positions in the crew, and take part
+in the subsequent events.  They do battle with a Spanish vessel, loot
+her, and let her go.  Then they arrive at Cartagena in the West Indies,
+where they also capture a Spanish galleon carrying a valuable cargo.
+
+By accident the two young men get separated from the English privateer,
+and this is where their adventures get even more exciting.  They are
+captured by Peruvian Indians, and condemned to a painful death, but are
+reprieved on the intercession of the wives of the men they killed, who
+demand them as slaves.  They escape, and their adventures become ever
+more singular as time goes on.  Eventually they persuade the locals that
+one of them is a reincarnation of the Inca, and get them to show where
+the gold, silver and jewels are hidden.  They then say that it is
+imperative that they get these to their home, meaning England.  This is
+accomplished, and they use their great wealth to buy large estates.
+
+Collingwood has extraordinary powers of description, and you will enjoy
+this book very much, especially if you make an audiobook of it.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+TWO GALLANT SONS OF DEVON, BY HARRY COLLINGWOOD.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE.
+
+HOW PHIL STUKELY AND DICK CHICHESTER NARROWLY ESCAPED DROWNING.
+
+It was a little after seven o'clock on June 19 in the year of Our Lord
+1577, and business was practically over for the day.  The taverns and
+alehouses were, of course, still open, and would so remain for three or
+four hours to come, for the evening was then, as it is now, their most
+busy time; but nearly all the shops in Fore Street of the good town of
+Devonport were closed, one of the few exceptions being that of Master
+John Summers, "Apothecary, and Dealer in all sorts of Herbs and
+Simples", as was announced by the sign which swung over the still open
+door of the little, low-browed establishment.
+
+The shop was empty of customers for the moment, its only occupants being
+two persons, both of whom were employees of Master John Summers.  One--
+the tall, thin, dark, dreamy-eyed individual behind the counter who was
+with much deliberation and care completing the preparation of a
+prescription--was Philip Stukely, the apothecary's only assistant; while
+the other was one Colin Dunster, a pallid, raw-boned youth whose
+business it was to distribute the medicines to his master's customers.
+He was slouching now, outside the counter, beside a basket three-parts
+full of bottles, each neatly enwrapped in white paper and inscribed with
+the name and address of the customer to whom it was to be delivered in
+due course.  Apparently the package then in course of preparation would
+complete the tale of those to be delivered that night; for as Stukely
+tied the string and wrote the address in a clear, clerkly hand, the lad
+Dunster straightened himself up and laid a hand upon the basket, as
+though suddenly impatient to be gone.
+
+At this moment another youth, with blue-grey eyes, curly, flaxen hair,
+tall, broad-chested, and with the limbs of a young Hercules, burst into
+the shop, taking at a stride the two steps which led down into it from
+the street, as he exclaimed:
+
+"Heyday, Master Phil, how is this?  Hast not yet finished compounding
+thy potions?  My day's work ended an hour and more ago; and the evening
+is a perfect one for a sail upon the Sound."
+
+"Ay, so 'tis, I'll warrant," answered Stukely, as he deposited the
+package in the basket.  "There, Colin, lad," he continued, "that is the
+last for to-night; and--listen, sirrah!  See that thou mix not the
+parcels, as thou didst but a week agone, lest thou bring sundry of her
+most glorious Majesty's lieges to an untimely end!  There"--as the boy
+seized the basket and hurried out of the shop--"that completes my day's
+work.  Now I have but to put up the shutters and lock the door; and
+then, have with thee whither thou wilt.  Help me with the shutters,
+Dick, there's a good lad, so shall I be ready the sooner."
+
+Five minutes sufficed the two to put up the shutters, and for Stukely to
+wash his hands, discard his apron, change his coat, and lock up the
+shop; then the two somewhat oddly contrasted friends wended their way
+quickly down the narrow street on their way to the waterside.
+
+As they go, let us take the opportunity to become better acquainted with
+them both, for, although they knew it not, they were taking their first
+steps on the road to many a strange and wild adventure, whither we who
+also love adventure propose to accompany them.
+
+Philip Stukely, the elder of the two, aged twenty-three and a half
+years, tall, spare, sallow of complexion, with long, straight, black
+hair, and dark eyes--the precise colour of which no man precisely knew,
+for it seemed to change with his varying moods--was, as we have seen, by
+some strange freak of fortune, an apothecary's assistant.  But merely to
+say that he was an apothecary's assistant very inadequately describes
+the man; for, in addition to that, he was both a poet and a painter in
+thought and feeling, if not in actual fact.  He was also a voracious
+reader of everything that treated of adventure, from the story of the
+Flood, and Jonah's memorable voyage, to Homer's _Iliad_ and _Odyssey_,
+and everything else of a like character that he could lay hands upon.
+Altogether, he was a very strange fellow, who evidently thought deeply,
+and originally, and held many very remarkable opinions upon certain
+subjects.
+
+This it was that made his friendship for and deep attachment to Dick
+Chichester, and Chichester's equally deep attachment to him, so strange
+a thing; for the two had not a trait in common.  To begin with,
+Chichester was much younger than Stukely, being just turned seventeen
+years of age, although this difference in age was much less apparent
+than usual, for while Stukely, in his more buoyant and expansive
+moments, seemed considerably younger than his years, Chichester might
+easily have been, and indeed often was, mistaken for a young man of
+twenty-one or twenty-two.  While Stukely was spare of frame and sallow
+of complexion, Chichester possessed the frame, stature, and colouring of
+a young Viking, being already within a quarter of an inch of six feet
+two inches in height, although he had by no means done growing, broad in
+proportion, with eyes of steel blue, and a shock of curly hair which his
+friends would in these latter days have called auburn, while his
+enemies--if he had possessed any--would have tersely described it as
+"carrots".  In temperament, too, Chichester was the very antithesis of
+Stukely, for he was absolutely unimaginative and matter-of-fact.
+Perhaps his occupation may have had something to do with this; for he
+was apprenticed to a shipwright, and delighted in his work.  He was also
+an orphan; his nearest relative being his uncle Michael Chichester, a
+merchant of Plymouth, who had adopted him upon the death of his parents,
+and with whom he now lived.
+
+Not much was said as the strangely assorted pair strode along side by
+side on their way to the water, for both of them loved boats, and
+sailing, and all that pertained to the sea life, and both were equally
+eager to get afloat as quickly as possible, so as not to waste
+unnecessarily a moment of that glorious evening.  At last, however, as
+Dick turned unexpectedly into a narrow side alley, Stukely pulled up
+short with:
+
+"Hillo, Master Dick! whither away, my lad?  This is not the way to the
+spot where our boat is moored."
+
+"No," answered Dick, "it is not, I know.  But we are not going to take
+our own boat to-night, Phil; we are going to take Gramfer Heard's
+lugger.  Gramfer is to Tavistock to-night; and he told me this morning
+that I might use the lugger whenever I pleased, if he did not want her
+himself.  We'll have something like a sail to-night, Phil, for there is
+enough wind blowing to just suit the lugger, while it and the sea would
+be rather too much for our own boat."
+
+So saying, Chichester led the way down the alley, and halted at a door
+in the wall, nearly at its farthest extremity.  Then, drawing a key from
+his pocket, he unlocked the door, flung it open, and Stukely found
+himself looking in upon Gramfer Heard's shipyard, the scene of Dick
+Chichester's daily labours.  He gazed, for a few seconds, with
+appreciative eyes at the forms of three goodly hulls in varying stages
+of progress, inhaled with keen enjoyment the mingled odours of pine
+chips and Stockholm tar, and then hurried after Dick, who was already
+busily engaged in unmooring a small skiff, in which to pull off to a
+handsome five-ton lugger-rigged boat that lay lightly straining at her
+moorings in the tideway.
+
+A few minutes later they were aboard the lugger, busily engaged in
+loosing and setting the sails; and presently they were under way, having
+slipped their moorings and transferred them to the skiff, which they
+left behind to serve as a buoy to guide them to the moorings upon their
+return.  The lugger was a beautiful boat, according to the idea of
+beauty that then prevailed, having been constructed by Mr George
+Heard--familiarly known as Gramfer Heard--shipbuilder of Devonport, and
+Dick Chichester's master, as a kind of yacht, for his own especial use
+and enjoyment.  She was a very roomy boat, being entirely open from stem
+to stern, and was conveniently rigged with two masts, the main and
+mizzen, upon which were set two standing lugs and a jib, the mizzen
+sheet being hauled out to the end of a bumpkin; consequently when once
+her sails were set she could easily be handled by one man.
+
+Stukely, who was the master spirit, took the tiller, quite as a matter
+of course, while Dick was perfectly content to tend the jib and main
+sheets; and away they went down the Hamoaze, with the water buzzing and
+foaming from the boat's lee bow and swirling giddily in her wake as she
+sped swiftly along under the impulse of a fresh westerly breeze, the
+full strength of which was however not yet felt, the lugger being under
+the lee of Mount Edgecumbe, beautiful then as it is to-day.  But the
+prospect which delighted the eyes of the two friends--or of Stukely
+rather, for Dick Chichester somehow seemed almost entirely to lack the
+keen sense of beauty with which his friend was so bountifully endowed--
+was very different from that which greets the eye of the beholder
+to-day.  Devonport and Stonehouse were mere villages; Mount Wise was
+farm land; where the citadel now stands was a trumpery fort which a
+modern gunboat would utterly destroy in half an hour; Drake's island was
+fortified, it is true, but with a battery even more insignificant than
+the citadel fort; while the Hoe showed a bare half-dozen buildings,
+chief of which was the inn, afterwards re-named the Pelican Inn, in
+honour of Drake's ship, famous as the spot behind which, eleven years
+later, Drake and Hawkins played their never-to-be-forgotten game of
+bowls.
+
+As the boat slid out from under the lee of Drake's island, however, and
+headed straight for the Eddystone, she gradually began to feel the full
+strength of the breeze, and her two occupants settled themselves down to
+enjoy thoroughly a good long evening's sail, perhaps to be extended into
+the small hours of the next morning, if the conditions continued
+favourable.  For there was nothing that these two more thoroughly
+enjoyed than a good tussle, in a well-found boat, against a strong
+breeze and a heavy sea; and they were like enough to have both to-night,
+so soon as they cleared the Sound and reached open water.  In fact,
+although probably neither of them had thus far suspected it, both were
+strongly imbued with the spirit of born adventurers.
+
+An hour's sailing sufficed to carry them to seaward of Penlee Point,
+when they found that there was just wind and sea enough to make for
+perfect enjoyment, therefore instead of contenting themselves with a
+mere sail round the Eddystone and back they determined to make a night
+of it; and the sheets were accordingly hauled aft for a long stretch to
+windward, close-hauled, towards the chops of the Channel.
+
+Away sped the boat to the southward and westward, careening gunwale-to,
+and sending the spray flying in such drenching showers over the weather
+bow, that presently the water rose above the bottom boards and splashed
+like a miniature sea in the lee bilge, compelling Dick to abandon the
+mainsheet to Stukely while he took a bucket and proceeded to bale.  But
+the wind showed a disposition to freshen, careening the boat so steeply
+that, despite Stukely's utmost care, the water began to slop in over the
+lee gunwale, as well as over the bows; and at length they decided to
+take a reef in the mainsail, for Dick had no fancy for spending the rest
+of the cruise in an ineffectual endeavour to free the boat of water that
+came in faster than he could throw it out.  This was done, and the boat
+resumed her headlong rush to the southward, until by the time that the
+sun sank, red and angry, beneath the western wave, the land lay a mere
+film of grey along the northern board.
+
+Then occurred a thing common enough in the tropics but much less usual
+in our more temperate climate; the wind suddenly dropped to a stark
+calm, and then, a few minutes later, came away in a terrific squall from
+about north-north-east.
+
+So violent was the outfly that there was but one thing to do, namely, to
+keep the boat away dead before it; and away went the lugger, still
+heading to the southward and westward, but with the wind now dead aft
+instead of over the starboard bow.  But they had scarcely been scudding
+five minutes when there occurred a sudden rending crack of timber, and
+the mainmast, weakened by an unsuspected flaw in the heart of it,
+snapped, about midway between the heel of it and the sheave, and went
+over the bows, broaching-to the lugger with the drag of the mainsail in
+the water, and nearly filling her as she came slowly round head to wind.
+
+The friends were now in a situation of imminent peril, the squall raised
+a very awkward choppy sea with almost magical rapidity, and, more than
+half-full of water as the boat now was, she was liable to be swamped out
+of hand by some unlucky sea pouring in over her bows; the occupants,
+therefore, set to work with a will to bale her out, Stukely taking the
+bucket from Dick and handing him the baler instead.  But it was both
+back-breaking and heartbreaking work; for, rendered heavy and sluggish
+by the large quantity of water in her, the boat frequently failed to
+rise to the lift of the seas, several of which poured in over her bows
+from time to time, filling her faster than she could be freed by the
+joint efforts of her crew; so that at length the unwelcome conviction
+forced itself upon the two friends that, unless something quite
+unforeseen happened, the boat must inevitably founder under them.
+
+This conviction caused the toiling pair to cease from their labours for
+a moment and glance about them anxiously, in the hope that the twilight
+might reveal to them some craft to which they might signal for
+assistance.  To their great relief, they perceived that there was indeed
+such a craft within a short two miles to the eastward of them; moreover
+she was outward-bound, and was heading in such a direction that she
+would probably pass within half a mile of the waterlogged lugger.
+
+"Thanks be!" devoutly exclaimed Stukely, as his eyes fell upon her.  "If
+we can but attract her attention before the boat founders, we shall
+escape, after all.  Go on with your baling, Dick, while I wave my coat.
+The thing to do is to catch the eye of somebody aboard that ship and
+make it understood that we are in distress; then, since we can both
+swim, it will not greatly matter if the lugger should go down before
+yonder ship reaches us."
+
+Dick obediently did as he was told, while Stukely, whipping off his
+coat, sprang upon the mast thwart and, with his left arm flung round the
+splintered stump to steady himself, proceeded to wave his coat
+energetically.  Luckily for the pair in distress, they were to the
+westward of the approaching ship, with the evening sky, in which still
+lingered a pale primrose glow, behind them, and against this background
+their figures and that of the boat stood out black as silhouettes cut in
+ebony.  It is possible that, even with this advantage, they might have
+escaped notice, had not Phil thought of waving his coat; but the figure
+of him standing there, apparently upon nothing--for it was only now and
+then that a small portion of the hull became visible--waving frantically
+something big enough to show up strongly, soon attracted attention on
+board the approaching ship, and Stukely had scarcely been ten minutes
+engaged on his waving operations when he had the gratification of seeing
+a flag float out over the rail and go soaring up to the main truck,
+while the stranger's helm was slightly shifted and she swerved
+perceptibly toward them.
+
+"Glory be! they have seen us, and are bearing away for us, so it matters
+little now whether the lugger sinks or swims," exclaimed Stukely, as he
+sprang off the thwart and resumed his task of baling with renewed zest.
+"Nevertheless," he continued, "it will be well to keep her afloat as
+long as we may, since she affords a bigger mark to steer for than would
+the heads of us two afloat upon the darkling water."
+
+The stranger--a tall and stately ship of some two hundred and forty tons
+measurement--was now close aboard of the dismasted lugger; and well was
+it for the occupants of the latter that such was the case; for as the
+ship cleverly rounded-to, with her topsails lowered, alongside and to
+windward of the boat, so near was the latter to foundering that the bow
+wave of the rescuing craft completed the disaster by surging in over the
+gunwale in sufficient volume to fill her; and down she went, at the
+precise moment when some half a dozen ropes, hurled by the sailors
+above, came whirling down about the shoulders of Dick and Stukely.
+
+"Haul away!" shouted the two, with one accord, each grasping the rope's
+end that came first to hand as they felt the lugger sinking and
+themselves going down with her; and the next moment they were dragged,
+dripping wet, up the lee side of the ship and in over her high bulwarks.
+
+"Better late than never; iss, fegs!" exclaimed a stout, burly man of
+middle height, clad in a crimson doublet of slashed silk, and trunk
+hose, with a crimson velvet cap, in front of which was stuck a feather
+of the same hue, secured by a gold brooch, set jauntily upon his head.
+"But by my faith, my masters, we were only just in time.  Mr Bascomb,
+put up your helm, and hoist away your topsails again.  And now, gentles
+both, who be ye; and how came ye to be in so awkward a scrape as that
+from which we have just rescued ye?"
+
+This was evidently the captain of the ship; so Stukely, taking the lead
+as usual, explained in a few brief words the particulars of their
+mishap, thanked the unknown for his kindness in taking the trouble to
+pick them up, and concluded by expressing the hope that the individual
+to whom he was speaking would have the great goodness to stand inshore
+and land them on the nearest point that he could conveniently fetch.
+
+The captain--for such he proved to be, introducing himself as John
+Marshall, captain of the good ship _Adventure_ of Topsham, westward
+bound to the Indies in quest of Spanish booty--shook his head
+good-naturedly but firmly.
+
+"Nay, friend, that I cannot and will not do, for here have we spent the
+whole of last night and to-day working down channel as far as this, and
+now that we have at last caught a fair slant of wind I will make the
+most thereof, not risking the loss of it to land any man, yea, even
+though he were my own brother!  The utmost that I can promise is, that
+if we should fall in with a coaster, or other ship, bound up-channel, or
+should sight a fishing boat, I will delay my voyage just long enough to
+put ye on board, but not a minute longer.  And if so be we do not
+encounter another craft, you will e'en both have to join us, for we have
+here no room for idlers.  And now, hie you both away into the cabin, and
+take off your wet clothes; Mr Bascomb, the master, will furnish you
+with dry clothing from the slop chest--though I misdoubt me," he
+continued, running his eye dubiously over Chichester's stalwart frame,
+"whether he will find any ample enough to clothe your friend withal.
+And when ye have changed, sup with us in the cabin, and we will talk
+further together."
+
+Marshall then beckoned to Bascomb, and gave the latter instructions to
+open the slop chest and do his best to provide the newcomers with dry
+clothes; whereupon the master, in turn, beckoned to Philip and Dick to
+follow him below, where in due time both were provided with a change of
+clothing, the resources of the slop chest happily proving fully equal to
+the strain upon its resources imposed by Chichester's bulky proportions.
+The change was effected in good time to allow the two friends to join
+the occupants of the poop cabin at supper, where Captain Marshall made
+them duly acquainted with his fellow adventurers.  These were five in
+number, consisting respectively of Mr George Lumley and Mr Thomas
+Winter, Marshall's lieutenants, Mr Walter Dyer and Mr Edmund Harvey,
+gentlemen adventurers who, with Marshall, had provided the wherewithal
+for the fitting out of the expedition, and Mr William Bascomb, the
+master aforesaid.  They were all fellow Devonians, a genial and hearty
+company, in the best of good spirits at the prospect of stirring times
+before them, with the chance of returning home made men.  It is true
+that--not to put too fine a point upon it--they were pirates, of a sort;
+but so were Grenvile, Drake, Hawkins, and the rest of their illustrious
+contemporaries; and piracy was at that time regarded as a quite
+honourable profession--provided that the piracies were perpetrated
+solely against the hated Spaniard.
+
+It was by this time dark enough to render necessary the lighting of the
+great cabin lamp which swung in the skylight; and the apartment, with
+its long table draped with snowy napery and abundantly furnished with
+smoking viands flanked with great flagons of foaming ale, presented a
+particularly cosy and inviting appearance as Dick and Phil, having been
+introduced in due form to the others, took their seats; the more so,
+perhaps, from the fact that both of them, having been too eager for
+their sail to wait for a meal at the conclusion of their day's labours,
+had tasted neither bite nor sup since midday, and were now each in
+possession of a truly voracious appetite.  Then, the conversation as the
+meal progressed--the wonderful, almost incredible, stories of past
+adventure related by Marshall and Bascomb, both of whom had already once
+visited the Indies, and the confidence with which all anticipated their
+return to England laden with wealth unimaginable--exercised an almost
+irresistible fascination over the two newcomers, one at least of whom--
+Philip Stukely to wit--began to feel, before the meal was over, that he
+cared not a jot though he should be compelled by force of circumstances
+to join those daredevil adventurers who made it clearly understood that,
+so far as the outside world was concerned, they intended to be a law
+unto themselves.  Marshall's and Bascomb's talk, especially, of
+cloudless skies of richest blue, out of which the sun darted his flaming
+rays by day, and in which the stars blazed like jewels at night; of
+tranquil seas of sapphire in which creatures of strange forms and
+brilliant hues disported themselves; of tropic shores, coral fringed and
+clothed with graceful feathery palms backed by noble forest trees of
+precious woods, made glorious by flowers of every conceivable hue and
+shape, amid which hovered birds of such gorgeous plumage that they
+gleamed and shone in the sun like living gems; of rich and luscious
+fruits to be had for the mere trouble of plucking; of fireflies
+spangling the velvet darkness with their fairy lamps; and of the gentle
+Indians who--at least when not brought under the malign influence of the
+cruel Spaniard--regarded white men as gods; all these appealed with
+singular force and fascination to Stukely, who sat listening
+breathlessly and with glowing eyes to everything that the two sailors
+said about these wonders.
+
+For, singularly enough, although the man had never until now been out of
+sight of English soil, and although he had never read about them, all
+these things seemed strangely familiar to him.  Times without number, as
+he had sat meditating over the fire on a winter's night, or had sprawled
+among the hay or upon the sandy beach on a summer evening, had visions
+of just such lands and just such enchanting scenes as Marshall and
+Bascomb described come floating to him like vague and distant but
+cherished memories.
+
+He awoke, as from a delightful dream, when, the meal being finished,
+Marshall arose from his chair and invited his guests to accompany him
+out on deck.  It was quite dark when they emerged from the cabin; so
+dark indeed that for a moment, their eyes being still dazzled by the
+bright light of the cabin lamp, they groped their way like blind men,
+and were fain to stand still, clinging to whatsoever their hands
+happened to find.  Then, their sight coming to them again, they followed
+Marshall up the poop ladder, and stood, staring out upon a night of
+blusterous wind and faintly phosphorescent, foam-capped sea; of flying
+clouds amid which the stars twinkled mistily and vanished, to re-appear
+presently with the tall spars and swelling canvas of the ship swaying
+dizzily and black among them; a night full of unaccustomed sounds of
+creaking and groaning timbers, of the splashing and roaring of water
+under the ship's bows, along her bends, and about her rudder; of strange
+sighings and moanings aloft; and of the low murmur of men's voices as
+the watch clustered under the shelter of the towering forecastle,
+discussing, mayhap, like their superiors aft, the prospects of the
+voyage.
+
+The Captain peered about him on either side of the ship, anon stooping
+to send his glances forward into the darkness beyond the heaving bows;
+then he hailed the lookouts upon the forecastle, demanding in sharp,
+imperative tones whether there were sail of any kind in sight.  The
+answer was in the negative.
+
+"Well, my masters," said he, turning to Stukely and Chichester, "you see
+how it is; there is nothing in sight; and every mile that we travel
+lessens your chance of our falling in with anything into which we can
+transfer you.  If this good breeze holds--as I trust in God that it
+will--we shall be off Falmouth shortly after midnight, but much too far
+out to render it at all likely that we shall sight any of its fishing
+craft; and, once to the westward of Falmouth, your last chance of
+getting ashore will be gone.  Now, what say ye?  Will ye, without more
+ado, up and join us?  I talked the matter over with my partners while
+you were changing your duds before supper, and I can find room in the
+ship for both of you.  We have no surgeon with us, so that berth will
+fit you finely, Mr Stukely; while, as for you, my young son of Anak,"
+turning to Chichester, "a lad of your thews and sinews can always earn
+his keep aboard ship.  But I can offer ye something better than the
+berth of ship's boy; we have but one carpenter among us, and I will
+gladly take you on with the rating of carpenter's mate, if that will
+suit ye.  Iss, fegs, that I will!  Now, what say ye?  Shall us call it a
+bargain, and have done wi' it?"
+
+"So far as I am concerned, you certainly may--if Dick will join, too,"
+answered Stukely.  "I will not let him go ashore alone to answer for the
+loss of the boat; for the accident which caused the plight in which you
+found us was at least as much my fault as his.  But I do not believe
+that we are going to have the chance to get ashore, therefore--what say
+you, Dick, shall we accept Captain Marshall's very generous offer, and
+so settle the matter?"
+
+"I am not thinking of the boat--Gramfer Heard is rich enough to bear the
+loss of her without feeling it--but it is my uncle that I'm troubling
+about.  I am afraid that he will be greatly distressed at my sudden and
+unaccountable disappearance," answered Dick.
+
+"True," assented Stukely; "doubtless he will.  But what about thy aunt,
+Dick?  Will not she rejoice that your worthy uncle's exchequer is
+relieved of the cost of your maintenance?  I have heard that she keeps a
+tight hold upon her husband's purse strings; and it has been whispered
+that she begrudges every tester that the good man spends upon thee.
+Believe me, she will soon find words to console him for thy loss."
+
+"That is true, Phil," returned Dick, with a sigh.  "She would sit and
+watch me eating, like any cat, so that often enough, for very shame, I
+rose from the table still hungry.  But my uncle is not a rich man, and
+he has three maidens of his own to feed and clothe, so that perhaps it
+may be just as well that I should take advantage of this opportunity to
+relieve him of the cost of an extra mouth to fill, and an extra body to
+cover.  But what of Master Summers, Phil?  How will he manage without
+thee?"
+
+"Master Summers must e'en get another dispenser," answered Stukely, with
+a shrug.  "I trow there are plenty of them to be had.  But I would that
+I had my books with me.  Not having them, however, I must contrive as
+best I can to do without them."
+
+"Then," cut in the Captain, somewhat impatiently, "may I understand that
+you are willing to join us?  You will never have another such an
+opportunity to make your fortunes."
+
+Phil looked enquiringly at Dick, who, after a moment's hesitation,
+nodded; whereupon Stukely, speaking for both, announced that they were
+ready to sign the agreement whenever it might be convenient for them to
+do so.
+
+"No time like the present," asserted Marshall.  "You may as well do it
+now."  And, leading the way into the cabin, he produced a parchment
+setting forth the articles of agreement, which he read over to them.
+The two friends then took the pen and inscribed their names at the foot
+of the document, thus forging the last link in a chain which was to drag
+them into a series of adventures of so extraordinary a character that it
+is doubtful whether even Stukely, with all his inborn love of adventure,
+would have been willing to proceed, could he but have foreseen what
+awaited him in the future.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO.
+
+HOW THE "ADVENTURE" FOUGHT AND TOOK THE "SANTA CLARA" OFF BARBADOS.
+
+And now, at the very outset, almost before the ink of their signatures
+had fairly dried, a hitch threatened to occur over the matter of
+berthing the two new recruits.  For, Stukely being entered as surgeon,
+Marshall offered him, as a matter of course, a stateroom aft, while
+Chichester, being shipped merely as carpenter's mate, was directed to go
+forward and establish himself in the house abaft the fore hatch, in
+which were lodged the other petty officers.  Dick, to do him justice,
+was willing enough to accept the lodging assigned to him; but it was
+Stukely who objected to being separated from his friend.  He insisted
+that Dick, being a gentleman, although merely a shipwright's apprentice,
+was as much entitled to a cabin aft as he was himself; and when the
+unreasonableness of this demand was pointed out to him he proposed that
+he also should be permitted to berth forward.  But neither could this be
+managed, for there was only one spare bunk available in the petty
+officers' house, namely that assigned to Chichester; therefore the
+Captain's arrangement had perforce to stand, after all.
+
+"Very well," said Stukely, when at last he was convinced that what he
+desired was impossible; "let be; you and I, Dick, can at least walk and
+talk together when we are off duty.  And--listen, lad--in an adventure
+such as this is like to be, many changes are both possible and probable;
+my advice therefore is that you make friends with Master Bascomb and get
+him to instruct you in the science of navigation, so that you may be
+fully qualified to act as pilot, should the occasion arise.  You will be
+no worse a pilot because you happen to be a good shipwright; and your
+proper place is aft among the gentles, where I hope to see thee soon."
+
+"That's as may be," answered Dick, with a laugh.  "Nevertheless thy
+advice is good, and I will take it."
+
+"And I, for my part, will give friend Bascomb a hint that he is to teach
+thee all that thou art willing to learn," cut in Marshall.  "For the
+doctor is right; many changes are like to occur among us before we see
+old England's shores again; and I shall be glad to know that I have one
+aboard who is fit to take Bascomb's place, should aught untoward befall
+him.  And now, my masters both, away to your quarters and get a good
+night's rest.  You, doctor, will of course sleep in all night, and be on
+duty all day; but as for you, Chichester, I will put you in a watch
+to-morrow morning."
+
+The next day saw the good ship _Adventure_ clear of the Channel; for the
+breeze which had interfered so unceremoniously with the fortunes of Dick
+and his friend held all through the night and contrary to expectation
+increased, at the same time hauling gradually round from the north-east,
+to the great joy of the Captain and Bascomb, who at eight o'clock in the
+morning shaped a course for the Azores, where it was intended to wood
+and water the ship, and lay in a goodly stock of fruit and vegetables to
+stave off the scurvy among the crew for as long a time as might be.
+
+The weather continued fine and the wind fair for four days, during which
+the ship, with squared yards, made excellent progress; then came a
+strong breeze from the westward which drove them nearly a hundred miles
+out of their course.  This, in its turn, was followed by light winds and
+fair weather, with a sun so hot that the pitch began to melt and bubble
+out of the deck seams, so that the mariners, who had hitherto been going
+about their duty barefoot, were fain to don shoes to save their feet
+from being blistered.  Finally, after a voyage of twenty-four days, they
+came to the Azores, where they remained four days, filling up their
+fresh water, replenishing their stock of wood, and taking in a bounteous
+supply of vegetables and fruit, especially "limmons"--as Marshall called
+them--for the prevention of scurvy.
+
+Then, greatly refreshed by their short sojourn, and by the entire change
+of diet which they enjoyed during their stay, they again set sail, and,
+making their way to the southward and westward, at length fell in with
+that beneficent wind which blows permanently from the north-east, and
+which in after-years came to be known as the Trade Wind.  With this
+blowing steadily behind them day after day, they squared away for the
+island of Barbados, where, if there happened to be no Spaniards to
+interfere with them, it was Marshall's intention to lay up for a while,
+to give his men time to recruit their health, and also to careen the
+ship and clear her of weed before beginning his great foray along the
+Spanish Main.
+
+And in due time--on the fiftieth day from that on which Dick and Phil
+were rescued from the sinking boat, to be precise--with the rising of
+the sun a faint blue blur, wedge-shaped, with the sharp edge pointing
+toward the south, appeared upon the horizon, straight ahead, and the
+joyous shout of "Land ho!" burst from the lips of the man stationed as
+lookout upon the lofty forecastle.  Yes; there it was; land,
+unmistakably, sharp and clear-cut, with a slate-blue cloud--the only
+cloud in the sky--hovering over it, from the breast of which vivid
+lightning flashed for a space, until, having emptied itself of
+electricity, the cloud-pall passed away, leaving the island refreshed by
+the shower that had accompanied the storm, gradually to change from soft
+blue to a vivid green as the _Adventure_, with widespread pinions,
+rushed toward it before the favouring breeze.  And with the cry of the
+lookout the ship at once awoke to joyous life; the watch below, ay, and
+even the sick, sprang from their hammocks and rushed--or crawled, as the
+case might be--on deck to feast their eyes once more upon the sight of a
+bit of solid earth, green with verdure, and promising all manner of
+delights to those who had been pent up for so long between wooden
+bulwarks, and whose eyes had for so many weary days gazed upon naught
+but sea and sky.  It is true that Stukely had never tired of gazing upon
+that same sea and sky; with the spirit of the artist that dwelt within
+him he had been able to see ever-changing beauty where others had beheld
+only monotony; but to the crew at large that wedge of land, growing in
+bulk and importance as the ship rushed toward it, was more beautiful
+than the most glorious sunset that had ever presented itself to their
+wondering eyes.
+
+"What island is that?" demanded Stukely of the master, who was standing
+halfway up the poop ladder, gazing at the distant land under the foot of
+the foresail.
+
+"It should be Barbados, unless I am a long way out of my reckoning.  But
+there is no fear of that; besides, I know the look and shape of the
+place; I have been there before; and it was just so that it looked when
+I got my last glimpse of it.  Yes, that is Barbados; and, please God, we
+shall all sleep ashore to-night.  There is good, safe anchorage round on
+the other side of that low point, with a snug creek into which the ship,
+with but a little lightening, may be taken and careened.  I pray that
+there may be no Spaniards there, for there is no better place on God's
+good earth for landing and recruiting a scurvy-ridden crew."
+
+"Are there any Indians on the island?" asked Stukely.
+
+"There may be; I cannot say; but I never saw any," answered Bascomb.
+"And if there be," he continued, "they are not likely to interfere with
+us.  Such Indians as I have met have ever been very shy of showing
+themselves to the whites, and always keep out of their way, if they can.
+That is to say, they do so among the islands.  On the Main, where they
+have been cruelly ill-treated and enslaved by the Spaniard, they are
+very different, being cruel and treacherous, and ever ready to attack
+the whites and destroy them with the poisoned darts which they discharge
+from blowpipes, and their poisoned arrows.  But, have no fear; the
+Indians on yonder island--if indeed there be any--will be of a very
+different temper, and quite gentle."
+
+"Indeed, then, I pray that they may be," returned Stukely.  "For though
+we have been marvellously fortunate, thus far, in the matter of
+sickness, there are still too many men in the sick bay for my liking;
+and we ought to have every one of them sound and fit for duty again
+before we go on with our great adventure.  But, look now, what comes
+yonder?  Surely that is a ship's canvas just beginning to show over the
+land there near the southern end of the island?"
+
+Bascomb shaded his eyes with his hand and looked toward where Stukely
+pointed.  The island was by this time about five miles distant, and the
+colours of the vegetation were showing up clearly in the brilliant light
+of the tropic day.  But beyond it again, and showing over the tree-tops,
+there was a faint grey film that was evidently moving, sliding along, as
+it were, toward the low point.  Even as they looked the filmy grey
+object suddenly became a strong white and assumed a definite form as it
+emerged from the shadow of a cloud, revealing itself as the upper canvas
+of a large ship which had either just got under way from the anchorage
+on the lee side of the point, or--and this seemed to be the more likely
+of the two--was working up to windward in the smooth water, having
+sighted the island on her way to the eastward.
+
+"Iss, sure," agreed Bascomb, relapsing into the Devonshire dialect in
+his excitement; "that's a ship, sure enough, moreover a Spaniard at
+that, most likely; and, if so, we shall have a fight on our hands afore
+long.  Do 'e see thicky ship t'other side of the island, yonder, Cap'n
+Marshall?" he continued, addressing himself to the Captain, who was on
+the poop, conversing earnestly with Messrs. Dyer and Harvey, his
+partners in the adventure.
+
+"Ship, sayest thou?  Where then?" demanded Marshall, breaking off his
+conversation and running forward to the head of the poop ladder.
+
+"Why, there a be, with the sails o' mun just showing over the low
+point," answered the master.  "She'll be clear of the land in another
+minute or two; and then they'll see us as clearly as we see them.  She's
+a Spaniard, to my thinking, Cap'n; and there may be fine pickings aboard
+of her--if her don't turn and run so soon's she sees us."
+
+"She'll not do that, Master Bascomb; she be a bigger ship nor we.
+Besides, how's she to know we baint a Spaniard like herself, if we don't
+tell her.  We'll clear the decks and make all ready before we show our
+flag, gentles; and see what comes of it.  Let the mariners get to work
+at once, Mr Bascomb."
+
+The excitement aroused by the appearance of land on the horizon, after
+so many weary weeks of gazing upon sea and sky only, was intensified
+tenfold when the strange sail--the first they had seen since leaving the
+Azores--was discovered; and when it was further understood that the
+chances were in favour of her proving to be a Spaniard, the preparations
+for a possible fight were entered upon with the utmost eagerness and
+alacrity.  Fortunately, there was not very much that needed to be done;
+for Marshall, rendered wise by past experience, had consistently made a
+point of always having the decks kept clear of unnecessary lumber of
+every kind; but the bulwarks were strengthened and raised, for the
+purpose of affording the crew as much protection as possible from the
+enemy's musketry fire; the lower yards were fitted with chain slings, so
+that the risk of their being shot away, and the ship thus disabled at a
+critical moment, might be minimised as much as possible; parties of
+musketrymen were sent aloft into the round tops, with instructions to
+hamper the enemy as much as possible by their fire, especially by
+picking off the helmsman and the officers; the powder room was opened,
+and ammunition sent on deck for the culverins, sakers, and swivels, all
+of which were loaded; and the men, having armed themselves with cutlass,
+pistol, bow, and pike, stripped to their waists, bound handkerchiefs
+round their heads, and took up their several stations by the guns, or at
+the halliards and sheets.  Marshall took command of the ship as a whole;
+while Lumley and Winter, his lieutenants, assumed charge of the poop and
+forecastle respectively, Bascomb, the master, taking charge of the main
+deck.  Stukely, with his knives, saws, and bandages, established himself
+in the cockpit; and Dick Chichester, who had contrived to gain the
+reputation of being the best helmsman in the ship, was ordered to the
+tiller.
+
+Meanwhile, the strange ship, having cleared the land, revealed herself
+as a craft of probably quite a hundred tons bigger than the _Adventure_,
+and carrying four more pieces of great ordnance than the latter.  But
+this fact by no means dismayed the English; for the stranger was what
+was called a race ship, and was nearly twice as long as the _Adventure_;
+Marshall therefore confidently reckoned that, should the two vessels
+come to blows, the superior nimbleness of his own ship would more than
+counterbalance the advantage conferred upon the other by her greater
+weight of metal.  The stranger, when she cleared the land, was
+close-hauled on the larboard tack, heading about south-south-east, and
+it was judged, from her position relative to the land, that she had not
+actually touched at the island, but had simply availed herself of its
+presence to gain a few miles by turning to windward in the smooth water
+under its lee.  The discovery of the presence of the English ship did
+not appear to have caused any uneasiness to her commander, for he did
+not deviate a hairbreadth from his course, but stood on, maintaining his
+luff, the only indication that he had observed the _Adventure_ at all
+being the display of the yellow flag of Spain, which he had hoisted to
+the head of his ensign staff within five minutes of the time when he
+cleared the island.  Probably he imagined that the _Adventure_ was also
+Spanish.
+
+The English, on their part, took no notice of the stranger, except by
+gradually edging down toward her, until their preparations for battle
+were complete; then indeed they hoisted the white flag bearing the
+crimson cross of Saint George, and hauled their wind sufficiently to
+enable them to intercept the Spaniard.  At this invitation to battle
+symptoms of alarm and indecision began to manifest themselves on board
+the latter, for she first put up her helm and kept away, as though about
+to turn tail and run, but presently came to the wind again and tacked,
+heading now to the northward.
+
+"Over with the helm, and steer for the northern end of the island,"
+cried Marshall to Dick; "that ought to enable us to intercept him.
+Thank God, he means to fight instead of running, and the matter will the
+sooner be settled.  Look to that, now; he is stripping for battle, for
+in comes all his light canvas, and up goes his mainsail.  The man who
+commands that ship is a right valiant cavalier, and will put up a good
+fight; therefore, let no man put match to culverin or finger to trigger
+until I give the word.  Now, let the waits play up `The brave men of
+Devon!'"
+
+Therewith the waits, five in number, stationed on the main deck, between
+the poop and the mainmast, struck up that favourite and inspiring air
+with such good effect that before two minutes had passed every man and
+boy in the ship was singing the song at the top of his voice, and
+feeling quite ready to fight all the Spaniards who might care to come
+against them.
+
+A quarter of an hour later the two ships had closed to within musket
+shot of each other, the _Adventure_ having the weather gage, when crash
+came the whole of the Spaniard's broadside, great guns and small; but so
+bad was the aim that every shot flew high overhead, and not so much as a
+rope was touched.
+
+"Good!" ejaculated Marshall.  "Now, steersman, up with your helm, and
+shave past as close under his stern as you can without touching.
+Starboard gunners, be ready to pour your shot into his stern as we pass!
+Musketrymen and archers, pick off as many men as you can see, and
+especially the helmsman!  Sail trimmers, to your stations, and be ready
+to go about!"
+
+Two minutes later the _Adventure_ slid square athwart the towering,
+gilt-bedizened stern of the Spaniard, and one after another, as they
+were brought to bear, her ordnance belched forth their charges of round
+and canister, smashing the Spanish gingerbread work to splinters,
+shivering every pane of glass in the stern windows, and sweeping the
+decks of the stranger from end to end, the deadly nature of the
+discharge being evidenced by the outburst of shrieks which instantly
+followed aboard the stranger.
+
+"Well done, gallants!" cried Marshall, waving his sword.  "Now, ready
+about, and larboard gunners stand by to repeat the dose.  Down helm,
+steersman, and let her come round!  Raise fore tack and sheet!  Ha! she
+is falling off, and means to give us her larboard broadside while we are
+in stays--if she can.  Topmen, do your best, now, and pick me off her
+helmsman before it is too late.  Well done!"--as the Spaniard began to
+come ponderously to the wind again, showing that her helmsman was
+down--"Let the man who did that come to me by and by, and he shall have
+a noble for that good shot.  Swing the mainyard!  Musketrymen, clear the
+enemy's tops of archers, and shoot down any that may attempt to take
+their places!  Trim aft the head sheets!  Swing the foreyard!  Starboard
+gunners, reload your ordnance!  We will try that trick again if they
+will but give us the chance.  Now, larboard gunners, be ready, and let
+her have it as we pass!"
+
+A minute later, and the _Adventure's_ broadside again crashed into the
+Spaniard's stern; and again uprose the hideous answering outburst of
+shrieks and yells on board the latter as the English ship, with her
+sails clean full, slid square across her antagonist's stern, the only
+reply to her broadside being four shot discharged from the enemy's stern
+ports, not one of which did a groat's worth of damage.
+
+A tall figure completely encased in armour sprang up on the Spanish
+ship's poop rail and, shaking his naked sword at Marshall, shouted in
+Spanish:
+
+"You are a coward, senor Englishman!  Why do you not fight fair,
+broadside to broadside, instead of sheltering yourself under my stern,
+where my shot cannot reach you?"
+
+"Because, senor, I do not happen to be a fool," retorted Marshall in the
+same language.  "But neither am I a coward," he continued, "as I will
+prove to you within the next five minutes, if you will do me the honour
+to meet me on your own deck, whither I intend to come without further
+ado."
+
+"I shall be most happy, senor," was the reply; and down jumped the
+Spaniard in a hurry, to issue certain orders apparently, for his voice,
+hollow in his helmet, was heard pealing out in a tone of command as the
+two ships drew apart.
+
+"Larboard gunners, load your pieces again," commanded Marshall, "and
+level them so as to take her on the main deck while we are in stays.
+Luff, helmsman, all you can; I want to get far enough to windward to be
+able to run down and lay her aboard on the next tack.  Boarders, see to
+the priming of your pistols, and be ready to follow me presently.  Now,
+ready about again, men!  Down helm!"
+
+As the _Adventure_ hove in stays both ships fired their broadsides
+simultaneously, one of the English shot entering a port and dismounting
+a gun, while the rest struck fair in the wake of the deck and went clean
+through the Spaniard's side, as could clearly be seen; while the
+Spaniard's shot, as usual, flew overhead, again by great good luck
+missing everything.
+
+"Now, up helm, steersman, and lay us aboard!" commanded Marshall.  "Be
+ready, men, to throw your grapnels the moment that we touch; and
+boarders, stand by to follow me into the enemy's main chains!"
+
+As the two ships closed in toward each other for the final grip which
+was to decide the matter, the Spaniard holding her luff while the
+English ship bore up and ran down with the wind free, the archers and
+musketeers on both sides became busy, the Spaniards having a slight
+advantage because of the superior height of their ship, although this
+was more than counterbalanced by the greater quickness and accuracy of
+aim on the part of the English, who shot as coolly as though they had
+been practising at the butts, and seldom failed to hit their mark.
+Nevertheless, several Englishmen went down during the ensuing five
+minutes, and were carried below to Stukely, who now began to find
+himself surrounded by quite as many patients as he could conveniently
+attend to.  Then the two ships crashed together, the grapnels were
+thrown, and Marshall, followed by every man whose legs could carry him
+and whose hands could wield a weapon, sprang into the Spaniard's main
+rigging, leaving the _Adventure_ to take care of herself.
+
+It was a rash thing to do, perhaps; but it succeeded; for the Spaniards
+were too busily engaged in endeavouring to keep the enemy out of their
+own ship to think of boarding the other.  And most desperate was the
+fight that ensued, the English being fully determined to force their way
+aboard the Spaniard, while the Spanish were as fully determined that
+they should not.  The air became thick with flying arrows, and with the
+smoke of grenades and stinkpots flung down upon the boarders out of the
+enemy's tops; while swords and pikes flashed in the sun, pistols popped,
+and men shouted and execrated as they cut and slashed at each other; and
+the glorious tropic morning was filled with the sounds of deadly strife.
+Dick Chichester--to let the reader into a secret--had, upon the first
+appearance of the Spanish ship, been greatly exercised in his mind lest
+he should fail in courage when the two ships came to blows; but with the
+discharge of the first shot the queer agitated feeling which he had
+mistaken for fear completely passed away, and was instantly forgotten;
+and now, his services being no longer required at the helm, he armed
+himself with a handspike snatched from the deck, and, watching his
+opportunity, flung himself from the _Adventure's_ poop into the enemy's
+mizzen chains, climbing thence to the Spaniard's poop, where was no one
+to oppose him.  From thence he made his way down to the main deck, where
+were gathered all the crew in one spot, crowding together to resist the
+attack of the English; and upon the rear of these he flung himself with
+indescribable fury, whirling the terrible handspike with such
+destructive effect that the astounded Spaniards, thus taken unexpectedly
+in the rear, went down like ninepins, while their yells of anguish and
+dismay quickly threw the entire crew into complete disorder.  So
+violent, indeed, was the commotion that the attention of the Spaniards
+was momentarily distracted from what may be termed the frontal attack,
+and of this distraction Marshall instantly availed himself to dash in on
+deck, where, with a few sweeps of his sword, he soon cleared standing
+room, not only for himself but also for half a dozen of his immediate
+followers.  These in turn cleared the way for others, and thus in the
+course of a couple of breathless minutes every man of the _Adventure's_
+crew had gained the deck of the Spaniard, after which the capture of the
+ship was a foregone conclusion.  The rush of Marshall and his party on
+the one hand, and the onslaught of Dick Chichester with his whirling
+handspike on the other so utterly distracted and demoralised the
+Spaniards that they presently broke and fled, flinging away their
+weapons, and crying out that their foes were a crew of demons who had
+assumed for the nonce the outward semblance of Englishmen!  The hatches
+were promptly clapped on over the fugitive Spaniards, then Marshall and
+his followers paused to recover their breath and look about them.
+
+The first thing to claim their attention was the ships themselves.
+These, being lashed together by means of the grapnels, were grinding and
+rasping each other's sides so alarmingly, as they rolled and plunged in
+the sea that was running, that they had already inflicted upon each
+other an appreciable amount of damage, and threatened to do a great deal
+more if prompt preventive measures were not taken.  Marshall therefore
+called upon Winter, one of his lieutenants, to take a party of twenty
+men, and with them return to the _Adventure_, cast her adrift from the
+prize, and lie off within easy hailing-distance of the latter.  This was
+done at once, Dick Chichester being one of those called upon by Winter
+to follow him aboard the _Adventure_, and as soon as the two ships were
+parted an investigation was made into the extent of the damage incurred
+by each ship.  The result of this investigation was the discovery that
+the _Adventure_ was much the greater sufferer of the two, her larboard
+main channel piece having been wrenched off, and the seams in the
+immediate neighbourhood opened, while three of the channel plates were
+broken, thus leaving the mainmast almost entirely unsupported on the
+larboard side.  Water was entering the ship in quite appreciable
+quantities through the opened seams, and the men were therefore at once
+sent to the pumps to keep the leak from gaining, while the carpenter and
+Dick went below to see what could be done toward stopping it.
+
+Meanwhile Marshall, assisted by his co-adventurers Dyer and Harvey,
+proceeded to overhaul the prize systematically, with the view of
+determining her value.  The first fact ascertained was that the ship was
+named the _Santa Clara_; the second, that she hailed from Cadiz, in Old
+Spain; and the third, that she was homeward-bound from Cartagena, from
+which port she was twenty-two days out.  Her cargo, although valuable
+enough in its way, was not of such a character as to tempt the English
+to go to the labour of transferring any portion of it to their own
+vessel.  But, apart from the cargo proper, she was taking home ten
+chests of silver ingots, two chests of bar gold, and a casket of pearls,
+all of which were quickly transhipped to the _Adventure_, the crew of
+which thus found themselves the possessors of a fairly rich booty, while
+still upon the very threshold, as it were, of those seas wherein they
+hoped to make their fortune.  But this was not all; for, in the process
+of rummaging the captain's cabin, Marshall found certain letters which
+he unhesitatingly opened and read, and among these was a communication
+from the governor of Cartagena advising the home authorities of the
+impending dispatch of a rich plate ship for Cadiz.  The probable date of
+dispatch was given as three months after the departure of the _Santa
+Clara_, or about ten weeks from the date of that vessel's capture by the
+English.  That letter Marshall thrust into his pocket, together with
+certain other documents which he thought might possibly prove of value;
+then, summoning the unhappy Spanish captain to his presence, he informed
+him that the English having now helped themselves to all that they
+required, he was at liberty to proceed upon his voyage; and this
+Marshall recommended him to do with all diligence and alacrity, lest
+peradventure he should fall into the hands of certain other British
+buccaneers, at the existence of whom the Englishman darkly hinted,
+hoping thus to nip in the bud any plan which the Spaniard might have
+formed for a return to Cartagena with a report of the presence of
+English corsairs in the Caribbean Sea.  The two ships then parted
+company, the _Santa Clara_ steering northward close-hauled against the
+trade wind, while the _Adventure_ bore up for Barbados, shaping a course
+to pass round its southern extremity.  Two hours later the English ship
+was riding snugly at anchor in what is now known as Carlisle Bay, in
+five fathoms of water, within four hundred feet of the beach, and the
+same distance from the mouth of a small river, within which, as Bascomb
+explained, lay the creek which he had fixed upon in his mind as a
+suitable spot wherein to careen the ship.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE.
+
+HOW THEY CAME TO BARBADOS; AND WHAT THEY DID THERE.
+
+The rumbling of the great hempen cable out through the hawse-pipe served
+as a signal to some dozen or more of poor scurvy-stricken wretches who
+lay gasping in their hammocks in the stifling forecastle.  They had
+heard the cry of "Land ho!" some hours before, and had groaned with
+bitter impatience when the subsequent sounds from the deck had made it
+clear to them that a battle must be fought before they could feast their
+eyes upon the sight of solid earth and green trees once more, and
+satisfy their terrible craving for the luscious fruits which they had
+been given to understand were to be obtained on the delectable island in
+sight for the mere trouble of plucking.  But now at last the time of
+waiting was over; the sounds and shouts incidental to the taking in of
+sail, and, still more, the splash of the anchor and the roar of the
+cable as it rushed through the hawse-pipe told them that the ship had
+arrived, and with one accord they rolled out of their hammocks--the less
+heavily stricken helping their weaker fellow sufferers--and made their
+way on deck, where the business of stowing the ship's canvas was still
+in full progress.  The poor wretches were constantly getting in the way
+of those who were well and busy, but the latter were themselves just
+then much too happy to grumble or find fault, so the invalids were
+good-humouredly assisted up the ladder to the top of the forecastle,
+where they could enjoy an uninterrupted view of the island, and left
+there to feast their eyes upon its beauties in peace, until the time
+should arrive when their shipmates would be ready to man the boats and
+take them ashore.
+
+And what a glorious sight it was that met their gaze.  First of all
+there was the green and placid water, alive with fish, rippling gently
+to a narrow beach of golden sand, and beyond that sand nothing but
+vegetation, rich, green, and luxuriant.  Green! yes, but of a hundred
+different tints, from the tender hue of the young shoots that was almost
+yellow, to a deep olive that turned to black in the shadows.  If the
+tints of the vegetation were admirable, no less so were its forms; for
+there were palms of many different kinds, including the coconut palm in
+thousands, close down to the water's edge.  The traveller tree, shaped
+like a fan made of organ pipes; the banana and plantain, loaded with
+great bunches of fruit, each bunch a fair load for a man; there were
+great clumps of feathery bamboo; there were big trees covered with
+scarlet flowers instead of leaves; there was the flaming bougainvillea
+in profusion; and, in addition, there were great trailing cables of
+orchids, of weird shapes and vivid colouring reaching from bough to
+bough.  Yes, there was plenty to see and marvel at, and there would be
+more when those few yards of rippling water had been spanned and their
+feet pressed the lush grass of yonder flowery mead close by the river's
+margin; humming birds, the plumage of which shone in the sun like
+burnished gold and glowing gems, butterflies as big as sparrows, with
+wings painted in hues so gorgeous that the painter who should attempt to
+reproduce them would be driven to despair, enormous dragon-flies
+flitting hither and thither over the still surface of the river,
+kingfishers as big as parrots, monkeys in hundreds, agoutis, and,
+alas!--to strengthen its resemblance to that other Eden--serpents as
+well, contact with which meant death.
+
+At last! at last! the sails were furled, the ropes coiled neatly down,
+the decks restored to order, and the word was given to lower the boats.
+Never, probably, was an order more joyously obeyed.  The men rushed to
+the tackles with shouts and laughter, like schoolboys who have
+unexpectedly been given a holiday, and in an incredibly short time the
+boats were all afloat and were being brought one by one to the gangway.
+Then, under the joint supervision of the Captain and Stukely, the sick
+were led or carried along the deck and handed gently down over the side,
+the whole of them being sent ashore in the first boat that left the
+ship, with Bascomb, the master, in charge, his duty being to see that no
+unwholesome fruit or poisonous berries were eaten unwittingly.  Next,
+the sick having been temporarily disposed of, there followed the strong
+and able-bodied, who took ashore with them spars, tackles, and spare
+sails, with which to rig up temporary tents; and soon the greensward was
+dotted with busy men, who, in the intervals of their labour, drank
+coconuts or eagerly devoured bananas, prickly pears, guavas, soursops,
+grapes, mangoes, and the various other fruits with which the island
+abounded.  By and by, when a certain large tent had been erected beneath
+the shade of a giant ceiba tree, a boat put off from the shore to the
+ship, and presently returned bearing nine wounded men--the result of
+their fight that morning--under the especial care of Philip Stukely.
+These men, lying in their hammocks as they had been taken out of the
+ship, were then carried up to the completed tent, when their hammocks
+were re-slung to stout poles firmly driven into the ground, and where
+Stukely once more, and at greater leisure, attended to their hurts.  But
+there was one form, lying stark in a laced-up hammock deeply stained
+with blood, which was not brought up to the tent.  It was all that
+remained of George Lumley, Captain Marshall's chief lieutenant, who had
+been shot to death in the very act of boarding the Spaniard, a few hours
+before; and a grave having been prepared in a small open space on the
+opposite side of the river, under the shadow of a splendid _bois
+immortelle_ which strewed the ground with its glowing scarlet flowers, a
+trumpet was blown, calling the crew together.  Then, when they were all
+assembled, they entered the boats, at a sign from Marshall, took in tow
+the boat containing the body of the officer, with Saint George's Cross
+at half-mast trailing in the water astern of her, and, having reached
+the other side, reverently bore the shrouded corpse to its last
+resting-place, lowered it into the grave, Marshall, meanwhile, reading
+the burial service, and covered it up with the rich brown earth.  This
+service rendered they returned to the site of the camp, and rapidly
+proceeded to put up the other tents needed to enable all hands to sleep
+ashore that night.
+
+The sun was within an hour of setting when at length everything was
+completed to Marshall's satisfaction, and the men were told that they
+might cease work and amuse themselves as they pleased, the permission
+being accompanied by a caution that they were not to wander more than a
+quarter of a mile from the camp, not to go even as far as that, singly,
+and not to go unarmed; for although it was assumed that the island was
+uninhabited, save by themselves, it was recognised as quite possible
+that a band of Spaniards might be somewhere upon it; and, if so, they
+would probably have witnessed the arrival of the ship, and might, if
+strong enough, attempt to surprise and capture both camp and ship.  The
+men therefore made up little parties, and for the most part went off
+into the woods, either to gather more fruit or to look for gold, some of
+them seeming to be possessed of a firm conviction that, being now in
+"the Indies", they must inevitably find the precious metal if they only
+searched for it with sufficient diligence.  As for Dick and Stukely, the
+latter having by this time done all that he could for his patients, they
+went off for a stroll together along the beach, in the direction of the
+southern end of the bay.
+
+"Well, Dick, what think ye of fighting, now that you have had a taste of
+it?" demanded Stukely, slipping his hand under Chichester's arm as they
+turned their backs upon the camp.  "And, by the way," he continued,
+without waiting for a reply to his question, "you must permit me to
+offer the tribute of my most respectful admiration; for I am told that
+you carried yourself like a right valiant and redoubtable cavalier;
+indeed the Captain has not hesitated to say that, but for your most
+furious onslaught upon the Spaniards' rear this morning, while he was
+leading the attack by way of the main rigging, matters were like enough
+to have gone very differently with us."
+
+"Oh, that is all nonsense," laughed Dick.  "I saw that Marshall wished
+to reach the deck of the Spaniard; I noticed that the Spanish crew had
+all congregated together in one place to stop him; and it struck me that
+I could best help by falling upon them in the rear, which I saw might be
+done right easily, there being no man to stop me--so--I did it."
+
+"Precisely; with the result that the Spaniards, finding themselves thus
+suddenly and furiously assailed by one who bore himself like a very
+Orson, and feeling no desire to have their brains beaten out with so
+heathenish a weapon as a handspike, incontinently gave way before you
+and scattered, affording Marshall an opportunity to climb in over the
+bulwarks.  But were ye not afraid, lad, that some proud Spaniard,
+resenting your interference, might slit your weasand with his long
+sword?"
+
+"Afraid?" returned Dick.  "Not a whit.  'Tis true that when we first
+sighted the enemy coming out from behind this same island, and I learned
+that our Captain meant to attack him, I turned suddenly cold, hot as was
+the morning, and was seized with a plaguy doubt as to whether I should
+be able to carry myself as an Englishman and a Devon man should in the
+coming fight; but when the battle began I forgot all about my doubts,
+and thought no more of them until the fight was over and done with.
+Indeed, to be quite frank with ye, Phil, I was never happier, nor
+enjoyed myself more, than during the few minutes that the fight lasted.
+You know not what it feels like, for you were down in the cockpit, which
+was your proper place; but you may take my word for it that there is
+nothing in this world half so exhilarating as a good brisk fight."
+
+Stukely laughed.  "True, lad," he said; "I do not know from actual
+experience what it feels like to be engaged in a life-and-death
+struggle; for I have never yet taken part in such.  Yet I can well
+believe that it is as you say; for even down in the cockpit I felt the
+thrill and tingle of it all as I listened to the booming of the ordnance
+and heard the shouts of the men and the commands of the Captain; nay, I
+will go even farther than that, and confess that I had much ado to
+restrain myself from deserting my post and rushing up on deck to take my
+part in it all.  And, a word in your ear, Dick--I believe I should make
+a far better leader than I am ever like to be a surgeon; for as I stood
+there, listening to the sounds of the conflict, the strangest feeling of
+familiarity with it all came to me.  I suddenly felt that I had fought
+many's the time before; fleeting, indistinct visions of contending
+hosts, strangely armed and arrayed, floated before me; cries in a
+strange language, which still I seemed to understand, rang in my ears;
+and for a moment I completely lost sight of my surroundings, being
+transported to a land of cloudless skies, even as this, clothed with
+vegetation very similar to what we now behold around us, although the
+land of my vision was mountainous, with lakes that shone like mirrors
+embosomed among the mountains and were dotted with islands, some of them
+palm-crowned, while others bore stately temples of strange but beautiful
+architecture.  And the strangest part of it all was that, while it
+lasted, it was like a vivid memory of some scene that my eyes had rested
+upon often enough to grow familiar with, ay, as familiar as I am with
+the streets of Devonport and Plymouth!"
+
+"Ay; you were ever a fanciful fellow and a dreamer, Phil," replied Dick,
+who was one of the most matter-of-fact individuals who ever breathed.
+"I mind me how, many a time, when we have been sailing together outside
+Plymouth Sound, where a clear view could be had of the setting sun, you
+used to trace cloudy continents with bays, inlets, harbours, and
+outlying islands in the western sky; yes, and even ships sailing among
+them, and cities rearing themselves among the golden edges of the
+clouds."
+
+"Well, and was that so very wonderful?" retorted Stukely.  "Look at
+yonder sky, for instance.  Can you not imagine that great purple mass of
+cloud to be a vast island set in the midst of the sea represented by the
+blue-green expanse of sky beyond it?  And can you not see how the shape
+of the cloud lends itself to the fancy of jutting capes and forelands,
+of gulfs and sounds and estuaries?  And look at those small, outlying
+clouds nearest us; are not they the very image and similitude of islets
+lying off the coast of the main island?  And, as to cities, what can be
+a more perfect picture of a golden city built along the shore of a
+landlocked bay than that golden fringe of cloud yonder?  And behold the
+mountains and valleys--ay, and there is a lake opening up now in the
+very centre of the island.  Oh, Dick, my son, if you have not
+imagination enough to translate these pictures of the evening sky into
+glimpses of fairy land, and to derive pleasure therefrom, I pity you
+from my very soul."
+
+"Nay, then, no need to waste your pity on me, Sir Dreamer, for I need it
+not," retorted Dick.  "Doubtless you take joy of your fancies; but
+realities are good enough for me, at least such realities as these.
+Look at that bird hovering over yonder flower, for instance; smaller,
+much smaller, than a wren is he, yet how perfectly shaped and how
+gloriously plumaged.  Look to the colour of him, as rich a purple as
+that of your sunset cloud, with crest and throat like gold painted
+green.  And then, the long curved beak of him, see how daintily he dips
+it into the cup of the flower and sips the honey therefrom.  And his
+wings, why they are whirring so quickly that you cannot see but can only
+hear them!  Can any of your fancies touch a thing like that for beauty?"
+
+"That is as may be, Dick," answered Stukely.  "The bird is beautiful,
+undoubtedly, and no less beautiful is the flower from which he sips the
+honey that constitutes his food; indeed all things are lovely, had we
+but eyes to perceive their loveliness.  But come, the sun has set, and
+darkness will be upon us in another five minutes; it is time for us to
+be getting back to the camp."
+
+Despite the croaking of the frogs, the snore of the tree toads, the
+incessant buzz and chirr of insects, and the multitudinous nocturnal
+sounds incidental to life upon a tropical island overgrown with
+vegetation, ay, and despite the mosquitoes, too, all hands slept soundly
+that night, and awoke next morning refreshed and invigorated, the sick
+especially exhibiting unmistakable symptoms of improvement already, due
+doubtless to the large quantities of fruit which they had consumed on
+the preceding day.  The wounded, too, were doing exceedingly well, the
+coolness of the large tent in which they had passed the night, as
+compared with the suffocating atmosphere of their confined quarters
+aboard ship, being all in their favour, to say nothing of the assiduous
+care which Phil bestowed upon them.
+
+The first thing in order was for all hands who were able to go down to
+the beach and indulge in a good long swim, shouting at the top of their
+lungs, and splashing incessantly, in accordance with Marshall's orders,
+in order to scare away any sharks that might chance to be prowling in
+the neighbourhood.  Then, a spring of clear fresh water having been
+discovered within about three-quarters of a mile of the camp, one watch
+was sent off to the ship to bring ashore all the soiled clothing, while
+the other watch mounted guard over the camp; after which all hands went
+to breakfast; and then, working watch and watch about, there ensued a
+general washing of soiled clothes at the spring, and a subsequent drying
+of them on the grass in the rays of the sun.  This done, a gang was sent
+on board the ship to start the remaining stock of water and pump it out;
+after which the ship was lightened by the removal of her stores,
+ammunition, and ordnance, until her draught was reduced to nine feet,
+when her anchor was hove up and she was towed into the river, where she
+was moored, bow and stern, immediately abreast of the camp.  The
+completion of this job finished the day's work, at the end of which
+Marshall, having mustered all hands, proclaimed that in consequence of
+the lamented death of their gallant shipmate and officer, Mr Lumley, he
+had decided to promote Mr Winter to the position thus rendered vacant;
+and further that, as a second lieutenant was still required, he had
+determined, after the most careful consideration, to promote Mr Richard
+Chichester to that position, in recognition of the extraordinary valour
+which he had displayed on the previous day by boarding the Spanish ship
+and attacking her crew, single-handed, in the rear, thereby distracting
+the attention of the enemy and contributing in no small measure to their
+subsequent speedy defeat.  This decision on the part of the Captain,
+strange to say, met with universal and unqualified approval; for Dick's
+unassuming demeanour and geniality of manner had long since made him
+popular and a general favourite, while his superior intelligence, his
+almost instinctive grasp of everything pertaining to a ship and her
+management, and his dauntless courage, marked him out as in every
+respect most suitable for the position which he had been chosen to fill.
+
+The next two days were spent in clearing everything movable out of the
+ship, in preparation for heaving her down; after which she was careened
+until her keel was out of water, when the grass, weed, and barnacles
+which had grown upon her bottom during the voyage were effectually
+removed, her seams were carefully examined, and re-caulked where
+required, and then her bottom was re-painted.  This work was pushed
+forward with the utmost expedition, lest an enemy should heave in sight
+and touch at the island while the ship was hove down--for a ship is
+absolutely helpless and at the mercy of an enemy while careened--and
+when this part of the work was satisfactorily completed, all necessary
+repairs made, and the hull re-caulked and re-painted right up to the
+rail, the masts, spars, rigging, and sails were subjected to a strict
+overhaul and renovation.  This work was done in very leisurely fashion;
+for Marshall had by this time quite made up his mind to lie in wait for
+the plate ship which, as he had learned through documents found on board
+the _Santa Clara_, was loading at Cartagena for Cadiz, and he speedily
+arrived at the conclusion that a considerable amount of the waiting
+might as well be done at Barbados as elsewhere.  For the climate of the
+island was healthy, the sick were making excellent progress on the road
+toward recovery, and it was essential to the success of his enterprise
+that every man of his crew should be in perfect health; moreover, apart
+from the crew of the _Santa Clara_--which ship, he had every reason to
+believe, was daily forcing her way farther toward the heart of the North
+Atlantic--not a soul knew, or even suspected, the presence of the
+_Adventure_ in those seas; consequently he resolved to remain where he
+was until the last possible moment.  Such work, therefore, as needed to
+be done was done with the utmost deliberation and nicety; and when at
+length all was finished there still remained time to spare, which the
+men were permitted to employ pretty much as they liked, it having by
+this time been ascertained conclusively that, apart from themselves, the
+island was absolutely without inhabitants.
+
+At length, however, the time arrived when it became necessary to put to
+sea again; and on a certain brilliant morning the camp was struck, all
+their goods and chattels were taken back to the ship; and, with every
+man once more in the enjoyment of perfect health, with every water cask
+full to the bung-hole of sweet, crystal-clear water, and with an ample
+supply of fruit and vegetables on board, the _Adventure_ weighed anchor
+and stood away to the westward under easy sail, passing between the
+islands of Saint Vincent and Becquia with the first of the dawn on the
+following morning.
+
+Marshall had estimated that the passage from Barbados to Cartagena would
+occupy eight days; but to provide against unforeseen delays he allowed
+twelve days for its accomplishment, with the result that, no unforeseen
+delays having arisen, the _Adventure_ arrived off Cartagena just four
+days before the date upon which, according to the information obtained
+from the _Santa Clara_, the plate ship was to sail.  It was just about
+midnight when, according to Bascomb's reckoning, the ship reached the
+latitude of Cartagena, when she was hove-to.  But as Marshall had
+observed the precaution of maintaining a good offing during the entire
+passage, merely hauling in to the southward sufficiently to sight Point
+Gallinas in passing, and thus verify his position, it was not surprising
+that when the daylight came no land was in sight, even from the
+masthead.  This was perfectly satisfactory and as it should be;
+nevertheless it was important that explicit information should now be at
+once obtained concerning the plate ship, the progress which she was
+making toward the completion of her loading, and especially whether she
+would be ready to sail on the date originally named.  Marshall therefore
+summoned a council of war consisting of, in addition to himself,
+Bascomb, the master, Winter and Dick Chichester, the lieutenants, and
+Messrs. Dyer and Harvey, the two gentlemen adventurers.  The meeting was
+held in the main cabin; a chart of the coast was produced; and after a
+considerable amount of discussion it was finally determined to
+provision, water, and equip the longboat, remain hove-to where they were
+until nightfall, and then, filling on the ship, work her in toward the
+land until she was as close inshore as it would be prudent to take her,
+when the longboat was to be hoisted out and dispatched with a crew of
+four men, under the command of Marshall himself--who was the only man
+aboard who could speak Spanish reasonably well.  Then, while the
+_Adventure_, under Bascomb's command, bore up again and regained an
+offing of some thirty miles due west of Cartagena, the longboat was to
+proceed inshore, enter the bight between the island of Baru and the
+mainland, and there remain in concealment while Marshall should attempt
+to make his way into Cartagena harbour, and, if necessary, even
+penetrate into the town itself, in an endeavour to secure precise
+information relative to the movements of the plate ship.  It was further
+arranged that the _Adventure_ should remain in the offing during the
+whole of the succeeding day, working in toward the land again after
+nightfall, and hoisting two lanterns, one over the other, at her ensign
+staff as a guide for the longboat--should the latter by that time have
+accomplished her mission.  A bright lookout was to be maintained for the
+longboat, which was to signal her approach by displaying a single
+lantern; but should she be unable for any reason to rejoin the ship on
+the night agreed upon, the same tactics were to be pursued night after
+night for six nights; when, if she did not then return, it was to be
+assumed that she and her crew had fallen into the hands of the
+Spaniards, and Bascomb was to act as might be determined upon after
+consultation with the rest of the officers.
+
+This arrangement, then, was adhered to; the _Adventure_ remained hove-to
+in the offing during the whole of that day, filling away and beginning
+to work in toward the land about half an hour before sunset.  Captain
+Marshall then picked his longboat's crew--which consisted of Dick
+Chichester, George Burton, Robert Hogan, and Edward Fenner--and directed
+them to make all necessary preparations for accompanying him; after
+which they were to turn in and take their rest until they should be
+summoned on deck.
+
+It was just half-past two o'clock in the morning when Dick, having been
+aroused from a sound sleep by the cabin boy, presented himself, fully
+dressed, in the main cabin, where he found Captain Marshall already
+seated at the table, partaking of an early breakfast, in which, by a
+wave of the hand, he invited Chichester to join, which the latter
+promptly did, falling to with a good appetite.  A quarter of an hour
+later, having finished their meal, the pair passed out on deck, where
+they found the longboat, with six beakers of fresh water in her to serve
+as ballast, with her locker full of provisions, with her rudder shipped,
+and oars, masts, and sails lying upon her thwarts already slung and
+ready for hoisting out.
+
+It was a fine night, the sky clear, excepting for a few small drifting
+clouds, between which the stars shone brilliantly, the water smooth, the
+wind a moderate offshore breeze, and the land clearly in view some eight
+miles to windward; it was in fact a perfectly ideal night for such an
+expedition as was in contemplation.  The task of preparing the longboat
+had been entrusted to Mr Winter, who now reported her as ready;
+nevertheless Captain Marshall, like a prudent mariner, subjected her to
+a very close and careful scrutiny before giving the word to hoist her
+out.  Everything, however, was found to be quite as it should be,
+therefore, the crew's weapons having also been subjected to a rigid
+inspection, the order was given to heave the ship to and hoist out the
+boat.  Every preparation having been previously made, this business was
+soon accomplished; and on the stroke of three, by the ship's clock, the
+longboat shoved off and, stepping her masts, made sail for the land,
+being sped on her way by a hearty cheer from all hands aboard the
+_Adventure_, who had mustered to assist in and witness her departure.
+Then, the moment that the boat was clear, the ship's helm was put up and
+she was headed out to sea again under a press of canvas, with the object
+of running out of sight of the land before the arrival of daylight.
+
+As for the longboat, she was brought close to the wind, on the larboard
+tack, with Dick at the helm and Marshall sitting beside him, while the
+three mariners, perceiving that their services were not likely to be
+required further for some time, stretched themselves out in the bottom
+of the boat and were soon fast asleep.
+
+For the first hour of their progress the land to windward merely
+presented the appearance of a black blur, indistinctly seen under the
+star-spangled indigo of the night sky; but by the end of that time
+something in the nature of outline began to reveal itself, while, half
+an hour later, a long tongue of land became distinctly visible broad on
+their weather bow, with two or three much smaller detached blotches
+rising out of the sea ahead.  Standing up in the stern-sheets, Marshall
+scrutinised these appearances with the greatest care for several
+minutes; then, with a sigh of contentment, he sat down again.
+
+"It is all right, Dick," he said; "we have made a most excellent
+landfall.  That long stretch of land yonder is Baru Island, and the
+small detached blots of blackness are the detached islets at its
+southernmost extremity which we saw marked on the chart.  We must pass
+to leeward of them, lad, giving them a berth of at least a mile,
+because, if our chart is correct, there is a reef between us and them
+which we must avoid.  If we can only get up abreast of those islets
+before the daylight comes I shall be satisfied, because we shall then be
+hidden from the sight of any fishing canoes which may happen to be
+outside Cartagena harbour; and, once inside Baru, I think we need not
+have the slightest fear of discovery.  Moreover, I have an idea that we
+can make our way into the harbour from the back of Baru, without being
+obliged to go outside again, which will be a great advantage."
+
+"Have you formed any plan of action to be followed after we arrive at
+the back of the island?" demanded Dick.
+
+"Well, no; I can't say that I have," answered Marshall.  "My experience
+is that, in the case of expeditions of this kind, it is of little use to
+scheme very far ahead.  I have found that the best plan is to trust to
+luck, and be guided entirely by circumstances.  My object, of course, is
+to penetrate to the town of Cartagena itself, and there pick up all the
+news that I can get hold of relative to the movements of the plate ship,
+seeing her, if possible, and so acquainting myself with her build, rig,
+and general appearance, so that if by any chance she should sail in
+company with other ships I may know for certain which is the craft that
+we must single out for attack.  It may be possible for us to go up the
+harbour in the longboat, although I do not regard such a thing as very
+likely; there would be too much risk in it, I think, to justify such an
+attempt, at least until all other schemes have failed; and we are not
+out now in quest of adventure, or to incur unnecessary risks, but to
+obtain information; the adventure may come later on."
+
+"It is more than likely that it will," returned Dick, dryly; "for I
+cannot for the life of me see how we are to enter the town without
+exposing ourselves to very grave risk of discovery."
+
+"Oh, it may be done," asserted Marshall, with far more confidence than
+Dick thought was justified by the occasion.  "Cartagena has a population
+of several thousands, you know; and I do not suppose it is at all likely
+that everybody will know everybody else, even by sight; it will be very
+difficult for anybody to point to anybody else and say, with assured
+certainty, that he is a stranger who has no right to be there.  But, of
+course, we shall not all enter the town; at least I do not at present
+contemplate anything so foolhardy.  I shall attempt to get into the town
+alone, leaving the longboat snugly concealed but within easy reach, in
+case of the necessity for a rapid retreat arising; and you must keep
+your eyes open to guard against detection, and at the same time maintain
+a bright lookout for me, and be ready to come to my help, should I be
+hard pressed.  Ah! there is the reef that I spoke of a little while ago;
+see there, broad off the weather bow; you can see the surf breaking upon
+it--and there is a small island right ahead of us.  Keep her away, lad;
+up helm and let her go off a point.  So! steady as you go; that ought to
+carry us clear of everything.  And, thank God, there is the dawn coming;
+we shall just get nicely in before it grows light enough for anybody to
+see us."
+
+The longboat had by this time drawn close in with the land, the island
+of Baru looming up black and clear-cut to windward, with the islets and
+their adjacent reef, now known as Rosario Islands, a short quarter of a
+mile broad on the weather bow, and a clump of hills on the main beyond,
+just beginning to outline themselves sharply against the lightening sky
+behind them.  Daylight and darkness come with a rush in those latitudes,
+and by the time that the Rosario Islands were abeam the eastern sky had
+paled from indigo to white that, even as one looked, became flushed with
+a most delicate and ethereal tint of blush rose, which in its turn
+warmed as rapidly to a tone of rich amber, against which a cluster of
+mangrove-bordered islands, occupying what looked like the embouchure of
+a river, suddenly revealed themselves a point or two on the weather bow.
+Like magic the amber tint spread itself right and left along the
+horizon and upward toward the zenith, to be pierced, the next moment, by
+a broad shaft of pure white light which shot upward far into the
+delicate azure, which was now flooding the heavens and drowning out the
+stars, one after the other.  Then up shot another and another shaft of
+light, radiating from a point just below the horizon, like the spokes of
+a wheel.  Suddenly a little layer of horizontal clouds, a few degrees
+above the mangrove tops, became visible, rose-red and gold-edged; and an
+instant later a spark of molten, palpitating gold flashed and blazed
+through the ebony-black mangrove branches, dazzling the eye and tipping
+the ripples with a long line of scintillating gold which stretched clear
+from the shore to the boat, flooding her and those in her with primrose
+light.  Quickly the golden spark grew and brightened until, before one
+could draw breath a dozen times, it had expanded into the upper edge of
+a great throbbing, burning, golden disk, flooding land and sea with its
+golden radiance--and it was day.  The sea changed from purple to a clear
+translucent green; the vegetation ashore, still black immediately under
+the sun, merged by a thousand subtle gradations, right and left, into
+olive-green of every imaginable tint, and finally into a delicate rosy
+grey in the extreme distance; a multitude of trivial details of outline
+and contour, tree and rock, suddenly leapt into distinctness, a flock of
+pelicans rose from among the cluster of islands inshore and went
+flapping heavily and solemnly out to seaward; the dorsal fin of a shark
+drifted lazily past the boat--and the full extent of the bight behind
+the island of Baru swept suddenly into view.
+
+"Just in time," exclaimed Marshall, with a sigh of relief, as he rose
+and stretched himself.  "Round with her, lad, and head her up the bight
+while the wind lasts.  It will be a flat calm here in half an hour from
+now."
+
+"I hope not," said Dick, "for this bight is quite twelve miles long, by
+the look of it, and it will be no joke for four of us to be obliged to
+pull this heavy boat the greater part of that distance."
+
+"There will be no need," said Marshall.  "We are not in such a desperate
+hurry as that amounts to.  Take the boat close in under the shore of the
+island, and when the wind fails us we will anchor and have breakfast.
+The calm will probably last no longer than about an hour; then will come
+the sea breeze, which, I should say, from the trend of the coast just
+here, will probably draw right up the bight, and be a fair wind for us."
+
+Thus it proved; the force of the land breeze rapidly declined, until, in
+the course of half an hour, the boat scarcely retained steerage way.
+But during that half-hour she had progressed about two miles up the
+bight, while Dick had hugged the eastern shore of the island of Baru as
+closely as the depth of water would permit; and when at length the wind
+failed he took advantage of its last expiring breath to run the boat in
+behind a small rocky, tree-crowned bluff, where she was not only
+completely hidden from sight, but where her crew enjoyed the further
+advantage of being sheltered from the too ardent rays of the sun.  Here,
+having lowered their sails and moored the boat to a rock, they
+breakfasted comfortably and at their leisure upon fish caught during
+their progress up the bight, and which they broiled over a fire kindled
+by means of a pocket lens which Marshall made a point of carrying with
+him constantly.  The Captain was also pretty nearly correct in his
+estimate of the duration of the calm, for they had little more than
+finished their meal when the first cat's-paws heralding the approach of
+the sea breeze were seen playing here and there upon the surface of the
+water, and five minutes later the wind was roaring with the strength of
+half a gale over the top of the island, and whipping the surface of the
+bight into small, choppy, foam-capped seas.  Of this fine breeze they at
+once took advantage by casting off from the rock and hoisting their
+canvas, when away they went bowling merrily up the bight, at the head of
+which they arrived about an hour and a half later.
+
+The shape of the bight proved to be, roughly speaking, triangular,
+measuring about twelve miles long by about four miles wide at its
+entrance, narrowing at its upper end to a channel about twelve hundred
+feet wide, separating Baru from the mainland.  They passed through this
+channel before they fully realised where they were going, and upon
+issuing from its northern extremity suddenly found themselves in a broad
+sheet of water some eight miles long by about half that width--Cartagena
+harbour, without a doubt!  That would never do, at least in broad
+daylight; therefore, hastily putting the boat about, they ran back into
+the channel which they had just quitted, and beached the boat upon the
+shore of Baru, where, leaving the craft in charge of the three men,
+Marshall and Dick landed to reconnoitre.  The part of the island upon
+which they landed was quite low, and bordered with mangroves, of which
+fact they took advantage by concealing themselves among the trees, and
+from that secure hiding-place examining the harbour at leisure.
+
+They found that they were on the north-eastern extremity of the island
+of Baru, with the whole of the harbour of Cartagena before them, the
+roofs and spires of the town just showing waveringly, in a sort of
+mirage, over the low land which forms the easternmost extremity of the
+island of Tierra Bomba.  It is this same island of Tierra Bomba, by the
+way, which converts what would otherwise be an open roadstead into a
+landlocked harbour, for it forms the western side of the harbour, and
+serves as a natural breakwater, sheltering the roadstead very
+effectually when the wind happens to blow from the westward.  Also,
+being roughly triangular in shape, its eastern and western sides each
+measuring about four miles long, and its northern side about three
+miles, it divides the entire harbour into two parts, namely, the upper
+and the lower bay.  The upper bay in its turn is divided into the inner
+and the outer harbour by two irregularly shaped spits of low land, the
+western spit jutting out south and east in a sort of elbow from the
+promontory on which the city is built, while the eastern spit is divided
+from the mainland by a narrow channel, and is called Manzanillo Island.
+
+The foregoing is a brief and rough description of Cartagena harbour,
+given for the information of the reader and to enable him the better to
+understand what follows; but comparatively few of the above details were
+apparent to the two Englishmen lurking among the mangroves on the
+north-eastern extremity of Baru, for the island of Tierra Bomba, the
+most prominent object in sight, shut out much of the upper bay.  They
+obtained, however, a good view of the Boca Chica, or harbour entrance,
+and took careful note of the fact that it was effectually commanded, at
+its narrowest and most difficult point, by a battery built on the very
+beach itself, and a fort, or castle, crowning the crest of a hill
+immediately above.  They both agreed that if this was the only entrance
+to the harbour, and if the garrisons of those forts maintained a proper
+lookout, it should be quite impossible for a ship to enter or leave
+Cartagena harbour, except with the full permission of the authorities.
+
+"Well," exclaimed Marshall at last, when they had both familiarised
+themselves with everything that there was to see from their viewpoint,
+"this is all very well, and we have already learned quite enough to
+repay us for all our trouble in taking this trip.  But I have not yet
+seen nearly all that I want to see; therefore, by hook or by crook, I
+must get ashore upon that island yonder"--pointing to Tierra Bomba.
+"That hill at its north-eastern angle ought to command a view of the
+whole harbour and town, and I must get up there.  Now, how is it best to
+be done?"
+
+"It appears to me," said Dick, "that there is an opening of some sort--
+either a creek or the mouth of a small river--immediately opposite us,
+just to the right of that bay, and also to the right of those two hills,
+one of which is showing just clear of the other.  There are two small
+islets standing in the mouth of it--"
+
+"Yes, yes; I see what you mean," interrupted Marshall.  "Well, what is
+your suggestion?"
+
+"My suggestion," answered Dick, "is that we remain concealed until
+nightfall, and then that we should take the boat and explore that creek,
+or whatever it is; and if it proves to be a suitable hiding-place, well
+and good.  We will conceal the boat and her crew there, and to-morrow
+morning you and I can climb to the top of that hill and make all the
+observations we need, even, perhaps, to the extent of drawing a rough
+chart of the place.  It will cost us twenty-four hours of time; but I
+believe that the information which we shall thus obtain will more than
+repay us."
+
+"I am sure of it," answered Marshall, heartily; "and we'll do it, my
+lad.  Meanwhile, the mosquitoes are becoming something more than
+troublesome; so, as we have now seen all that it is possible for us to
+see from here, we'll get away back to the boat, or the men will begin to
+think that something has happened to us."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR.
+
+HOW MARSHALL AND DICK ENTERED CARTAGENA HARBOUR IN THE LONGBOAT.
+
+As Marshall had anticipated, the men were beginning to feel distinctly
+alarmed at the prolonged absence of their officers, admitting, indeed,
+that they were seriously debating the advisability of leaving the boat
+and instituting a search at the moment when Marshall and Dick
+reappeared.  This admission drew forth a sharp rebuke from the Captain,
+who there and then gave them strict orders that under no circumstances
+were they ever to dream of doing such a thing.  "For instance," said he,
+"what a pretty pickle should we all be in if, being discovered and
+pursued hotfoot by the enemy, we were to retreat to the boat and find
+that you men had left her.  It would mean that Mr Chichester and I
+would be obliged to shove off without you; and that in turn would mean
+that sooner or later you would inevitably fall into the hands of the
+enemy.  And let me tell you, men, that to fall into the hands of the
+Spaniards here means being clapt into the Inquisition.  And of those who
+get into the Inquisition not one in a hundred ever gets out again.
+Therefore, never leave your boat, under any circumstances whatsoever,
+except at the express command of your officers."
+
+It was by this time considerably past noon; the food was therefore
+produced, and all hands partook of a meal, after which there was nothing
+to be done until the evening; the men therefore disposed themselves in
+the bottom of the boat and took such snatches of sleep as the mosquitoes
+permitted, while Marshall and Dick sat in the stern-sheets and discussed
+plans for the morrow.
+
+At length, however, after an interval of waiting that soon grew terribly
+wearisome, the sun went down, darkness fell, and they pushed off the
+boat and got under way.  There was now a young moon of about four days
+old, and before she too set she afforded them light enough to make their
+way across the lower bay, a distance of about three and a half miles, to
+the island of Tierra Bomba, and to find the indentation to which Dick
+had directed Marshall's attention earlier in the day.  It proved to be a
+particularly snug little cove, about half a mile long by perhaps a
+quarter of a mile wide, with thickly wooded hills sloping down toward it
+on either side at its upper extremity.  Two small islets pretty
+effectually masked its entrance; and a dry sandbank in the middle of it
+occupied more than half its area, leaving a narrow channel all round it,
+the water in which was only just deep enough to afford unimpeded passage
+to the boat.  It was stark calm inside the cove, they were, therefore,
+obliged to lower the sails, strike the masts, and use the oars to reach
+the head of the creek; but when they arrived there they found a steep
+bank so completely overhung with trees and bushes that, when once the
+boat had been forced in underneath the branches, she might remain there
+for days with little or no fear of discovery.
+
+In this exceedingly snug berth it seemed almost ridiculous to think of
+keeping a watch; yet, being in the enemy's territory, they decided to do
+so; Marshall undertaking to stand the first watch of two hours, while
+Dick agreed to take the second.
+
+When, at ten o'clock, Marshall aroused Dick, in order that the latter
+might stand his watch, the Captain whispered:
+
+"I've been thinking about a good many things while I have been sitting
+here these two hours agone in the stern-sheets of this boat.  And, among
+other matters, I have thought that it might be very useful to know
+something more than we do about those two batteries that we took notice
+of while we were on the point yonder to-day.  Now, I'm not a bit sleepy.
+I don't believe I could get to sleep if I tried--also the night is
+delightfully cool; and, although the moon has gone down, the stars give
+quite enough light for my purpose, therefore, I am going to take a
+little walk along the shore to that battery on the beach.  It can't be
+very much more than two miles away; and night is the only time when it
+will be possible to examine the forts without running too much risk.  If
+I do not feel too tired I'll take that fort on the top of the hill on my
+way back; so if I do not return until close before daybreak you need not
+be unduly alarmed."
+
+"Very well, sir," answered Dick.  "We will keep a bright lookout.  And
+if by any chance things should go amiss, and you should be pursued, if
+you will fire two pistol shots, one close after the other, I will come,
+with one of the men, to meet you, provided, of course, that we are
+within hearing of the shots."
+
+"Yes; you may do that--if you hear the signal shots," agreed Marshall.
+"But," he added, "I shall need to be very hard pressed indeed to fire my
+pistols.  For shots at night-time anywhere near a battery would be
+certain to put everybody on the alert, and probably bring a bigger
+hornet's nest about my ears than you and all hands could beat off.
+Still, if I want help very badly I shall know what to do.  And now, I'll
+be off.  Keep a sharp lookout, and don't allow yourself to be surprised.
+Good night!"  As Dick murmured an answering "Good night" the Captain
+turned and disappeared in the darkness.
+
+All through the night a careful watch was maintained, but nothing in the
+slightest degree alarming occurred; and about an hour before daybreak
+Captain Marshall returned, having accomplished his mission to his own
+complete satisfaction.
+
+"I had no difficulty whatever," he explained to Dick, "nor did I
+encounter a single soul; indeed I am strongly of opinion that the
+island, or at least the southern half of it, is uninhabited, except for
+the garrisons of the fort and battery.  I tackled the battery first,
+making my way to it by passing round the base of the hill until I
+reached the shore-line of the next bay, which I then followed for the
+remainder of the distance.  And heavy walking I found it, with a murrain
+on it; for the sand was loose and deep, except where I came upon
+mangroves, and there the mud was even deeper than the sand, while, as
+for the mosquitoes, they were as eager for my blood as the Spaniards
+themselves would be if they but knew what my business is here.  However,
+I was not to be turned back by the mosquitoes, even though they assailed
+me in legions; and after trudging through the heavy sand for a full hour
+or more I found myself beneath the walls of the battery.
+
+"It is planned like a triangle, one face, mounting four guns, commanding
+the seaward end of the Boca, while the second face commands its inner
+extremity, the third face being turned toward the land and containing
+the entrance gate.  The point or apex of the triangle juts out into the
+water; I was therefore unable to walk completely round it; nevertheless
+I examined both sides by walking past the back of it.  The faces of the
+walls are quite smooth, and about twelve feet high; but the angles are
+set with rough quoin stones, up which, there being no lights in the
+battery, and no sign of a sentinel, I essayed to climb, accomplishing
+the ascent with no greater difficulty or hurt than the wearing of the
+soles off my stockings--for I took off my shoes for the sake of
+quietness and to gain a better foothold.  Having gained the parapet, I
+found two sentries sitting there, with their backs against the wall,
+fast asleep, with their matchlocks beside them.  Gently lifting their
+weapons in my hand, I shook out the priming--lest perchance they should
+awake and, seeing me, open fire upon me before I could get away--and
+then, replacing the weapons as I had found them, passed quietly on to
+examine the ordnance.  The guns are very formidable, of a pattern such
+as I have never before seen, being a good twenty foot in length, and of
+a bigness to take a shot the size of a man's head, as I learned by
+passing my hands over the topmost shot of a pile which stood beside each
+gun.  There are eight of these pieces of great ordnance, besides falcons
+and swivels which I did not stay to count, the heavy ordnance being all
+that caused me any anxiety.  And even now they do not greatly trouble
+me; for if they keep no better watch there on other nights than they did
+on this, it would be easy for a couple of resolute men to enter the
+place, even as I did, bind and gag the sentinels, and spike all eight of
+the guns, and never a man of them any the wiser until they came to put
+fire to their pieces.
+
+"Then, having seen all that I desired, I left the battery as I had
+entered it, and made my way up the hill to the castle on the top.  Here,
+however, I was less fortunate, there being no way of entering the
+building, save by walking in through the gate, or climbing the walls
+with the help of a scaling ladder.  The place is much more formidable
+looking than the battery, being in appearance a strong castle, with dry
+ditch, drawbridge, and portcullis to the main and, so far as I could
+see, the only entrance.  In plan it is shaped like the letter L, with
+the angle turned harbour-ward; and it must mount about thirty pieces of
+ordnance, for I managed to count that number of embrasures on its two
+faces.  But of sentinels I saw none; so, if they set a watch, I presume
+that, like those in the battery, the rascals are in the habit of
+sleeping their watch through; which is so much the better for
+freebooters like ourselves.  For the dry ditch is not difficult to
+cross, and I estimate that, once on the other side, a ladder of twenty
+foot in length should enable a party of half a dozen to reach the top;
+and, once on the parapet, they should be able to spike the whole thirty
+of those footy ordnance in ten minutes.  And all this means, friend
+Dick, that with the whole of the heavy ordnance spiked, in castle and in
+battery, there is nothing to prevent the _Adventure_ from sailing into
+the harbour, coming to an anchor, storming and blowing up both defences,
+and then holding the town to ransom, as well as capturing the galleon!
+For, as my soul liveth, I firmly believe that the castle and the battery
+constitute the entire defences of Cartagena!  And then, hey for old
+England again; for, with the ransom of the town and the booty from the
+galleon, there ought to be enough to make us all rich for life."
+
+"And if there is not, it ought not to be very difficult for us to play
+the same game with two or three other towns," remarked Dick.  "For I
+suppose it is safe to reckon that all the towns along the Main are
+wealthy enough to pay for looting?"
+
+"Ay; no doubt there are good pickings to be had out of every one of
+them," answered Marshall.  "But `one thing at a time' is a good maxim in
+such a business as ours, my lad; and we will see what Cartagena yields
+before we begin to think seriously about any of the other towns.  And
+now, here comes the dawn at last, for which thanks be; for I am as
+hungry as if I had spent all night to the top of Dartymoor, and want my
+breakfast."
+
+An hour later the meal had been prepared and eaten; after which Marshall
+and Dick, having provided themselves with food and water sufficient to
+last them until nightfall, if necessary, and having given the crew of
+the longboat most precise instructions as to how to act in the event of
+certain contingencies arising, cautiously emerged from their place of
+concealment, and, carrying the boat compass with them for the purpose of
+enabling them to take such bearings as might be required, set out upon
+their way to the top of the hill which dominated the north-east corner
+of the island.  The going was exceedingly difficult, for the slope was
+rough and steep, also it was so thickly overgrown with vegetation that
+for a good part of the distance they had literally to cut a way for
+themselves; therefore, although the distance which they had to traverse
+was little more than a mile it was well on toward noon when at length
+they reached the summit.  But, when there, they were fain to admit that
+their labour had been well spent; for as they topped the last rise the
+vegetation suddenly became much thinner, so that they found themselves
+able to force a way through it without being obliged to have recourse to
+their hangers; and presently they emerged upon the bare hilltop, and
+beheld, spread out at their feet, a magnificent panorama embracing a
+view of the whole upper bay and inner harbour, with the town of
+Cartagena a bare four miles distant.  And there, in the midst of a whole
+fleet of smaller craft, they also beheld a tall and stately ship, a
+single glance at which sufficed to assure them that she could be none
+other than the plate ship which was the great object of their quest.
+
+"There she be!" exclaimed Marshall, pointing.  "All of seven hundred
+ton, or more; and deep in the water, too.  She must have pretty nearly,
+or quite, finished loading.  Seems to me that we're only just in time.
+Now, Dick, my lad, this is your opportunity to make the chart that you
+were talking about.  Come along, and let's get about it; I'll help you.
+To-night we must make our way into the city, somehow, and find out by
+hook or by crook exactly when she is to sail.  Now, how do we begin upon
+the chart?"
+
+"Well," said Dick, "to be of any use it must be tolerably accurate, and
+drawn to scale; and the top of this hill is admirably adapted for our
+purpose.  Our first business must be to measure off as correctly as
+possible the longest line we can get--and, with a little management, I
+think we ought to be able to make that line a mile in length, which will
+be long enough for our purpose.  Then, having measured off our line, and
+taken its compass bearing, all that will remain to be done will be to
+take, from each end of the line, the compass bearing of as many objects
+as we require; and where the several bearings intersect will be the
+correct positions of those objects.  Then we can complete the chart
+accurately enough for our purpose by sketching in the details between
+the objects, the positions of which we have determined.  See, this is
+the sort of thing I mean."  And, drawing a scrap of paper from his
+pocket, Chichester rapidly sketched a diagram illustrating his meaning.
+
+Marshall took the sketch and considered it attentively.  "Yes," he said
+at length, "that ought to be near enough for our purpose.  But how are
+you going to measure your line?"
+
+"Quite easily," answered Dick.  "When I learned that I was to accompany
+you, the idea of drawing a chart of the harbour at once occurred to me,
+and I thought out the plan that I have just explained to you.  I also
+borrowed from the carpenter a ball of fine cord, which I then proceeded
+to knot very carefully at every foot, measured with the carpenter's
+rule.  Here it is, just one hundred feet long; and with the help of it
+we ought to have no difficulty in measuring our line."
+
+Nor had they: for the hilltop was quite level enough for their purpose.
+They measured it twice, going and returning, in order to ensure the
+greater accuracy, and, laying down their work on paper to scale as they
+proceeded, managed before dark to secure an exceedingly useful and
+tolerably complete chart of the upper bay and inner harbour, with the
+help of which they felt that they ought to be able to find their way to
+the town, even on the darkest night.  Of course they were not able to
+ascertain the depth of water by this means; but the even colour of it
+seemed to indicate that there were no hidden dangers to guard against
+anywhere except just inside the entrance of the inner harbour, where the
+presence of a shoal obstructing the fairway was clearly indicated by a
+certain glassiness of surface, which was duly recorded upon the chart.
+
+The preparation of this chart served to familiarise them with the
+principal features of the harbour in a really wonderful manner, and to
+fix in their memories the relative positions of them one with another.
+But that was not all; for while they were at work their eyes were busy
+noting various details, one of which was that a small fishing village
+existed at the base of the hill upon which they were at work, and not
+more than half a mile from the spot where the longboat lay concealed.
+This was a discovery of some importance to them, for it at once
+suggested the possibility of "borrowing" a canoe from the village, after
+dark, and proceeding in her to the city; by which plan they would run
+much less risk of detection than if they attempted to reach the city
+with the longboat.
+
+They completed their labours and set out to walk down the hill on their
+way to the boat while the sun was still nearly an hour above the
+horizon, and were safely aboard her again ere darkness fell.  Then,
+having partaken of a meal, Marshall and Dick stretched themselves along
+in the stern-sheets of the boat, in order to snatch an hour or two of
+sleep before embarking upon by far the most hazardous part of their
+enterprise, namely, their excursion to the city of Cartagena.
+
+Marshall had given instructions that he and Dick were to be called
+punctually at eight o'clock; but when that hour arrived and the man who
+had the watch proceeded to arouse them, it appeared that the Captain was
+already awake, not having been to sleep at all, in fact; and as Dick
+seemed to be fast locked in the arms of slumber, Marshall softly
+whispered to the man who was about to arouse him, that he was to be
+permitted to sleep on, at the same time composing himself to rest and
+giving fresh instructions that both were to be called at midnight.  From
+which it was evident that in the interim he had modified his original
+plan.
+
+When at length midnight arrived and the pair were duly awakened Marshall
+remarked with a grin which the darkness effectually concealed:
+
+"Well, lad, hast had a good sleep?"
+
+"Excellent," answered Dick.  "I feel as fresh as a lark, and can
+scarcely realise that I have only been asleep two hours."
+
+"Two hours!" retorted Marshall, with a laugh.  "Thou hast had six hours
+of good, honest sleep; and 'tis midnight instead of eight o'clock.  The
+fact is," he continued in more serious tones, "I could not sleep when I
+first attempted to do so.  My thoughts were busy with the task that lay
+before me; and I could not see how it was to be done in the time that I
+had allowed myself.  The way that I looked at the matter was this: I had
+arranged that we were to start from here at eight o'clock.  By the time
+that we had found our way round to the village where we hoped to get a
+canoe, it would be nearly or quite nine; and by the time that we reached
+Cartagena it would be ten o'clock, or after; there would be no work
+doing, and most of the good folk would be abed; thus I should stand a
+very poor chance of gaining any information worth having.  The proper
+time for me to be ashore, there, is during the day, when everybody is
+astir, when there are plenty of people about to talk to and ask
+questions of, and when they will be too busy to take particular note of
+me, and wonder who I am and where I came from.  So I altered my plan,
+deferring our departure until now, which will afford me plenty of time
+to get into the city before daylight.  Then I shall have the whole day
+before me, if I find that I require it, in which to look about me and
+make a few discreet enquiries; and as soon after dark as it is safe to
+return I will come back; reaching the boat, if all be well, in time to
+go out and rejoin the _Adventure_ to-morrow night about this time.  Now,
+I shall want you to go with me as far as the village, to help me, if
+need be, to secure a canoe; and when I have done that, and am fairly
+under way, you can come back here to the boat, and wait for me; for the
+work that I have to do can best be done single-handed.  Now, if you have
+any questions to ask, ask them; but if not, we may as well be off, for I
+want to allow myself plenty of time to make my way into the town."
+
+Dick intimated that he believed he quite understood the scheme which the
+Captain had outlined, and that he had only one question to ask, namely,
+how long the boat was to remain where she was in the event of Marshall
+being detained in Cartagena longer than he anticipated.
+
+"How long?" repeated Marshall.  "Let me see.  This will make the second
+complete night that we have been absent from the ship--although it seems
+very much longer.  Stay here, if necessary, for four days and nights
+longer, as arranged with Bascomb; and if I am not back by midnight of
+the fourth night my orders are that you are to rejoin the ship, report
+to Winter and Bascomb all that we have done and learned; and say it is
+my wish that they shall act as may seem to them best, and without any
+reference at all to what may have become of me; for if I do not return
+to you by the time that I have named it will be because I cannot, having
+fallen into the hands of the Spaniards.  And now, if you are ready, let
+us be going."
+
+Silently, and with the observance of every precaution to prevent
+betrayal of the longboat's hiding-place to any chance wanderer in the
+neighbourhood, the pair forced a way through their leafy bower and up
+the steep bank until they emerged upon clear ground, when, bearing away
+to the eastward round the foot of the hill which they had that day
+ascended, they groped their way cautiously over the unfamiliar ground
+until, in the course of about half an hour, they caught the dim shimmer
+of starlight upon water, and, between them and it, a group of dark,
+shapeless blotches which, upon their nearer approach, they identified as
+the hovels constituting the fishing village which they had seen during
+the day from the top of the hill.
+
+Circling round these, they presently reached the water's edge, where, as
+they had fully anticipated, they found a dozen or more canoes of various
+sizes hauled up on the beach, most of them with their nets piled up in
+their sterns.  They looked about for the smallest canoe they could find,
+and having overhauled her as carefully as the light would allow, and
+satisfied themselves as to her seaworthiness, removed the nets from her
+to the craft nearest at hand and, lifting her by her two ends, carried
+her down to the water, and set her afloat.  Then, with a quick
+hand-clasp and a low-murmured "Goodbye, lad, and take care of yourself
+and the men," Marshall stepped softly into the crank little craft,
+seated himself in the stern, and with a vigorous thrust of the paddle
+sent himself off into deep water, where a few minutes later he was
+swallowed up by the darkness.  Dick stood by the water's edge, watching
+the small black blur which represented man and canoe as it receded from
+the shore until it vanished; and then turned slowly away to retrace his
+steps to the longboat, happily unconscious that he had looked his last
+upon his gallant leader.
+
+Returning safely and without difficulty to the longboat, Dick Chichester
+whispered to the man who was keeping watch that thus far all was well;
+and then bestowed himself in the stern-sheets to snatch another hour or
+two of sleep.  Then, after a somewhat late breakfast, he emerged
+cautiously from his leafy refuge and climbed to the top of the hill
+again, ensconcing himself well within the shadow of a thick bush, from
+beneath which he commanded an uninterrupted view of the entire upper bay
+and harbour.  Not that he expected to see much, or, indeed, anything in
+particular; but he thought it well to keep a watchful eye upon things in
+general and, if anything particular should happen ashore, take care to
+be where he might perchance be able to detect some indication of it.
+But he saw nothing at all to indicate that anything unusual had taken
+place, or was taking place, in Cartagena, the only occurrence of a
+noticeable character that came under his observation that day being a
+violent quarrel among certain of the inhabitants of the fishing village
+below, which quarrel, he shrewdly conjectured, might possibly have
+something to do with a missing canoe.
+
+He remained on the hill the whole of that day, allowing himself only
+just daylight enough to find his way back to the longboat, and then,
+having partaken of a meal, disposed himself to secure a good long
+uninterrupted night's rest, warning the men, however, to be alert during
+their watch, so that if the Captain should return during the night and
+need assistance, they might be prepared to render it quickly.
+
+But Captain Marshall did not return during that night; therefore after
+an early breakfast the next morning Dick again ascended the hill to keep
+watch upon the town and harbour, thinking that mayhap he might thus
+catch an early glimpse of Marshall returning; and if haply he should
+chance to be pursued, learn the fact in time to go to his assistance.
+But this day, too, passed uneventfully away, the galleon, with the great
+golden flag of Spain flaunting at her stern, showing no visible sign of
+an early departure.
+
+Dick felt so firmly convinced that the Captain would return some time
+during the ensuing night that he sat up, waiting for him, and taking
+watch after watch as it came round.  But the morning dawned with still
+no sign of Marshall; and then the young officer began to feel seriously
+apprehensive; for he could not imagine that his leader should spend two
+whole days in Cartagena without learning all that he desired to know
+upon a matter which must be so widely discussed as the departure of an
+exceptionally rich treasure ship for Old Spain.  Yet of course there was
+the chance that Marshall might be voluntarily prolonging his stay for
+the purpose of obtaining some especially valuable item of information;
+meanwhile, the four days having not yet expired, his duty was to remain
+where he was, and keep a sharp lookout.  So again Dick wended his way to
+the top of the hill, and ensconced himself in his now familiar
+hiding-place beneath the bush.
+
+And on this day his vigilance was rewarded by signs of activity on board
+the galleon, to wit, a slow and very deliberate bending of her sails; so
+slow and deliberate, indeed, that at the end of the day only about half
+her canvas had been secured to the yards.  This of course indicated that
+the date of her sailing was drawing nigh; and he comforted himself with
+the reflection that possibly this date had not yet been definitely
+fixed--the Spaniards were notoriously dilatory in this respect, thinking
+nothing of a fortnight's, or even a month's delay--and it might perhaps
+be that Marshall was patiently awaiting the fixing of this date before
+rejoining them, knowing that the boat would be awaiting him whenever he
+might find it convenient to return to her.
+
+Thinking and reasoning thus, Dick at length succeeded in so completely
+convincing himself that Marshall's delay was entirely voluntary, that
+the anxiety which had gradually been growing upon him passed away; so
+completely, indeed, that he composed himself to rest with the absolute
+conviction that the Captain would return sometime during the night; the
+only orders which he deemed it necessary to give the men being, that
+they were to maintain a sharp lookout, and awake him immediately upon
+their general's arrival.
+
+But the night passed; and day--the fourth day since Marshall had left
+them, and the last of their prescribed sojourn where they were--dawned
+without sign of the absentee; and when at length Dick Chichester
+awakened and this fact was borne in upon him, all his former
+apprehensions returned with redoubled force.  Something had gone wrong
+with the Captain; he was convinced of it; Marshall would never
+deliberately tarry so long in a town, every man, woman, and child in
+which was an enemy; his identity as an Englishman had been discovered,
+and he had been taken, without a doubt.  Yet, with a sudden revulsion of
+feeling, Dick remembered that one trait of his Captain's character was a
+certain daredevil recklessness which made peril, or rather the
+overcoming of it, a joy and a delight, and caused him actually to court
+danger for the pleasurable excitement which the evasion of it afforded
+him.  Might it not be, then, that Marshall, knowing the fate that
+awaited him in the event of detection, was deliberately lingering in
+Cartagena in order that he might enjoy to the fullest possible extent
+the gratification of hoodwinking his enemies and moving freely among
+them unsuspected?
+
+Swayed thus between hope and fear, the harassed young lieutenant once
+more, and for the last time, mounted the hill and resumed his anxious
+watch of the town and harbour.  But no indication of any happening of an
+unusual character, either in the town or in the harbour, was
+perceptible; everything seemed to be going forward precisely as usual;
+the only occurrence that in the slightest degree interested the watcher
+being that the crew of the galleon resumed their occupation of bending
+sails, which operation, proceeding with the same deliberation as before,
+they contrived to complete about half an hour before sunset; when Dick,
+unutterably weary and discouraged with his long and fruitless watch,
+arose and made his way down the hill to the place where the longboat lay
+hidden.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE.
+
+HOW THEY DISARMED THE BATTERIES ON TIERRA BOMBA.
+
+As Chichester neared the now familiar spot where he had left the
+longboat, he suffered himself to indulge in a returning feeling of
+elation, for the notion somehow came to him that he would find Marshall
+in the boat calmly awaiting his return; and this feeling presently grew
+so strong within him that he could scarcely credit his eyes when, upon
+passing through the screen of concealing foliage, he saw only the three
+seamen curled up in the boat.  They roused themselves from their
+semi-somnolent condition and sat up to receive him, with glances of mute
+enquiry in their eyes.
+
+For a few moments Dick remained silent, absolutely speechless with
+disappointment.  Then he remarked:
+
+"What, lads, has the Captain not yet returned, then?"
+
+"No, sir," they answered in chorus.  "We have seen naught of him, or
+indeed of anybody else, since you left us this morning."
+
+"Then," said Dick, "I greatly fear that evil has befallen him and that
+he has been discovered and taken by the Spaniards.  For this is the last
+day of our stay here; and his orders to me were that if he returns not
+by midnight we are to proceed to sea and rejoin the ship; for his
+failure to return will be due to the fact of his having been captured.
+Still, there are six hours to run yet before midnight, and he may return
+even at the very last moment.  Let us hope that he will.  And now, men,
+give me some supper, for I have eaten nothing since I left you this
+morning."
+
+The time between then and midnight was passed by Dick in a state of
+feverish suspense, that toward the end became almost unendurable,
+causing him to start and jump at every trivial sound that reached his
+ear.  A dozen times at least he sprang to his feet with the joyous
+exclamation of "Here he is!" when the flutter of a dry leaf falling from
+its parent bough, the soft rustle of foliage in the night wind, or the
+movement of some restless bird broke the silence of that secluded spot;
+but he was always mistaken.  The Captain came not; and at length his
+watch informed him that the time was half an hour after midnight.  Then
+he rose to his feet with a sigh of bitter disappointment and said:
+
+"It is no good, lads; we must not delay our departure any longer; we
+have allowed the Captain half an hour's grace, and if he could have come
+he would have been with us before now.  Without doubt he is a prisoner,
+and we can best serve him now by returning to the ship with all speed
+and reporting the fact of his capture to the others, who must then
+decide whether or not we shall sail into the harbour, attack the town,
+and endeavour to rescue him.  Cast off the painter, and let us be moving
+without further delay."
+
+Almost careless now whether or not they attracted attention, they hauled
+the boat out from her place of concealment and, stepping the masts,
+hoisted their sails and got under way, the wind just permitting them to
+lay their course down past the sand spit and out through the entrance of
+the cove into the lower bay without breaking tacks.  Then, to save time,
+Dick determined to risk the passage of the Boca Chica, the usual harbour
+entrance, instead of taking the longer route out to sea behind the
+island of Baru, relying upon the indifferent lookout of the sentinels as
+reported by Marshall to enable the boat to pass undetected.  In this
+they were completely successful, the occupants of the batteries giving
+no sign that the passage of the boat had been observed; and half an hour
+after emerging from their place of concealment they found themselves
+safely clear of everything and out at sea.
+
+The night was dark but clear, with a fresh land breeze blowing, and a
+sky heavily flecked with fast-scurrying clouds, between which the stars
+and moon blinked down upon them intermittently.  They were no sooner
+clear of the land than they began to look about them for the ship, and
+within a few minutes they caught sight of her signal lanterns about
+eight miles distant, dead to leeward.  After that everything went quite
+smoothly; they hoisted their own signal lamp, and bore away dead before
+the wind, leaving it to the ship to pick them up, which she did about an
+hour later.
+
+Their shipmates manifested the utmost interest in their return, all
+hands mustering on deck to see the boat come alongside and hear the
+news.  When, upon the boat being brought to the lee gangway, Dick led
+the way up the side, he was met at the entrance port by Bascomb, Winter,
+Dyer, and Harvey, each of whom at the same instant fired at him the
+question:
+
+"Where is the Captain?"
+
+"Lost--taken, I fear," answered Dick.  "He left us four nights ago,
+intending to make his way into the city of Cartagena, for the purpose of
+learning precisely when the galleon is to sail, together with any other
+information which he might be able to pick up.  His instructions were
+that I was to await his return until midnight to-night, and if he then
+failed to return it would be because something untoward had happened to
+him, in which case I was to rejoin the ship at once and report to you,
+when you would act according to your discretion after consulting
+together."
+
+For a moment there was a dead silence; then Bascomb turned to his fellow
+officers, and said:
+
+"My masters, this loss of our general is a very serious matter, and
+needs looking into.  Let us all, therefore, retire to the cabin and hear
+what Mr Chichester has to tell us about it; after which, as was
+arranged when Captain Marshall left us six nights ago, we must all
+consult together and decide what our next step is to be.  Come then,
+gentlemen, to the cabin.  Mr Chichester, you will be pleased to
+accompany us."
+
+Therewith the three principal officers of the ship and the two gentlemen
+adventurers retired to the great cabin, where, seated upon the lockers,
+and with Dick occupying a chair in front of them, the tale was told of
+all that had befallen the boat and its crew, from the moment of her
+departure to that of her return, including the several expeditions to
+the top of the hill on Tierra Bomba, and the drawing of the chart.
+
+"And where is that chart now?" demanded Bascomb.  "Have you it, or did
+Captain Marshall take it with him?"
+
+"I have it," answered Dick, "and here it is," producing the sketch.
+"Fortunately the Captain left it with me, not needing it himself, since
+all the information required to enable him to make his way to Cartagena
+he could carry in his head."
+
+The four who were sitting on the opposite side of the table bent over
+the document, examining it closely for several minutes.  At length
+Bascomb looked up and said:
+
+"My masters, if this chart be reliable--and it should be, judging from
+the pains taken by our Captain and Mr Chichester--it should suffice to
+enable us to take the ship right up to Cartagena and lay her alongside
+the galleon.  And if that ship can be taken by surprise and without loss
+on our part, as I think she may, what is to hinder us from taking the
+town and demanding a good heavy ransom for it, part of which ransom
+shall consist in the return to us, sound and unhurt, of our Captain?
+And if they refuse, or are unable to return our Captain to us in the
+condition specified, what say you to sacking the place and giving it to
+the flames?  Depend upon it, by so doing we shall soon learn the fate of
+Captain Marshall, and where he is to be found, for there will be a
+hundred who will be only too ready to curry favour with us by telling us
+all that they know, in the hope that thereby we may be induced to spare
+their property."
+
+"Ay, that will they, I warrant," answered Winter.  "And woe betide the
+city and all in it if aught of evil has been done to our Captain!  We
+will find every man who has been in anywise responsible for that evil,
+and will hang him before his own door for all men to see how dangerous a
+thing it is for a Spaniard to lay violent hands upon an Englishman!
+Now, what say ye, gentles, shall we go in at once and do the work while
+our blood is hot within us?"
+
+"Nay, sirs," answered Dick; "that may scarcely be.  For if our Captain
+be indeed taken, as I greatly fear me he is, depend upon it the
+authorities will have identified him as an Englishman, in despite of any
+tale that he may have told them, and will, in consequence, suspect the
+presence of an English ship somewhere in the neighbourhood.  And,
+following that suspicion, their first act would be to warn those in the
+forts on Tierra Bomba to be on the watch for that ship's appearance.
+And once seen it will, according to the Captain's own account, be
+impossible for us to force our way into the harbour unless the guns in
+those forts be first spiked.  Now, gentles, I am the youngest of you
+all, but I have been inside and seen the place.  Moreover, I have been
+privileged to discuss with the Captain this very question of taking the
+ship up to the town, from which discussion arose my determination to
+make that chart; and my advice is, that we defer our attempt until
+to-morrow night, and that in the meantime I be permitted to return in
+the longboat to our former hiding-place, provided with hammers and nails
+for the spiking of the guns and such other necessaries as I may require,
+together with a crew of six of our best men.  We can get back to our
+place of concealment before daylight, and there remain in hiding until
+midnight or later, when we will sally forth, steal into those two forts,
+overpower and gag the sentinels, and spike the guns, after which we will
+signal the ship by the burning of portfires where they cannot be seen
+from the town, when you will sail in, I meeting you outside and piloting
+you in.  We can then land a party, destroy both batteries by blowing
+them up, capture the galleon and the town, and sail out to sea again,
+unscathed, when we have finished our business with the Spaniards."
+
+"Thy plan sounds promising, young sir," answered Bascomb presently,
+after considering the matter a little; "but there is one weak point in
+it, which is this.  If, as you seem to think, the Spaniards have taken
+our Captain, and thereby are led to suspect the presence of an English
+ship in the neighbourhood; and, suspecting such presence, should warn
+the garrisons of those two forts to be on the lookout for her--all of
+which I grant to be more than likely--what hope have you of being able
+to surprise those forts and spike their guns?"
+
+"The task will be a difficult one, I admit," answered Dick, with a shrug
+of the shoulders; "but, with all submission, sirs, my plan is the only
+one offering a chance of success.  For--and this is the fundamental fact
+governing all else--the guns must be spiked and the forts destroyed
+before this ship can enter Cartagena harbour or, having entered, get out
+again.  But the forts once in our possession the whole town and harbour,
+with all within them, will be at our mercy.  The important matter,
+therefore, to be determined is: By what means can we ensure obtaining
+possession of the forts with the minimum of loss to ourselves?"
+
+"Yes," agreed Bascomb, "that is undoubtedly the point.  Now, gentles,
+let us have your opinions.  Has any one of you a better plan to offer
+than that of our junior lieutenant?"
+
+At this moment a stateroom door opened and Stukely emerged from the
+smaller room.  Approaching the table, he stood and looked smilingly down
+upon the company assembled.
+
+"Your pardon, fair sirs," he said, "for thrusting myself uninvited into
+your counsels.  The surgeon is supposed to know but little of warfare
+beyond the healing of such hurts as may be received therein, but I
+happened to be lying awake in my cabin when this conference began, and I
+could not avoid hearing all that has passed, and I am of opinion that I
+can help you.  As my friend, Chichester, here has put it, the problem
+which confronts you is that of securing possession of the forts without
+suffering loss of men.  Now, the chief danger, to my mind, arises from
+the difficulty of entering the forts without attracting the attention of
+the sentinels, thus causing them to raise the alarm and bring the entire
+garrison about our ears.  Is not that so?"
+
+The party at the table signified that it was.
+
+"Very good, then," resumed Stukely.  "Now we can go on.  Though you are
+probably not aware of it, my chief delight is research, the
+investigation of, among other things, the properties and action upon the
+human system of the juices of herbs.  Now, while we were at Barbados I
+spent much time in the collection of the leaves, roots, seeds, and
+fruits of several plants; and since then I have been diligently
+experimenting with them, with the result that I have evolved from one of
+them a liquor, one inhalation of the odour of which will plunge a man
+into a state of such complete insensibility that, as I believe, a limb
+might be removed from him without his feeling it or being any the wiser.
+My suggestion, therefore," continued Stukely, ignoring the expressions
+of wonder evoked by his statement, "is that I be permitted to go in the
+boat with Chichester, taking a vial of the liquor with me, and upon our
+arrival ashore I will enter the forts with him, subject the sleeping
+sentinels--I humbly trust that they may be sleeping--to the stupefying
+influence of the decoction, whereby they may be bound and gagged without
+difficulty or the raising of an alarm which would put their fellow
+soldiers on the alert; and then between us the guns can be spiked at our
+leisure.  The remaining details I leave to your riper judgment and
+experience, gallant sirs."
+
+"But, doctor," demanded Bascomb, "are you quite sure that this elixir or
+essence of yours may be depended upon to produce the effect stated?"
+
+"I am," answered Stukely, with a smile, "for I have already tested it
+upon myself--no matter how--and the effect is everything that can
+possibly be desired."
+
+"Then--what say you, gentles--shall we allow the surgeon to go with Mr
+Chichester and further test the efficacy of his decoction upon the
+Spanish sentinels?" asked the master.
+
+"'Twould be folly in us if we did not avail ourselves of the virtues of
+Mr Stukely's most fortunate discovery," said Winter; "and I for one am
+in favour of acceding to his proposal."
+
+"And I, also," agreed Dick, in response to a glance from Bascomb.
+
+The two gentlemen adventurers, when appealed to for their opinion, at
+once agreed that the experiment was quite worth trying; and Bascomb's
+proposal was accordingly agreed to _nem. con_.
+
+"That matter, then, is disposed of," remarked Bascomb.  "Now, the next
+thing which we have to decide is this--assuming that Mr Chichester
+succeeds in spiking the guns of the forts--what is to be our next step?
+Are we to take the ship boldly into the harbour and proceed with our
+business of capturing the galleon and the town, trusting that Dame
+Fortune will so far favour us as to permit of our getting out again
+before the soldiers can unspike their guns; or should we anchor, as soon
+as inside, land a strong party, and capture and destroy the forts before
+attempting anything else?  It is the guns, and they only, not the forts,
+which we have to fear; and if we could but permanently disable those
+guns, the forts and their garrisons might go hang, so far as we are
+concerned."
+
+"Certainly, sir," cut in Dick, before anyone else could speak.  "You
+have hit the nail on the head.  We need trouble about naught except the
+ordnance, and them we must destroy.  And I know how to do it, too.  We
+will take with us enough powder to double charge each gun; having done
+which we will seal their muzzles with clay.  I know where to find as
+much clay as we shall need; and then we will prime each piece, lay a
+quick match from priming to priming, light the match, and run for our
+lives.  The guns will burst, and we can then do what we please with the
+galleon and the town.  But in order to ensure complete success, the
+ordnance in both batteries must be fired as nearly as possible at the
+same moment; therefore a resolute man must be left in the lower battery
+to fire the match upon the instant that he hears the explosion of the
+guns in the upper battery, after which he must run for his life.  I can
+see exactly how the thing is to be done, sirs; and if you approve of my
+plan we will be starting at once, with your good leave; for it is
+already late, and we shall have none too much time for the work which is
+to be done."
+
+"You are right, young sir," agreed Bascomb; "time is so valuable now
+that we dare waste no more in further discussion; therefore your plan,
+which is an excellent one, must serve.  I would that I could go in your
+stead, for you appear to be already worn-out with fatigue and lack of
+sleep; but you have been over the ground already, and know it, therefore
+weary though you may be I fear that you must needs go.  So pick your
+men, sir, as many as you need, remembering that your party must be
+strong enough to carry the powder up to the forts; procure from the
+gunner all that you require; and get you gone.  And may God go with you!
+Amen."
+
+Half an hour later the longboat, under Dick's command, and with Stukely
+sitting in the stern-sheets beside him, was once more under way and
+beating in toward the land under a press of sail, while the _Adventure_,
+with all lights out, lay to in the offing, awaiting the signal of the
+explosion of the ordnance in the forts to fill away and stand boldly in
+toward the harbour.  So sorely were they pressed for time that Dick
+dared not waste any in the attempt to elude observation by creeping in,
+as on the first occasion, behind the island of Baru; he headed as
+straight as the wind would allow for the Boca Chica, trusting that he
+might be fortunate enough to slip through unobserved in the darkness,
+especially as it was now past three o'clock in the morning--and if the
+sentinels slept at all at their posts, after the warning to hold
+themselves on the alert which they might be supposed to have received
+from the authorities, they might be expected to be asleep now.  His hope
+appeared to be justified; for the longboat slid past the smaller battery
+down on the beach, unchallenged, and some five minutes later, grounded
+on the sand about a quarter of a mile farther in.  Then, silently as
+ghosts, the men lowered the sails, leaving the masts standing, and
+stepped out on the sand, each bearing his appointed load of powder upon
+his shoulder, while Dick and Stukely, with swords drawn, and the former
+carrying a coil of quick match wound round his waist, led the way.
+
+They directed their steps southward toward the battery which they had
+sailed past a few minutes earlier, and which could just be distinguished
+as a darker blur against the blackness of the night.  Not a light of any
+description showed about the building, nor was there a sound to be heard
+save the soft lap and splash of the water on the margin of the beach to
+the left of them, and the sough of the land breeze among the trees and
+bushes on their right.  Noiseless as drifting shadows, the party sped
+forward, and within some five minutes of their landing arrived beneath
+the walls of the fort.  Here Dick, Stukely, and a man named Barker
+removed their shoes and, walking to the northward angle of the fort,
+examined it to ascertain what means of ascent it afforded.  They found,
+as Marshall had said, that although the walls were so smooth as to be
+quite unclimbable, the angles of the building were set with quoin stones
+of so rough a surface that an ascent by means of them might be made
+easily; accordingly Stukely, who by virtue of his discovery of the
+anaesthetic now claimed to take the lead, at once began to climb the
+angle, closely followed by Dick and Barker.  In less than two minutes
+the trio had accomplished the ascent and found themselves standing on
+the platform which constituted the flat roof of the battery.  The eight
+pieces of heavy ordnance, their muzzles projecting far over the low
+parapet, were easily distinguishable, as were also the great piles of
+shot, notwithstanding the darkness of the night; but for the moment no
+sentinels were visible.  Whispering his companions to remain where they
+were, Stukely moved away with noiseless tread, swiftly making the
+circuit of the gun platform; and presently he rejoined the other two.
+
+"It is all right," he whispered.  "I found the rascals sound asleep,
+even as the Captain did, and, withdrawing the stopper from my vial,
+allowed them to inhale the vapour for a moment.  They are now
+insensible, and will remain so for at least half an hour, therefore you
+may now do your share of the work, Barker.  Come with me, and I will
+show you where they lie."
+
+The two moved away together, Barker uncoiling a long length of fine line
+from his waist as he did so; while Dick, leaning over the parapet,
+dropped a small pebble down among the group below, as a signal that all
+was well and they might now safely make the ascent without fear of
+detection.  All arrangements having been previously made, every man of
+the party knew exactly what he had to do; and within five minutes the
+platform was alive with English seamen, some of whom were engaged in
+hauling up powder and clay from below, while others were employed in
+silently loading the guns with heavy charges of powder, upon the top of
+which they tightly rammed down stiff clay, with which they filled each
+gun to its very muzzle.  Then, when each piece had been similarly
+treated, the whole were very carefully primed, after which a length of
+quick match, long enough to allow of the safe retreat of the man who
+should ignite it, was securely inserted among the priming; the two
+insensible sentinels, bound hand and foot, and effectually gagged, were
+lowered to the ground, and the entire party retreated as they had come,
+with the exception of one man who volunteered to remain and ignite the
+length of match immediately that he saw a portfire burned from the wall
+of the castle which stood on the top of the adjacent hill.  The whole
+business had occupied scarcely twenty minutes, and when it was finished
+there was nothing to show that the garrison had become aware of what was
+happening above their heads.
+
+Once more assembled on the ground beneath the walls of the battery, the
+party was rapidly counted by Dick, to ascertain that all were present,
+save the man left above on the gun platform; and this formality having
+been quickly gone through, the unconscious sentinels were picked up and
+carried away to a distance of about a hundred yards from the battery,
+where they were effectually concealed in a thick clump of bushes, after
+which the Englishmen rapidly pushed forward up the hill.  Arrived near
+the top, Dick halted them for a moment near a clump of bamboo, two long
+stout stalks of which were quickly cut down, and, without waiting to
+strip them of their leaves, converted into a light ladder by lashing
+cross-pieces of bamboo to them.  Then, with this improvised ladder
+carried by two men, the party resumed its way, arriving about a quarter
+of an hour later beneath the frowning walls of the castle, which, like
+the battery below, was found to be in total darkness, at least so far as
+the face fronting them was concerned.  They crossed the dry ditch
+without difficulty, and once on the other side, reared their ladder
+against the wall, finding it amply long enough for their purpose.
+
+Here again Stukely took the lead, being the first to ascend the ladder.
+But as he reached the top and peered cautiously over the parapet he was
+disconcerted at the discovery that here at least the sentinels did not
+sleep; for the first object that met his gaze was a man standing at the
+extreme end of the parapet, apparently gazing steadfastly out to sea,
+while his crossed hands rested upon the muzzle of his grounded
+matchlock.  Luckily for the English, the man's back was turned toward
+the spot where Stukely stood staring at him.  In an instant the latter
+had made up his mind what to do, and, cautiously climbing in through the
+embrasure before him, stole noiselessly toward the unconscious man.  A
+few breathless seconds and Stukely had crept close up behind his
+intended victim; and the next instant, as he knocked the man's hat off
+with one hand, he dealt him with the other a blow on the head with the
+heavy butt of his pistol, which felled the unfortunate fellow as a
+butcher fells an ox.  Quickly bending over the prostrate body, he now
+held his unstoppered vial to the man's nostrils for three or four
+seconds, then rose cautiously to his feet.  He could see no other
+sentinels posted anywhere on the parapet, but passed quickly round it in
+order to make quite sure.  Then, finding that only the one sentinel had
+been posted here, he gave the signal for the rest of the party to
+ascend; and a few minutes later the scene of a short while before was
+being re-enacted on the parapet of this much more important structure.
+They worked silently but with strenuous haste, for although the heavens
+as yet gave no sign of the approaching dawn, the sudden comparative
+coolness of the atmosphere and the twitterings of a few early morning
+birds told them that it could not now be very far off; indeed they had
+scarcely finished their preparations when a faint brightening of the
+eastern horizon told them that a new day was at hand.
+
+"Now, are we all ready?" asked Dick, as he personally put the last
+finishing touches to the preparations.  "Then down you all go except the
+five men who are to help me with the firing of the quick matches.  You
+go last, Phil, and when you are down ignite the portfire which is to be
+the signal to that man in the battery yonder; I and the five who are
+remaining with me will see to the rest of the business up here.  Now,
+off you go quickly, for the daylight will be upon us in five minutes."
+
+Dick watched his friend as the latter slid out through the embrasure and
+descended the ladder; and when at length Stukely reached the ground and
+was preparing to ignite the portfire, Chichester sprang back among the
+five men who were awaiting his word, and whispered "Now!"  Instantly the
+six darted to their respective stations, and each man at once proceeded
+rapidly, yet with the nicest care, to ignite the five ends of quick
+match which were his especial care.  It was swiftly done, the lighting
+of the whole occupying less than half a minute; yet before the last five
+were ignited the still air was heavily charged with the fumes of
+gunpowder and there was a sound of hissing and sizzling suggestive of a
+whole army of angry snakes.
+
+"Smartly, men; smartly!" urged Dick; "the matches are burning much more
+rapidly than I anticipated; and if we are not pretty lively we shall be
+caught by the first explosions.  That's your sort; that will do,
+Parsons, don't stand there fiddling with that match, it is burning all
+right.  Now, lads, away you go; over with you; I go last."
+
+Thus exhorted they stood not upon the order of their going, but went,
+Chichester bringing up the rear; and the latter was still in the very
+act of descending the ladder when six crashing explosions, occurring
+almost simultaneously on the parapet above, shattered the early morning
+stillness, the sounds being instantly followed by a great rush of wings
+and an outburst of startled screams that issued from the throats of the
+affrighted birds in the immediate neighbourhood of the castle, who, thus
+rudely awakened, dashed away in every direction, loudly proclaiming
+their terror.  An answering explosion almost instantly roared out from
+the battery on the beach; then when half a dozen further explosions on
+the parapet pealed out, the little party of precipitately retreating
+Englishmen heard heavy thuds all round them as fragments of the burst
+ordnance came showering to the ground.  And in between the shattering
+reports of bursting cannon which were now almost continuous they faintly
+caught the sounds of human outcry as the astounded garrison, awakened by
+the reports, sprang from their beds and rushed hither and thither in
+blind panic, each man demanding of every other an explanation of the
+extraordinary happenings that were taking place overhead.  But long
+before the bravest of the Spaniards had summoned up courage enough to
+ascend to the parapet, and ascertain for himself the source of those
+terrific reports and crashing blows which were causing the castle to
+tremble to its very foundations, the last of the Englishmen--who
+happened to be Dick--had vanished over the brow of the hill and was
+racing down the steep slope toward the spot where the longboat had been
+left in hiding, urging those ahead of him to redoubled efforts, lest the
+Spaniards, rallying from their first surprise and panic, should sally
+forth and attempt to cut off the fugitives.
+
+The disturbance was all over in less than a minute; the echo of the last
+explosion died away along the mangrove-bordered shore; the thud of the
+last falling piece of fractured ordnance, as it crashed through the
+boughs of the trees, had faintly reached the ears of the flying
+Englishmen; and the birds were rapidly beginning to persuade themselves
+that the whole thing had been no more than a peculiarly weird and
+startling dream, when the whole party--which had been joined on the way
+by the man from the lower battery--reached the boat and pulled up for a
+moment to listen and recover their breath.  But there was neither sight
+nor sound of pursuit; and presently, after Dick had counted his party
+and found that all were present and perfectly sound, the order was given
+to get the boat afloat and shove off.  This was done in a perfectly
+quiet and orderly manner; and five minutes later, with the beams of the
+rising sun brilliantly gilding her sails, the little craft slid down the
+harbour entrance on her way to seaward, passing close under the walls of
+the beach battery, the bewildered garrison of which had by this time
+summoned up the courage necessary to enable them to go up on the gun
+platform, to ascertain precisely what had happened.  Most of them were
+gazing earnestly out to seaward as the longboat slid past, consequently
+they did not see her until it was too late, when, with loud outcries,
+they seized their calivers and poured a hot but absolutely ineffective
+fire after the bold adventurers.  Two minutes later the boat swept round
+the low point which forms the southern extremity of Tierra Bomba Island;
+and then her occupants saw what it was that had so strongly attracted
+the attention of the Spaniards; for, scarcely three miles away, they
+beheld the _Adventure_ beating up toward the Boca Chica under a heavy
+press of canvas.  Bascomb had seen and interpreted aright the explosions
+in the two batteries on Tierra Bomba, and was now fearlessly working the
+ship in toward the land, knowing that, the guns in those two batteries
+having been destroyed, there was now nothing to restrain him from
+sailing right into Cartagena harbour itself and demanding the
+restoration of their Captain, safe and sound.  And he meant to do it,
+too!
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX.
+
+HOW THEY TOOK THE GREAT GALLEON AND A VAST TREASURE.
+
+There was no enthusiasm, no cheering, nothing in the nature of
+hysterical exultation displayed by the crew of the _Adventure_, when the
+longboat ran alongside and those who had performed the audacious feat of
+rendering two powerful batteries innocuous rejoined their shipmates;
+everything was accepted as a matter of course.  It was fully realised by
+all hands that the deed was one, the successful accomplishment of which
+required the display of nerve and courage of superlative character, but
+it was understood that the entire expedition, from start to finish, from
+its departure from Topsham to its return thither, demanded the constant
+exhibition of these same qualities--and would receive it.  Therefore a
+murmur or two of approval and satisfaction from Bascomb, when Dick made
+his report, was all that was said in the way of commendation.
+
+"And now, sirs," said the master, dismissing the topic of the
+disarmament of the batteries, "Cartagena and the galleon are at our
+mercy; and the sooner that the Spaniard can be brought to understand
+this, the better is it like to be for our general.  Therefore we will
+enter the harbour forthwith, lay the galleon aboard and take her, and
+then open negotiations with the authorities for the ransom of the town
+and the deliverance of Captain Marshall.  Mr Chichester, you know more
+about the harbour than any of the rest of us.  It must be your duty,
+therefore, to pilot the ship alongside the galleon; the others I will
+ask to go straight to their fighting stations and prepare the ship for
+battle, after which, if there be time, we will take breakfast.  If not--
+well, we must e'en fight fasting, and eat after the galleon is taken."
+
+So Dick went up on the poop and, stationing himself to windward, conned
+the ship as she beat in toward the Boca Chica against the fast-failing
+land breeze.  But, good ship as the _Adventure_ was, her progress was
+exasperatingly slow, as was that of all ships of that date when they
+attempted to beat up against a foul wind; for neither the form of the
+hull nor the cut of the sails was at that day favourable to such a
+manoeuvre, and the ship was still a good mile from the harbour's mouth
+when the land breeze suddenly failed, and she was left helplessly
+wallowing upon the oily swell outside.
+
+This, of course, was exasperating enough; for when deeds of desperate
+emprise are toward it is well to carry them through before the
+enthusiasm has time to cool.  But it could not be helped, the wind was
+dead, and the ship could not be handled now until the sea breeze sprang
+up; and, after all, the delay was not an unmitigated misfortune, for it
+ensured to the crew time enough to complete their preparations for the
+coming fight and take breakfast afterward; and even at that day it was
+fully recognised that an Englishman fights best when his hunger has been
+satisfied.  So they finished the work upon which they were engaged, and
+then went quietly to breakfast, which meal they were able to dispose of
+comfortably before a cry from the deck apprised them of the arrival of
+the sea breeze.
+
+Yes; there it came, far away in the offing, ruling the horizon as a band
+of dark blue that grew lighter and lighter still along its landward
+edge, until it stopped short at a distance of about two miles from the
+shore, blowing fresh right up to a certain well-defined point, between
+which and the land all was gleaming, glassy swell, unruffled by even so
+much as a cat's-paw.  But the boundary line which divided breeze from
+calm was not stationary by any means, on the contrary, it was creeping
+nearer rapidly.  When Bascomb came up on the poop he merely glanced at
+it for a moment and then called to the seamen to trim the yards in
+readiness to meet it.  By the time that this had been done the line of
+demarcation was so near that the musical tinkling of the advancing
+ripples could be distinctly heard, although the sails still hung limp,
+idly flapping to the roll of the ship.  Another minute, however,
+sufficed, then with a gentle preliminary rustling the canvas filled, the
+blue ripples reached the ship, passed inshore of her, and she began to
+draw slowly through the water and her helm was put up to keep her away
+for the narrow harbour entrance.
+
+"Starboard you may," said Dick to the helmsman, when the ship had
+presently fallen square off before the fast-freshening breeze; "we must
+shave that low point on the left quite closely, for that is where the
+channel runs, and there is a small shoal right in the mouth of the
+fairway which we must avoid.  So! that will do; now, steady as you go.
+Mr Bascomb, you see that dark object just opening out over the
+southernmost end of Tierra Bomba?  Well, that is the shore battery, and
+as it possesses certain small ordnance, such as falconets and swivels,
+which we could not spare the time to destroy, I would recommend that, as
+we must pass it close, the men be instructed to lie down behind the
+bulwarks as we sail by, lest haply any of them be hit; for I make no
+doubt that they will discharge at us every piece they have as we pass."
+
+"Say you so?" returned Bascomb.  "Then, by the Lord Harry, we will be
+beforehand with them.  Ho, there!  Load the larboard broadside of
+ordnance, great and small, and train your pieces to sweep the top of
+yonder battery as we pass.  We cannot afford to risk the loss of any of
+our number through a mistaken sense of magnanimity."
+
+With swelling sails distended by the ever-freshening sea breeze, the
+_Adventure_ now swept boldly in for the mouth of the Boca Chica, and
+presently a curl of white water revealed the presence of the shoal of
+which Dick Chichester had spoken, right in the middle of the fairway.
+Dick directed the helmsman to steer to the north of this, between it and
+the island of Tierra Bomba, with its swelling wood-crowned heights.
+Dick glanced aloft at the castle which crowned the summit of the
+southernmost hill, but although the golden flag of Spain flaunted itself
+insolently in the breeze from the flagstaff on its northern turret, not
+a man was to be seen upon the parapet.  Many of the embrasures, one-half
+of which they could now see, had been destroyed by the bursting of the
+ordnance, and it soon became clear that none of its garrison intended to
+make any effort to dispute the passage of the English ship.  Whether the
+garrison of the battery down on the beach would be less prudent still
+remained to be seen, but one thing was perfectly clear, and that was
+that the Spanish soldiery were very busy upon the gun platform, their
+movements being directed by a tall man in a full suit of black armour,
+the helmet of which was surmounted by a splendid plume of long crimson
+feathers.  The English, however, were not left long in doubt as to the
+intentions of this individual, who was, doubtless, the commander of the
+garrison; for as the ship swept along the narrow channel, hugging the
+northern shore closely, and every moment shortening the distance between
+the battery and herself, he was seen to draw his sword, which flashed
+like a white flame in the brilliant sunshine as he waved it above his
+head, and the next moment a perfect storm of bullets from falcon and
+falconet, patarero, saker, and swivel, came hurtling from the battery
+across the narrow water toward the ship.  But the gallant cavalier had
+been just a trifle too eager to display his valour, for most of the
+missiles fell short, having been fired at rather too long a range, while
+those which hit were so nearly spent that only a few of them lodged in
+the solid woodwork of the ship's bulwarks, and not a man on board was
+hit.
+
+"Now, men," roared Bascomb, "give yonder presumptuous fool a lesson;
+fire as your guns come to bear, and not before.  I want that parapet
+swept clean!"
+
+And swept clean it was, the English holding their fire and the ship
+sweeping on in grim, inexorable silence until she was within some two
+hundred feet of the structure, when all her larboard ordnance, great and
+small, bellowed and barked back its answer.  As the smoke drove away
+ahead before the wind the wall was seen to crumble into dust under the
+impact of the heavy iron shot, while the lighter missiles mowed down the
+soldiers like corn beneath the sickle, until not a man was left standing
+upon his feet, even the magnifico in armour going down before the hail
+of iron and lead, to say nothing of the Spanish standard, the staff of
+which was cut clean in two, so that it toppled over and fell, carrying
+the flag with it, to the ground at the base of the wall.
+
+"So much for thicky!" exclaimed Bascomb, relapsing into broad Devon for
+a moment, under the influence of excitement.  "If it weren't that we
+have a long and hot morning's work before us I would anchor the ship,
+land a party, and blow their footy batteries into the air.  But perhaps
+we may have time to do that when we come back this way.  Now, my
+masters, load again, this time with double charges, consisting of a
+half-keg of bullets to each culverin, with a chain shot on top, and the
+smaller ordnance in proportion.  We will not fire again, if we can help
+it, until we run alongside the galleon, and not then until we rub sides
+with her."
+
+The ship had by this time traversed so much of the Boca that it became
+necessary for her to shift her helm in order to avoid grounding upon a
+sandspit that stretched athwart her course, and here the advantage and
+value of Dick Chichester's previous observations became apparent; for so
+sharp was the bend, and so little was there to indicate the existence of
+the shoal, that if Dick had not previously had the opportunity to note
+its position, the ship would undoubtedly have driven right upon it,
+under full sail, when she would certainly have been in an exceedingly
+awkward predicament, and might even have been lost, presuming the
+Spaniards to have been courageous enough to attack her while placed at
+so serious a disadvantage.  But she was not allowed to get into any such
+awkward situation; for Dick had noticed everything connected with the
+dangers of the harbour, while looking out and watching from the summit
+of the hill on Tierra Bomba, and he carried a complete and perfectly
+accurate chart of the harbour in his head, in addition to the one which
+he and Marshall had made together.  The helm was, therefore, shifted at
+the proper moment, and the ship swerved away in a south-easterly
+direction, making as though for the middle of the lower bay.
+
+The danger did not reveal itself until the ship was actually slipping
+past it, and in less than five minutes she was clear and the course was
+again altered, this time to the north-eastward, where the island of
+Tierra Bomba, thrusting its north-easterly angle inward, divided the
+upper from the lower bay, narrowing the passage between to a width of
+less than a mile.  Now the ship was fairly inside, and heading for a
+part of the harbour where Dick remembered to have observed certain other
+dangers in the shape of rocks and shoals, no sign of which could he
+perceive from the deck; he therefore mentioned the matter to Bascomb,
+and obtained that officer's permission to go aloft to the fore
+topsail-yard and con the ship from there.
+
+In this fashion, then, the _Adventure_, with the red cross of Saint
+George flying defiantly from her main truck, swept up Cartagena harbour
+and, rounding the eastern extremity of Tierra Bomba, headed straight for
+the inner roadstead, where could now be seen, among a small forest of
+more insignificant masts, the towering spars of the great galleon, with
+a vast crimson flag bearing a coat of arms floating at her main, and the
+Spanish flag drooping from the ensign staff reared at her stern.  The
+town being built on low land, the lofty masts of the galleon were at
+once seen, upon the English ship rounding the point and opening up the
+city, and a great cry of "There she is!" instantly leapt from every
+English throat.
+
+"Ay; there she is, men," returned Bascomb.  "We can't make any mistake
+about her, I think; and in halt an hour you shall be alongside her.  The
+rest of the work will be for you to do.  I'll tell you my plan, men.  We
+will range up alongside her and lay her aboard, and just before our
+sides touch we will pour our broadside into her, throw the grapnels and
+hook on, and then dash aboard in the midst of the smoke and drive her
+crew below.  The secret is to strike hard and often, and keep them on
+the run.  If any man attempts to stand, though only for a moment, run
+him through at once with a pike.  That is all that I have to say, men;
+you know how to do the trick as well as I."
+
+With Cartagena city and the galleon in plain view, Dick Chichester's
+work aloft was done, and he, therefore, returned to the deck and the
+spot upon it from which he had previously been conning the ship, where
+he resumed his duty as pilot.
+
+As the _Adventure_ slid smoothly and rapidly up the harbour, heading
+straight for the galleon, it was seen that nearly twenty large boats,
+full of armed men, were pulling off to her from the shore.  It was
+clear, therefore, that the authorities had received notice of the
+approach of the English, possibly from one or another of the officers in
+charge of the defences on Tierra Bomba, and, shrewdly guessing that one
+object, at least, of the unwelcome visit was the galleon, were
+determined to defend her to the last.  But this discovery in nowise
+disconcerted the sturdy lads of Devon, who had long ago learned to
+regard themselves as invincible, so far as the Spaniards were concerned;
+so they continued with the utmost calmness to add here and there some
+refinement of finish to the preparations which had been completed an
+hour or more ago.  Even the ship's cook, whom nobody regarded as a
+fighting man, must needs add his little quota to the general
+preparations, the same taking the form of several gallons of greasy
+boiling water with which he had filled his coppers, the which he
+proposed to employ at such time as might seem to him most suitable.  As
+for Dick, he decided that the handspike which he had used in the fight
+off Barbados had proved so effective that, regarded as a weapon, it
+could scarcely be improved upon, and he was on the point of providing
+himself with another when his eye chanced to fall upon a heavy iron bar
+which had been brought on deck for some purpose, so, having tested its
+weight, he at once decided that it was the very thing he needed, and
+appropriated it accordingly.
+
+The _Adventure_ had arrived within about half a mile of the galleon when
+the latter opened fire with her heavy ordnance, of which she carried two
+tiers.  But whether it was that the Spaniards designed to shoot away the
+English ship's masts, and so leave her helpless and unmanageable, or
+whether it was that the pieces were badly aimed, every one of the shot
+went humming high overhead, leaving the intruder to pass on unscathed
+and in grim silence; for not one of her guns replied.  But Bascomb
+stepped forward to the front of the poop and issued an order.
+
+"Let every man of you," he said, "take bow or musket, and prepare to
+discharge a volley upon the deck of yonder galleon when I give the word.
+Then, that done, return to your ordnance and prepare to fire, for the
+time will be at hand.  Sail trimmers, stand by to let fly all sheets and
+halliards at the word of command; then be ready to heave the grapnels as
+we range up alongside."
+
+The English ship, still conned by Dick Chichester, was now steering a
+course which if persevered in would carry her across the stern of the
+galleon, at a distance of about twice her own length from that vessel;
+and it seemed evident, from the uncertain movements of those on board
+the Spaniard, that they were considerably puzzled as to the intentions
+of the English.  For, having discharged the whole of her starboard
+broadside at the approaching _Adventure_, the crew of the galleon first
+began with feverish haste to reload all the guns on that side of their
+ship; then, seeming suddenly to suspect that their antagonist intended
+to lay them aboard on their inshore side, they left their starboard
+broadside only half-loaded and precipitately dashed across the deck to
+their larboard broadside of ordnance, which they began to clear away
+hurriedly with the intention of loading.  The _Adventure_ was at this
+moment less than twice her own length from the galleon, and Bascomb,
+standing on the poop, was able to look down from there into the crowded
+waist of the other ship and clearly see the Spaniards crowding together
+about the larboard ordnance.  The opportunity seemed much too good to be
+let slip, so calling his bowmen and musketeers up on to the poop, he
+directed them to discharge a volley into the surging mass of men, which
+they did instantly, with terribly destructive effect.
+
+"Good!" he exclaimed, as he saw some twenty or thirty Spaniards fall
+writhing to the deck; "now back to your ordnance, men, and be ready to
+fire when I give the word.  Sail trimmers, let fly all sheets and
+halliards, and stand by with your grapnels!"
+
+As the sailing master issued these orders Dick signed to the helmsman,
+who thereupon thrust the ponderous tiller hard down, and the
+_Adventure_, answering her helm perfectly, swept round in a short curve
+and went gliding up on the starboard side of the galleon.
+
+"Now, gunners all, let fly your ordnance!" roared Bascomb, drawing his
+sword.  And as the bright blade flashed in the air the English
+artillery, loaded with round, bar, and chain shot, musket balls, spike
+nails, and every kind of missile that the men had been able to lay hands
+upon, were discharged when the two vessels were scarcely a fathom apart,
+and the Spanish ship's upper deck instantly became a shambles, scarcely
+a man remaining uninjured upon it.
+
+"Throw your grapnels," shouted Bascomb, "and then let every man follow
+me aboard the Spaniard."  As he spoke the _Adventure_ crashed alongside
+the galleon, there was a sound of ripping and rending timber, and a
+heavy rebound; and then, as the two ships rolled toward each other after
+the rebound the English crew went swarming over their own bulwarks and
+down upon the Spanish deck, where they found scarcely half a dozen men
+to oppose them.  But at the head of them stood a very magnificent
+looking personage in full armour, whom Bascomb took to be the captain of
+the ship.
+
+"Do you surrender, senor?" demanded Bascomb, speaking in English for the
+very good reason that he "had" no Spanish.
+
+It is probable that the Spaniard was as destitute of English as Master
+William Bascomb was of Spanish; but there is a language of intonation
+and gesture as well as of words, and doubtless that of the Englishman
+was intelligible enough, for the Spaniard, by way of reply, grasped his
+sword by the point and offered it to the sturdy Devonshire seaman who
+confronted him, and who accepted it with a very fair imitation of the
+bow with which the Spaniard had tendered it.
+
+"That's well, so far," commented Bascomb.  "Now"--looking about him and
+noticing Dick standing near, grasping his iron bar--"that ends the
+trouble up here.  But what about down below, Mr Chichester?  You had
+better take a dozen men and this gentleman down with you; and perhaps he
+will explain to those of his people who are on the main deck that he has
+surrendered.  If they will lay down their arms, well and good; if they
+won't--well, you will just have to make 'em, that's all.  Now go; and
+report to me here when you've gained complete possession of the ship."
+
+Dick took his dozen men and, insinuating his hand in the crook of the
+Spanish captain's arm, led that individual below to the main deck, where
+they found a few Spanish seamen still hanging about between the great
+culverins, apparently quite uncertain what to do, or whether they ought
+to do anything.  The Spanish captain spoke sharply to them; apparently
+he was very much surprised and disappointed to find so few men there,
+and seemed to be asking them where the rest were, for by way of reply
+the seamen said something and pointed to the hatchways.  The Spanish
+captain relieved his feelings by stamping on the deck, grinding his
+teeth, and indulging in a good deal of Castilian profanity; after which
+he seemed to give certain instructions, the result of which was that the
+men laid down their arms and went up on deck, one of their number having
+previously gone to the main hatchway and shouted something down it which
+caused the remainder of the crew to come up from below and surrender
+their weapons.
+
+It took Dick and his party about half an hour to explore thoroughly the
+interior of the galleon--which they discovered was named the _Santa
+Margaretta_--and satisfy themselves that none of the Spanish crew were
+lurking below in hiding; and when at length they returned to the upper
+deck to report, they found that Bascomb and Winter had mustered the
+surviving Spaniards forward on the fore deck, under a strong guard,
+while the English had lowered one of the galleon's boats and in her had
+boarded and captured a small coasting felucca, which they were at that
+moment towing alongside their bigger prize.  This, Bascomb explained, he
+had done with the object of getting rid of his Spanish prisoners, whom
+he proposed to send ashore in the felucca, having no fancy for keeping
+them aboard the prize, where they would need a strong body of the
+English to maintain an efficient guard over them.  And, with the
+released prisoners, he proposed to send ashore a letter to the Governor
+of the city, demanding the immediate surrender of Captain Marshall, safe
+and sound, together with payment of the sum of five hundred thousand
+ducats ransom for the city, failure of either condition to be followed
+by the sack and destruction of the place.
+
+"But," objected Dick, "you can neither speak nor write Spanish; and it
+may very well be that there will be nobody in Cartagena who understands
+English; in that case we shall be at a deadlock, and how will you manage
+then?"
+
+"That," replied Bascomb, sententiously, "will be their lookout.  If they
+cannot find anyone to translate my letter, so much the worse for them.
+But there should be no trouble about that; for if they can find nobody
+else the captain will make my meaning clear to them."
+
+It was considerably past midday when at length the whole of the
+Spaniards, together with their dead and wounded, were transferred to the
+felucca and dispatched to the shore, the Spanish captain being entrusted
+with the letter to the governor or commandant of the town; and then the
+English found time to look into their own affairs and take a meal.  It
+was found that by a marvellous stroke of good fortune the galleon had
+been captured without the loss of a man, or even so much as a single
+casualty on the English side; and, this being the case, the question
+arose whether or not they should retain possession of the vessel,
+dividing the _Adventure's_ crew equally between her and the prize.
+There arose quite a sharp difference of opinion on this point, Bascomb
+and the two gentlemen adventurers maintaining that the prize was far too
+valuable to be parted with or destroyed, now that they had her; while
+Winter and Dick contended that they were far too few in number to
+justify the proposed division, the effect of which would be to put them
+in possession of two perilously short-handed ships, instead of one fully
+manned.  Moreover, the _Santa Margaretta_ was nearly twice the size of
+the _Adventure_, the proposal therefore to divide the crew of the latter
+into two equal parts would hardly meet the case, since a crew of forty
+men could handle the galleon only in fine weather, while as to fighting
+her effectually in the event of their falling in with an enemy, it
+simply could not be done.  Winter's proposal, in which Dick backed him
+up, was that everything of value--or at least as much of it as they
+could find room for--should be transferred to the _Adventure_, after
+which a ransom of, say, twenty thousand ducats could be demanded for the
+ship and what remained of her cargo, failing the payment of which she
+might be burnt at her anchors as a wholesome example!  The dispute at
+length grew so warm that Stukely, who was present but took no part in
+it, suggested that the matter should be left for Captain Marshall to
+decide, upon his return.
+
+The afternoon of that day was busily spent by the English, one party of
+whom, under the joint leadership of the carpenter and boatswain, devoted
+themselves to the task of repairing the slight damage sustained by the
+_Adventure_ in running aboard the galleon, while the remainder engaged
+in the work of thoroughly rummaging the prize and transferring from her
+to the _Adventure_ all the valuables they could find.  At first some
+fear was entertained that the treasure which it was intended the ship
+should take home had not yet been put on board, for it could be found
+nowhere; but at length a sort of strong room was discovered, cunningly
+built in the run of the ship, its entrance hidden by a big pile of
+sails; and when this was entered, there, sure enough, lay the treasure,
+consisting of no less than five hundred gold bricks, each weighing some
+forty pounds; two thousand bars of silver averaging about fifty pounds
+each, a chest of pearls the value of which was so great that they made
+no attempt even to estimate it approximately; and a small chest of uncut
+precious stones, chiefly emeralds and rubies, which of itself would have
+sufficed to make every man of them rich for life.  The whole of this
+stupendous treasure they at once proceeded to transfer to the
+_Adventure_; and so much of it was there that, working watch and watch,
+one watch mounting guard to render impossible anything in the nature of
+a surprise attack from the shore, while the other watch carried the
+treasure from the one ship to the other, it was long past midnight when
+at length the work was done and the weary men were permitted to snatch a
+little rest.
+
+The authorities ashore had been given until sunrise of the following
+morning in which to find someone capable of interpreting Bascomb's
+letter, and to come to a decision as to whether or not they would accede
+to the terms of the said letter; and the first light of dawn revealed a
+large boat putting off from the shore, pulled by twelve oarsmen, and
+flying a white flag at the stern.  This was the first boat that had
+attempted to approach either of the ships since the appearance of the
+_Adventure_ upon the scene, and her approach was watched with the utmost
+interest and curiosity.  She carried three officials in brilliant
+uniforms and four other individuals in her stern-sheets, but it was
+Stukely's keen eyes which were the first to detect the fact that Captain
+Marshall was not in her; and his announcement of this fact at once
+raised a storm of indignation among those who had hastily turned out and
+gone on deck when the approach of the boat had been reported.
+
+"Not in her?" incredulously repeated Bascomb--"Not in her?  Then what a
+plague do the Dons mean by coming off to us at all?  Surely I made it
+plain enough to them all that the surrender of our Captain was the very
+first article of our demand?  Then what--?"
+
+"Nay, nay; let be," interposed Winter, speaking quite calmly, but his
+lips white, and his eyes glowing sombrely like smouldering fires.  "No
+need to work thyself into a passion, Will Bascomb, until thou hast heard
+what their lordships have to say.  Maybe they have not seen the Captain
+and know naught of him."
+
+"Not seen him?  Know naught of him?  Why--why--!" spluttered Bascomb.
+Then he suddenly calmed down.  This was no time for disputatiousness or
+the display of warm feeling between himself and the man who, if haply
+anything had gone wrong with the Captain, might become the head of them
+all.  Besides, there was wisdom in that suggestion to wait and hear what
+the Dons had to say before jumping to a conclusion.  Thus the little
+group of Englishmen on the high poop of the _Adventure_ lapsed into
+sudden silence as the boat drew near; but it was a silence that was
+ominous, menacing, a silence of set lips and burning eyes, pregnant with
+dire possibilities for the city and all within it if aught of evil had
+befallen their Captain therein.  For not only was Marshall, rough almost
+to uncouthness of manner though he was at times, beloved by all there,
+but also there was the feeling stirring in every breast that it was
+vitally important to each one of them that the Spaniard must be taught,
+once and for all, to regard an Englishman's life as sacred, no matter
+what the circumstances might be under which he might fall into their
+hands, or however helpless and friendless he might at the moment seem.
+So it was a very grim-visaged, uncompromising-looking group of
+Englishmen at whom the newcomers stared upward when the boat arrived
+within easy hailing-distance and lay upon her oars.
+
+An elderly man, attired in the usual mariner's costume of the period,
+rose in the stern-sheets of the boat and, doffing his cap, opened the
+conversation by remarking in English:
+
+"Good morning, gentlemen!  I am Gaspar Pacheco, lately a master of
+mariners, but now retired from the sea; and I am here to-day to act the
+part of interpreter between yourselves and the illustrious Senors Don
+Luis Maria Alfonso Calderon, Governor of the city of Cartagena; Don
+Ricardo Picador Garcia, Alcalde of Cartagena; Don Hermoso Morillo, our
+Intendant; Don Sebastian Campana; Don Ferdinand Miguel Pavia; and Don
+Ramon Sylva, merchants of Cartagena."  And as each individual was named
+he rose in the stern-sheets of the boat, bowed deeply, and seated
+himself again.
+
+"I am instructed by my illustrious fellow townsmen to inform you,
+senors, that although your cartel was handed to the Governor immediately
+upon the arrival of your messenger in the town, yesterday, it was not
+until very late in the day that anyone could be found possessed of a
+sufficient knowledge of your language to interpret it, the only person
+possessed of such knowledge being myself, who live not in Cartagena
+itself but in a small hacienda a few miles north of the city.  Then,
+senors, when I had been found and conveyed to Cartagena, and had
+translated your letter to the authorities, a difficulty at once arose;
+for mention is therein made of one Capitan Marshall, who is said to have
+entered the city five days ago, and whose safe return you demand.  Now,
+neither his Excellency the Governor nor Don Ricardo Garcia, our Alcalde,
+had ever before heard of such a person as el Capitan Marshall, or indeed
+of any other stranger, being in the city; and it at once became
+necessary, before anything else could be done, that enquiries should be
+set on foot to ascertain whether any such person had been seen, so that
+his whereabouts might be traced.  Those enquiries, senors, were at once
+instituted, and are still being actively pursued; but we are regretfully
+obliged to confess that thus far they have been entirely without result.
+Meanwhile--"
+
+"Stop!" interrupted Bascomb, throwing up his hand with an imperative
+gesture.  "Do you mean to tell me that it is possible for a stranger--
+and that stranger an Englishman--to be four days and five nights in your
+city without anyone being the wiser?"
+
+The interpreter shrugged his shoulders and spread his hands abroad
+deprecatingly.
+
+"It would greatly depend upon the skill, courage, and resourcefulness of
+the stranger, senor," he answered.  "If your Capitan Marshall speaks
+Spanish fluently, and possesses the knowledge of how to look and act
+like a Spaniard, it is quite possible that he might do so."
+
+"But," objected Bascomb, "he could not well have been in your city
+yesterday and have remained in ignorance of what was happening.  And I
+know him well enough to feel certain that were he alive, in good health,
+and free, he would have rejoined the ship ere now.  That he has not done
+so is evidence conclusive and convincing to us all that something
+untoward has happened to him, for which we shall hold the entire
+population of your city, individually and collectively, responsible.
+
+"Now," he continued, turning and addressing his companions on the deck,
+"that is speaking plainly enough for even a Spaniard to understand,
+isn't it?  But since Captain Marshall's safety and well-being must be
+our first consideration, I think we ought not to make our conditions so
+hard as to be impossible of fulfilment; I therefore propose that we
+allow them a little more time in which to find him, before we proceed to
+extremities.  Let us make it clear to them that he must be found and
+delivered up to us, safe and sound, within a certain time, say noon
+to-day; and that failure to comply with this demand will be followed by
+the bombardment and sack of the town.  What say you, gentles?"
+
+"Agreed!" came the answer, as with one voice, from all present.
+
+"Very well, then," concluded Bascomb; and turning toward the boat, he
+hailed:
+
+"Now, listen to me, Senor Interpreter, and mark well my words.  It has
+come to the ears of us English that the Spaniards of the New World, in
+their selfish determination to retain in their own hands the whole of
+the trade of this rich country, are making a practice of seizing every
+Englishman upon whom they can lay hands, and delivering him over to your
+so-called Holy Inquisition in order that, while salving your own
+consciences with the plea of religious zeal, my countrymen may be
+subjected to fiendish tortures, and so be discouraged from attempting to
+secure a share of the immeasurable wealth which you enjoy.  Now the time
+has come when your minds must be disabused of this notion.  No amount of
+torture which you can possibly inflict upon solitary, helpless
+Englishmen will deter their fellow countrymen from striving, by fair
+means or foul, to secure a share of what they are as much entitled to as
+yourselves; and they will never rest until they have obtained it!  Mark
+you that.  And, further, remember this--that henceforward, for every
+Englishman who is lost on these shores, and is found to have perished
+under the hands of your Inquisitors, the English will take a terrible
+vengeance, exacting the lives of ten of the most distinguished Spaniards
+upon whom they can lay hands.
+
+"Now, our Captain is somewhere in your city at this moment, and for your
+own sakes he must be found and brought on board this ship before noon.
+And when that is done we will talk further with you.  But if by noon he
+is not found and delivered up to us, then I say to you that we will
+first bombard your town, and afterwards sack and destroy it, as a lesson
+to you and all Spaniards to beware henceforward how you meddle with
+Englishmen, even when they seem to be absolutely at your mercy.  Now,
+translate that to the illustrious senors your companions."
+
+The interpreter did so; and as he proceeded the varied emotions of
+indignation, horror, and fear that were evoked by Bascomb's plain
+speaking were easily enough discernible upon the countenances of his
+audience.  They flushed and turned pale by turns, they wrung their
+hands, and once his Excellency the Governor started to his feet and
+shook his fist savagely at the little group on the _Adventure's_ poop,
+but was instantly dragged down again by his comrades, who evidently
+feared the English more than they did him.  When at length the
+interpreter had finished and the Governor burst into a torrent of
+apparently violent language, which he seemed to wish the interpreter to
+translate to the Englishmen, the others interposed with what appeared to
+be an emphatic veto.  This was followed by a somewhat lengthy and very
+animated discussion among themselves, during which the boat was kept in
+place by an occasional stroke of the oars.  At length a resolution of
+some sort seemed to be arrived at, for the alcalde was seen to speak
+earnestly to the interpreter, who presently rose to his feet and hailed.
+
+"Illustrious senors," he said, "I am desired by Don Ricardo Garcia, our
+respected Alcalde, to say that every possible effort shall be made to
+find the missing Capitan; and when found he shall at once be restored to
+you.  But, senors, the time you have allowed us is much too brief for an
+effective search to be made, and--"
+
+"Did you not say that the search was begun yesterday, and is still being
+actively prosecuted?" interrupted Bascomb.
+
+"Even so, illustrious General," answered the interpreter.
+
+"Very well, then," retorted the master; "if he is in the city, and is
+alive and well, he will be found before noon.  If he is not found, then
+it will be because some evil has befallen him, for which Cartagena shall
+be made to suffer.  Look in your Inquisition for him, senor; he is as
+likely to be there as anywhere.  And tell your Inquisitors that if he is
+not forthcoming by noon, the Inquisition shall be the first building to
+suffer from our shot.  Now, go!"
+
+So they went, with much shaking of heads and wringing of hands.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN.
+
+HOW THEY SET OUT TO RESCUE CAPTAIN MARSHALL, AND FAILED.
+
+The morning was passed strenuously by the English in preparing both the
+_Adventure_ and her prize for the grim business of bombarding Cartagena,
+if need were; the hope in every man's heart being that the spectacle of
+the preparations--which was clearly visible from the water front of the
+town--would have the effect of breaking down the stubborn wills of the
+Spaniards, and constraining them to surrender their prisoner.  For up to
+this moment there had never been any real doubt in the mind of any one
+of the Englishmen that Marshall had been discovered and made a prisoner;
+and they were steadfastly resolved to secure his freedom, let the cost
+be what it would.
+
+After carefully considering and discussing the matter together, Bascomb
+and Winter arrived at the conclusion that it would be possible to effect
+such a division of the crew as would enable both ships to employ the
+whole of their heaviest ordnance against the town; and this was
+accordingly done, the _Adventure_ being afterward moved to a berth
+astern of the galleon, so that neither ship should obstruct the fire of
+the other.
+
+It wanted about a quarter of an hour of noon, and the preparations
+aboard both ships were complete, when the boat which had visited them in
+the morning was observed to be putting out again from the wharf and
+pulling toward the _Adventure_; but it was soon perceived that on this
+occasion she carried only one figure, which was presently seen to be
+that of the interpreter.
+
+"The Captain is not there!" exclaimed Bascomb, when this was recognised.
+"Now, what a plague do they mean by sending off the boat without him?
+Are they going to beg for more time, I wonder?  And, if so, why?  For I
+will never believe but that they know where he is, but are determined to
+exhaust every artifice and subterfuge in the endeavour to avoid giving
+him up!"
+
+The others said nothing, for what was the use of hazarding conjecture
+when they would soon know for certain?  So they held their tongues and
+watched the approach of the boat with gloomy, louring glances.  They
+were disappointed, and in a savage, dangerous mood, ready to plunge at a
+word into any desperate enterprise.
+
+The boat ranged up alongside, and the oarsmen rested upon their oars as
+before.
+
+"Hallo! the boat ahoy!" hailed Bascomb.  "What does this mean, senor?
+Why have you not brought off our Captain?  Are the people ashore aware
+that within five minutes the bombardment of the town will begin?"
+
+"Alas! yes, most illustrious senors," answered the interpreter, "unless
+I should prove fortunate enough to be successful in the mission that has
+been entrusted to me--that of pleading with your excellencies for a
+further extension of time."
+
+"Upon what grounds, senor?" demanded Bascomb.  "I have already granted
+an extension of six hours--without result, it would appear.  Why should
+I grant another moment?"
+
+"Because, Excellency, it is now believed that a clue to the whereabouts
+of your Capitan has at last been found, and it is hoped that in the
+course of another hour or two his freedom may be obtained," answered the
+interpreter.
+
+"Ah!" returned Bascomb, with a sigh of relief.  "So our Captain has been
+found at last, has he?  And where is he thought to be?"
+
+"In the Inquisition, senor," answered the interpreter.
+
+"The Inquisition!" interrupted Bascomb.  "Odds bodikins! didn't I say
+so?  And how long has he been there, friend?"
+
+"If the clue which has been obtained proves to be a true one, your
+Capitan will have been there close upon four days," was the reply.  "The
+man whom we believe to be he was noticed in a small posada four evenings
+ago, and the landlord of the house is of opinion that someone must have
+suspected and informed upon him, for during the evening four familiars
+of the Inquisition called at the house and, in spite of his violent
+resistance, took him and carried him away."
+
+"They did, did they?" retorted Bascomb.  "If I can lay my hand upon
+those four familiars I'll make them wish their hands had withered rather
+than that they had laid them upon an Englishman!  But there seems to be
+a good deal of uncertainty even now about this story of yours, senor
+interpreter, and I think our best plan will be to take up and
+investigate the matter ourselves.  What say you, gentles?  Four days!
+Why, they will have had time to maim the man for life in those four
+days!  But if they have--!  Well, what say ye, my masters; shall us take
+a strong party of men, go ashore, make our way to their Inquisition, and
+see for ourselves whether or not Captain Marshall is there?  And if he
+is there, and they have mis-used him, we shall be able to take vengeance
+upon the evildoers themselves instead of punishing a lot of innocent men
+and women by knocking their homes about their ears."
+
+"I say that we ought to do as you propose, without a moment's
+unnecessary delay," replied Winter.  "And I, too," answered each of the
+others present.
+
+"Then it shall be done," answered Bascomb, determinedly.  "My proposal,
+Mr Winter, is that we make equal division of our force; one-half under
+my leadership to go ashore and look for our Captain, while the other
+half under you remains aboard the _Adventure_ to take care of her and
+the prize.  Is that agreeable to your worship?"
+
+"Yes," answered Winter; "it is as good a plan as we are like to devise,
+even though we were to cogitate for the rest of the day.  It is true
+that I would have preferred to lead the landing-party, since if aught
+should happen to you we shall be left without a navigator."
+
+"Nay, that you need not be," answered Bascomb, "for I will leave young
+Chichester with you, and he can be your navigator; he has been an apt
+pupil, and now knows as much about navigation as I do, so that
+difficulty is soon overcome.  Hallo! the boat ahoy!" he continued,
+directing his conversation once more to the interpreter; "come aboard,
+senor, will you?  We shall require your services anon."
+
+"Have I your word, most illustrious, that no evil shall befall me if I
+put myself into your hands?" asked the man.
+
+"You have," answered Bascomb.  "You may trust yourself to us without
+fear; indeed you are like to be a great deal more safe with us than
+elsewhere during the next few hours."
+
+"It is enough," returned the interpreter, and signed to the boatmen to
+put him alongside, climbing to the deck and stepping in through the
+gangway without fear when they had done so.
+
+"Now then, Senor Pacheco," said Bascomb, when the Spaniard, peering
+about him curiously, had joined the party on the poop; "I am about to
+land a party and march it to the Inquisition, in order that I may
+ascertain for myself whether or not our Captain is within its walls.
+Whereabout is the place?  Can it be seen from here?"
+
+"Nay, most illustrious, it cannot, for it lies at the back, or northern
+extremity, of the western half of the town," answered Pacheco.  "It lies
+in the direction of the western tower of the cathedral, but far beyond
+it."
+
+"Um-m!" commented Bascomb; "then, after all, there would not have been
+much chance of reaching it with our guns.  Is it a strong place?  Shall
+we find it very difficult to force our way in?"
+
+"I have never been inside--the saints be praised--so cannot tell you
+very much about it," answered Pacheco.  "So far as the building itself
+is concerned, it is a strong place, being built entirely of stone, with
+high walls, which are said to be nowhere less than three feet thick.
+But the main entrance is guarded only by a pair of oaken doors--massive,
+no doubt, but probably fastened only with bolts of ordinary strength;
+for who would ever dream of attempting to break into the Inquisition?
+Heaven forgive me for affording information to these heretical English,"
+he muttered under his breath in his native tongue; "but, indeed, if in
+their fury they should tear the place down, I for one should not be
+sorry!"
+
+"Are there many troops in the town?" demanded Bascomb.
+
+"About a hundred, illustrious senor," answered Pacheco.  "Five hundred
+are on their way down from the interior, it having been intended to send
+them home in the galleon, but I have not heard that they have yet
+arrived."
+
+"If they had arrived, do you think you would have heard of it?" demanded
+Bascomb.
+
+"I might, senor; but, on the other hand, I might not," answered Pacheco.
+"If they had arrived and marched into the town openly, doubtless I and
+every other inhabitant of Cartagena would have been aware of the fact.
+But, senor, your question has given rise to a doubt in my mind, and I am
+now wondering whether, in view of your presence in the harbour and your
+threat to bombard the town, his Excellency the Governor may not have
+taken steps to have the expected troops intercepted and introduced into
+the town secretly during the dead of night.  If you were to ask my
+advice, senor, I should recommend you not to trust overmuch to the fact
+that I have heard nothing of the arrival of those soldiers."
+
+"See here, sirrah!" ejaculated Bascomb, suddenly rounding upon the man,
+"you are extraordinarily free and glib with your information.  Now, are
+you a traitor to your own people, or is your information false and
+intended to mislead us?"
+
+"Neither, senor, on my honour as a Spaniard," answered Pacheco.  "The
+fact is," he continued in explanation, "that I have seen much of the
+English during my business as a seafarer, and have learned to like them,
+in spite of their overbearing ways and the fact that they are heretics.
+Moreover, senor, you are about to attack the Inquisition, and good
+Catholic though I am, it would not grieve me were you to take it and
+give it to the flames, for I like it not, and that's the truth, the
+saints forgive me!"
+
+"Now, gentles," said Bascomb, "you have heard what Senor Pacheco has
+said about the troops, and if it be truth--as I doubt not it is--it
+behoves us to be careful how we thrust our noses into that city of
+Cartagena yonder.  Yet go I must, and will; for it is not to be thought
+of that our Captain may be in their accursed Inquisition, perhaps
+suffering torments unimaginable, and we doing nothing to help him.
+Therefore, in view of the possibility of those troops having arrived,
+and having been secreted somewhere in the town, I think we must modify
+our plans a little, to the extent, that is to say, of making the
+landing-party as strong as we can at the expense of the party remaining
+behind.  Now, Mr Winter, what is the smallest number of men that you
+would care to be left with?"
+
+"If I am to defend the ship successfully in the event of a possible
+attack," said Winter, "I must have at least twenty men.  I cannot do
+with less.  Leave me twenty, and you may take all the rest, even
+including young Chichester, who is like to be a great deal more useful
+ashore than he would be with me."
+
+"Very well," agreed Bascomb, "twenty be it; you can scarce do with less,
+for it is more than likely that, while we are busy ashore, they will
+endeavour to recover possession of the treasure.  And now, Senor
+Pacheco, we shall need you as guide to show us the shortest way to the
+Inquisition.  Art willing to do us that service?"
+
+"I am, most illustrious," answered Pacheco; "but, with your favour,
+senor, it must be under at least seeming compulsion, for if it were
+known that I did such a thing save under the fear of instant death, I
+should never again be able to show my face in Cartagena.  Therefore,
+most valiant Englishman, if I am to lead you, it must be with my hands
+bound and a pistol held to my head."
+
+"Very well," answered Bascomb.  "We will manage that for thee, old
+sea-horse, as natural as life, so that nobody seeing thee being driven
+along at the head of us shall guess but that thou'rt quaking in thy
+shoes at every step thou takest.  Take charge of him, Dick; he is to be
+thy prisoner, remember.  Bind his hands behind him so firmly that he
+cannot get away, and just tightly enough to leave a mark.  Put a halter
+round his neck, and hold the end of it in thy hand, and threaten him
+with thy drawn pistol at every street corner.  And now, gentles, to our
+preparations.  Every man of the shore party shall go armed with hanger
+on hip, a pair of loaded pistols in his belt, a good bow in his hand,
+and a quiver full of arrows slung over his shoulder.  We muster on the
+main deck twenty minutes hence, and the pinnace, with the interpreter's
+boat, ought to be sufficient to carry us all from the ship to the
+wharf."
+
+The first half-dozen men who were ready slid down the ship's side into
+the interpreter's boat so swiftly and silently that they took her
+astonished crew completely by surprise, and held them in subjection
+until the rest were ready; then Senor Pacheco, slung in a noose, was
+lowered down the ship's side, and roughly ordered into the stern-sheets
+by Dick, who followed him there and kept him in apparent awe with a
+drawn pistol.  Within the twenty minutes all were ready and embarked in
+the two boats--the pinnace having been lowered in the interim, when they
+pushed off from the _Adventure_, the attenuated crew of which bade them
+Godspeed with a hearty cheer--and headed up the harbour toward the
+north-western half of the town.
+
+The distance which they had to pull, in order to reach the wharf
+indicated by Pacheco, was about three-quarters of a mile, and as they
+neared the landing-place they perceived that a good many people had
+gathered, and were watching them curiously; but of soldiers there was
+not one to be seen, which Bascomb confessed he regarded as rather a bad
+sign, as the absence of any visible inclination to resist their landing
+seemed to him to point to the preparation of a trap somewhere on the
+road.  He asked Pacheco what he thought about it.
+
+"God forgive me!  I know not what to think, most illustrious," answered
+that worthy.  "But I like it not, for I think with you that the Governor
+would never permit you to land unresisted, had he not prepared a warm
+reception for you at some point where you will be at even greater
+disadvantage than you would be on the wharf.  And yet I do not know how
+that could be either, for he has had no means of learning your
+destination, so how could he know where to set his trap?  But, lest he
+should have guessed, I will lead you by the less direct way, for there
+are two roads by which it is possible to reach the Inquisition."
+
+As the boats ranged up alongside the wharf, and the Englishmen mounted
+and formed up on the quay, the mob, which consisted of about two hundred
+wharf labourers, with a small sprinkling of half-breed women and fifty
+or sixty boys, gave back sullenly and scowlingly with a few low-muttered
+threats and an occasional hissing gibe of _hereticos_!  But there was no
+attempt at violence except when some half-dozen boys began to throw
+stones.  But the stringing of the Englishmen's bows, and the fitting of
+a few arrows to the strings, sent the mischievous young urchins to the
+right-about in double-quick time, and within a minute the landing had
+been accomplished and the march begun.
+
+Pacheco, with his hands lashed behind him and a halter round his neck,
+the end of which was in Dick's hand, led the way, marching between
+Chichester and Stukely, the latter having come ashore in Bascomb's boat,
+bringing his case of instruments and a pocket case of drugs with him.
+The road lay, for a short distance, along the water front, and they had
+not been marching two minutes before they came to a wide and busy street
+which seemed to run right through the very heart of the town to its
+farther end.
+
+"That," remarked Pacheco, "is the direct road to the Inquisition, and it
+is for your excellencies to decide whether you will choose it, or
+whether you will go on and take the longer and narrower road to the same
+place."
+
+"Which road do you recommend, senor?" demanded Bascomb.
+
+"Nay, most illustrious, it is not for me to recommend either," answered
+the Spaniard; "the responsibility is far too great for me--for if
+disaster were to overtake you after you had accepted my advice, I should
+be blamed for it.  I can only repeat what I have already said, that this
+is the direct road to the Inquisition, and the road which the
+authorities will naturally expect you to take if they have any suspicion
+as to your destination."
+
+"Then in that case," decided Bascomb, "we will take the other one.
+Forward!"
+
+The march was thereupon resumed, the little band of Englishmen being
+followed, at a respectful distance, by a rapidly increasing mob which
+seemed, from its appearance, to be composed of all the ruffians and
+cut-throats of the city.  But they did not offer to molest the invaders,
+beyond occasionally shouting insulting epithets at them, of which the
+English took no notice.  The mob seemed simply to follow out of
+curiosity, and possibly with the hope of witnessing some interesting
+developments later on.
+
+A quarter of a mile farther on they came to another street, not nearly
+so wide as the first--a street of lofty, more or less dilapidated
+houses, with narrow, cage-like balconies before the upstairs windows,
+and small cellars of shops on the ground floor.  The street was paved
+with rough cobble stones, and sloped from each side toward the centre,
+through which ran a kennel or gutter encumbered with garbage and filth
+of every description, through which a foul stream of evil-smelling water
+wound its devious way.  The street had apparently at one time been one
+of some pretensions, but had now fallen upon evil days and become the
+abode of a number of petty tradesmen, such as cobblers, sellers of fruit
+and cheap drinks, dealers in second-hand goods of every description, and
+riffraff generally.  It swarmed with dirty, slatternly women, still
+dirtier half-naked children, lean and hungry-looking dogs, and lazy,
+hulking men with brass ear-rings in their ears, the rags of tawdry
+finery upon their bodies, and their sashes perfect batteries of
+murderous-looking knives.  They were a villainous, scowling,
+criminal-looking lot of ruffians without exception, and low murmurs of
+anger and astonishment, not unmingled with dismay, passed from one to
+another when the English suddenly wheeled into the street.
+
+They gradually seemed to acquire courage, however, as they noted the
+small number of the intruders, and the fact that the latter took no
+notice of them, and presently, when the mob which had followed the
+English from the wharf swung into the street and began to explain in
+response to the questions with which they were eagerly plied, many of
+the tenants and frequenters of the Calle de Santa Catalina joined the
+procession, which by this time numbered some three or four hundred and
+completely blocked up the narrow street in the rear of the English.  It
+was becoming an ugly, dangerous-looking crowd, too, the kind of mob
+whose courage grows with the consciousness of increasing superiority in
+numbers, and it now began to flaunt its fearlessness before its admiring
+women folk by joining vociferously in the insulting epithets which were
+now being raucously yelled after the little band of strangers.  The
+situation was becoming distinctly threatening, and Bascomb quietly
+dropped to the rear, for it was in that direction that trouble seemed to
+loom largest.
+
+He had just joined the rearmost file when one boastful ruffian, egged on
+by the rest, suddenly ran out in front of the crowd and whipping a long,
+murderous-looking knife from his sash, hurled it with deadly aim at him.
+Luckily for the master, he caught the movement out of the corner of his
+eye, and wheeled round just in time to parry the flying missile with the
+blade of his sword.
+
+"Halt!" he cried, "and extend yourselves across the street, facing
+outward!"  And at the same instant he whipped a pistol from his belt,
+levelled it, and fired at the aggressor, who flung up his hands and,
+with a shriek, fell prostrate in the gutter, with the blood rapidly
+dyeing purple the dirty white of his shirt.  A howl of execration and
+dismay from the Spaniards immediately followed this act of retaliation,
+knives were whipped from their sheaths, and for an instant it looked as
+though the mob were about to charge; but the business-like promptitude
+with which the English fitted their arrows to their bows, and drew the
+latter, quelled the courage of their assailants for the moment, who
+contented themselves by yelling execrations as they lifted the injured
+man and carried him into the nearest house.  Then, satisfied with the
+effect of their demonstration, the English resumed their march; but the
+mob continued to hang tenaciously upon their skirts, like a pack of
+hungry wolves, and it became every moment increasingly evident that it
+would need but a little encouragement to induce them to attack in deadly
+earnest.
+
+In this fashion the English proceeded for nearly half a mile when they
+perceived what appeared to be a square opening out before them; and a
+moment later, as they debouched into it, they saw that this square was
+full of soldiers, both cavalry and infantry.
+
+"Back for your lives into the street; you will stand a better chance
+there!" yelled Stukely, halting and facing the little band who followed
+him.  But it was too late; the street behind them had in some
+unaccountable fashion also filled with soldiers, and the retreat of the
+English was cut off.  They were trapped as neatly and effectually as
+their enemies could possibly have desired.
+
+"Did you know anything of this?" demanded Dick of the man who had led
+them thus far.
+
+"On my soul, no, senor, as I hope for salvation!" fervently answered
+Pacheco, looking fearlessly into Chichester's eyes.
+
+"I believe you," returned Dick, releasing his grasp upon the halter
+round the Spaniard's neck.  "Go, and save yourself while it is possible.
+One of your own countrymen will doubtless free your hands; I have no
+time to do it.  Go!"
+
+"My thanks, senor; and may the Blessed Mother and the saints protect
+you!"  And, bending forward, he went at a run, with his hands still
+bound behind him, toward the soldiers, who, seeing that he was an
+apparently escaped prisoner, opened out and allowed him to pass through
+their ranks.
+
+At this moment an officer wearing a full suit of plate armour, and
+mounted on horseback, advanced, and, lifting the visor of his helmet,
+demanded, in fairly good English:
+
+"Where is the officer in command of this force?"
+
+"Here," answered Bascomb, pushing his way to the front.
+
+The Spaniard bowed.  Then, indicating with a wave of his hand the troops
+present, which must have numbered some eight hundred at least, he said
+with a smile:
+
+"Senor, do you need any further argument than these to convince you of
+the desirability of surrendering at discretion?"
+
+"_A buena querra_?" demanded Bascomb, who had picked up a phrase or two
+of Spanish during his conversations with Marshall.
+
+"Certainly, senor, if, as I presume to be the case, you hold a
+commission from your queen."
+
+"I hold no such commission, senor," answered Bascomb, who began to
+realise that he and his followers were in a very tight place.
+
+"You hold no such commission, eh?  Then, is one to assume that you are
+merely a band of ordinary, commonplace pirates, eh?" demanded the
+officer.
+
+"You are at liberty to assume what you please," retorted Bascomb.  "I
+repeat that I hold no commission, no authority save that which is
+conferred by my own sword.  And I surrender _a buena querra_, or not at
+all."
+
+"You surrender at discretion, or not at all, senor pirate.  Which is it
+to be?" was the rejoinder.
+
+"Not at all, then," answered Bascomb.  "We will fight to the death,
+rather than surrender to perish in your hellish Inquisition!"
+
+The Spaniard bowed, closed the visor of his helmet, and reined his horse
+back very slowly until he had returned to his place at the head of the
+regiment of cavalry which he commanded; while Bascomb, turning to his
+followers, shouted:
+
+"Now, dogs of Devon, show these cowardly Spaniards a bit of your
+quality.  Look to the troops, horse and foot, that they've brought
+against us, eight hundred of 'em to our forty; that's just twenty to
+one, twenty soldiers that each man of us must kill before we can get
+back to the ship.  For that's where we're going; we can't take the town
+with all these soldiers against us.  But let us get back to the ship and
+we'll tell 'em another story; all their soldiers and twice as many again
+won't save 'em from the heavy ordnance of the galleon and the
+_Adventure_; and half an hour's bombardment will make 'em glad enough to
+come to terms wi' us.  Now, the one half of you charge back along, down
+the street; the other half will follow, retiring backward and facing the
+enemy.  Now, have at 'em, my hearts, for here they come!  Clear the way
+with your arrows first; and then give 'em the cold steel!"
+
+While Bascomb had been delivering his pithy address, the officer in
+armour had also been haranguing his troops with much gesticulation and
+sword nourishing, which he had wound up with a command to charge,
+himself leading the attack upon the little band of English seamen
+wedged, so to speak, in the throat of the narrow street.  At Bascomb's
+word to "Have at 'em" the half nearest the street faced quickly about,
+and the whole party fitted arrows to their bows, drew them to the head,
+and let fly, half of the arrows winging their way to rake the narrow
+street, while the other half whistled into the ranks of the soldiers in
+the square, who had just put spurs to their horses.  The range was
+short, and the aim deadly, consequently every arrow found its mark, some
+of them indeed twice over, for there were at least a dozen of the cloth
+yard shafts that passed clean through the body of their first victim to
+find lodgment in the body of the second.  As for Dick, he distinguished
+himself by sending an arrow neatly between the bars of the visor of the
+officer on horseback, who thereupon reeled out of his saddle, and
+crashed down upon the cobbled pavement of the square with a rattle like
+that of a whole cartload of spilled ironmongery, close to Chichester's
+feet, who thereupon dashed nimbly in and snatched up the splendid sword
+that flew from the fallen warrior's grasp.  Some twenty soldiers fell to
+that first discharge; and so great was the dismay occasioned by their
+fall that their comrades, instead of continuing their charge and riding
+the Englishmen down, as they might easily have done, reined their horses
+sharply back upon their haunches, with the result that their comrades in
+the rear dashed headlong into them, and in an instant the whole of that
+part of the square which abutted upon the street became a confused
+medley of plunging, squealing, and fallen horses, and dead and wounded
+men.
+
+Meanwhile, the other front of the English had been equally successful,
+their first discharge of arrows having been so deadly that the soldiers
+drawn up across the end of the street to cut off their retreat, had
+simply crumpled up and withered away, leaving the street open for the
+retirement of the English; and the latter had accordingly availed
+themselves of the opportunity to dash in, and, as they fondly believed,
+secure protection for their flanks.  But although the soldiers had given
+way before that terrible discharge of arrows, they were by no means
+beaten; and presently an officer succeeded in rallying about twenty,
+whom he drew across the street in a double rank, with their matchlocks
+unslung.  Bascomb, however, was quick to see the danger.
+
+"Don't let 'em bring their ordnance into use, or it will be all up with
+us," he shouted.  "Keep 'em moving, lads, keep 'em moving; so long as we
+does that we'm so good as they be--and better; but once let 'em bring
+their firearms into play, and we'm done.  So, keep 'em moving."  And he
+himself set the example by rushing upon the enemy, sword in hand, and
+laying about him so shrewdly that the Spanish line was once more broken
+and forced into full retreat.
+
+And indeed what could the heavily accoutred Spanish soldiers, tightly
+strapped up in a suffocatingly hot uniform, do against the nimble
+English, who, for the most part, fought in shirt, breeches, and shoes
+only, whose arrows flew with such irresistible force that they pierced
+right through a man's body, flesh, muscle, bones, and all, and who
+seemed to be governed by no laws of fighting, but instead of observing
+all the niceties, the rules, and the punctilio of fence, simply rushed
+in and cut a man down before the poor wretch could guess what they would
+be at!
+
+For ten minutes the fight raged with unimaginable fury before a single
+Englishman was hit; and then one poor fellow dropped, with a long knife
+quivering in his skull, flung from an upper window of one of the houses.
+The man who did the dastardly deed was seen to withdraw hurriedly from
+the window; but it was enough; half a dozen of the fallen man's comrades
+instantly dashed into the house, were gone about half a minute, and then
+returned with a perfectly satisfied look upon their faces, and once more
+plunged into the melee.  No more knives were thrown from that house; but
+unfortunately the deed, and not the swift retribution which followed,
+had been seen and thought worthy of imitation, and within five minutes
+there was scarcely a window within range of the fighting which was not
+vomiting missiles of one sort or another, with disastrous effect upon
+the English, who, under this new form of attack, began to fall thick and
+fast.  For now that the populace had the support of several hundred
+soldiers, their courage became so reckless that they could no longer
+restrain themselves; and they accordingly engaged in the attack upon the
+English with avidity--from the comparatively safe position of the
+upstairs windows of the houses on either side of the street.  Stukely
+and Dick were with the rearguard, making a vigorous and successful stand
+against the attack of the soldiery, when this new feature in the
+fighting was introduced, and they knew nothing about it until a great
+stone, hurled from the attic window of the house in front of which they
+were fighting, crashed down fair upon young Chichester's head and sent
+him reeling senseless to the ground.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT.
+
+HOW PHIL AND DICK ESCAPED FROM CARTAGENA.
+
+When Dick recovered consciousness it was evening; the street was quiet,
+and he was lying upon a couch in a darkened room, with Philip Stukely
+and an elderly woman bending over him; the woman holding a basin of warm
+water, while Stukely assiduously bathed an ugly scalp wound on the crown
+of his head.  The said head was throbbing and aching most atrociously,
+and when the young man sat up and attempted to rise to his feet he
+discovered, to his astonishment and chagrin, that he had no control over
+himself, the room seemed to be whirling and spinning round with him at
+bewildering speed, and his legs immediately collapsed under him.
+
+"Now, then, none of that, youngster," exclaimed Stukely, as he flung his
+arm round Chichester and gently lowered the lad back on the couch.
+"What a plague induced you to start up like that, all of a sudden,
+before I was ready for you?  You will just have to lie still, young man,
+until I tell you that you may move.  And how do you feel, now that you
+have seen fit to at last come to your senses?"
+
+"How do I feel?" reiterated Dick, trying to pass his hand over his
+forehead, and failing, for the member seemed heavier than lead.  "Why, I
+seem to have no more strength than a baby; my head is nothing but one
+big, atrocious ache; and I don't seem to be able to remember things very
+well.  For instance, I don't in the least know where we are, or how we
+got here; and--and--who is the--ah--lady, Phil?"
+
+"Don't you worry about the lady, youngster, she is all right, and proved
+herself to be a friend just when we badly needed one," answered Stukely.
+"The important thing just now is to find out precisely what is the
+matter with you; so have the goodness to answer my questions as clearly
+as possible, will ye?"
+
+And while Stukely is closely questioning his patient the opportunity may
+be taken to explain, in a very few words, how the two friends came to
+find themselves where they were.  As has already been stated, they were
+fighting among the party who were defending the rear during the retreat
+of the English back along the street by which they had come, when Dick
+was felled to the ground by a great stone hurled from the top story of
+one of the houses opposite which they were at the moment engaged.
+Stukely, who was fighting behind him, heard the crash of the stone on
+Dick's head, saw the lad reel and fall, and instantly stooped to raise
+him to his feet again.  But Dick Chichester was no light weight for a
+man like Stukely to lift unaided, and before it could be done the whole
+fight seemed to sweep right over them.  Stukely was knocked down and
+trodden under foot, men locked together in the grip of deadly strife
+reeled and staggered and stumbled over him, and finally he received a
+kick in the temple which so nearly robbed him of his senses that he was
+only very vaguely conscious of what was happening during the next minute
+or two.  The next thing of which he was fully aware being that he was
+being held by the shoulders and dragged along over uneven ground, then
+he became suddenly conscious of being inside a building, and of hearing
+a door closed and barred; and, finally, of finding himself sitting upon
+the floor of the room where Dick and he now were, with the old lady
+supporting his head on her knee while a young woman endeavoured to pour
+_aguardiente_ down his throat.  Then he fully recovered his senses, to
+find, to his great joy, that Dick also had been rescued, and was then
+lying senseless on a couch in the same room.  Then, somehow, the young
+woman had disappeared, and rising to his feet, he had devoted himself to
+the task of wooing back Dick Chichester's senses.  This, however, had
+proved a far more difficult task than he had at first anticipated; and
+it was not until the golden quality of the light streaming in through
+the closed jalousies proclaimed the near approach of sunset that Dick
+manifested any indication of returning consciousness, with the result
+already recorded.  And now a protracted and careful examination of the
+wound, coupled with much questioning of his patient, convinced Stukely
+that his friend Dick had sustained a very serious injury to the head
+which had so far affected the brain that it would be several days at
+least before the young man could possibly be moved!  Meanwhile, what was
+happening to the ship and the rest of the crew?
+
+That was a question that could not be answered just then, for the old
+lady, who, for some mysterious reason, had chosen to play the part of
+Good Samaritan, could not speak a word of English, while Stukely spoke
+no Spanish; and as for venturing outside the house in quest of
+information, that was obviously impossible, for two excellent reasons;
+the first being that Dick's condition was such that he could not
+possibly be left, even for so short a time as half an hour; while the
+other equally good reason was that to venture into the street would be
+to invite immediate assassination.
+
+Well, Stukely told himself, matters could not be helped; Dick and he
+were the victims of circumstance, and there was nothing for it but to
+submit, with the best grace possible.  And so far as their future was
+concerned, that must take care of itself.  Sufficient unto the day is
+the anxiety thereof.  So, with the elderly dame's assistance, he devoted
+himself to the task of doing what he could to relieve and help Dick,
+philosophically leaving the future to take care of itself.
+
+Presently it became too dark to see, and the old lady went to the door
+of the room and called.  Two female voices replied; and a few minutes
+later two young women entered, one bearing a lighted oil lamp, while the
+other carried a tray upon which were set out a bowl of soup, a dish
+containing some roast ribs of kid, some heads of young Indian corn
+boiled, a loaf of bread, and a flask of wine.  These viands were placed
+upon a table together with the lamp, and the young women retired again,
+after indicating by signs that the food was intended for the two
+Englishmen.
+
+Dick's hurt proved to be very much more serious than was at first
+supposed; he became delirious; and for a whole week Phil was kept busy,
+night and day, constantly attending to him, his watch being shared by
+the old lady and her two daughters, who proved extraordinarily kind and
+solicitous.  Then the patient began to mend, slowly; and the young
+women--who proved to be twins, named respectively Clara and Dolores--did
+their best to beguile the time for their two guests by teaching them
+Spanish.  And remarkably efficient teachers they proved to be, too;
+their pupils making enough progress within the next three weeks to
+enable them to gather a tolerably correct general idea of what was said
+to them.  Thus, little by little, and by dint of frequent reiteration,
+accompanied by much laughter and many blushes on the part of their fair
+instructresses, the two young Englishmen learned that they owed their
+lives to the compassion of the Senoritas Clara and Dolores; who,
+watching the fight from their window, had been so greatly impressed by
+the gallant bearings of Dick and Phil, that when the two were seen to go
+down in the melee, the girls, moved by a common impulse, had dashed out
+of the house, the moment that a favourable opportunity had presented
+itself, and had dragged the apparently inanimate bodies indoors
+unnoticed in the prevailing confusion.  And they also learned that,
+according to common report, some eight or ten survivors of the
+ill-advised landing-party had succeeded in fighting their way back to
+the ship, which had thereupon got under way and sailed out of the
+harbour, leaving the _Santa Margaretta_ ablaze from stem to stern.
+
+Thus the time went on until Dick and Phil had been secreted in Cartagena
+nearly six weeks, by which time the former was so nearly approaching
+convalescence that the pair had begun to discuss seriously the question
+of their future.  Then, one night, about nine o'clock, the two girls,
+who had been out taking the air upon the alameda, came rushing home in
+consternation with the news that somebody had somehow acquired an
+inkling of the fact that they were harbouring two Englishmen in their
+house, and that the soldiers might be expected to arrive at any moment
+to take the whole party prisoners!  But, as the girls breathlessly
+explained, if the Englishmen got away at once--as they must for their
+own sakes--no harm need be expected to befall their hostesses, as it
+would then appear that some enemy had been spreading a false and
+malicious report.
+
+The two young Englishmen hardly liked the idea of going off and leaving
+their kind entertainers to bear unaided the brunt of a strict and severe
+cross-examination; but it was obviously the only thing to be done, for
+it would be far worse for the family if the hated _Ingleses_ were
+actually found in the house, than if their recent presence there were
+only suspected; they therefore agreed to go at once; and, since they had
+no belongings to pack, were ready to depart upon the instant.  But the
+girls, who were bitterly distressed at the idea of so sudden and
+unceremonious a leave-taking, would not let them leave the house alone,
+to take their chance of finding their way, unmolested, down to the
+harbour; they insisted upon accompanying them and guiding them by the
+least-frequented ways; and this they did, following a number of narrow,
+winding, deserted lanes and alleys which at length brought them out upon
+the wharf where they had landed on the ill-fated day when they had
+attempted the rescue of Captain Marshall.  Here, after a long,
+lingering, and tearful parting on the part of the girls, the two young
+men eventually found themselves alone, about half-past ten o'clock at
+night; by which hour the wharf was deserted, save for themselves.
+
+Now, the whole thing had been so hurried, and the girls had had so much
+to say during the journey from the house to the wharf, that the two
+friends had been quite unable to form anything in the nature of a plan;
+and even now it was not wise to linger on the wharf, discussing the
+question of what they should do, for the city guard, or watchmen, might
+come along at any moment and surprise them.  They therefore hastily
+surveyed such boats and canoes as were moored to the wharf, chose the
+first useful-looking craft they came to, jumped into her, cut her
+painter, and pushed off down the harbour on their way to the island of
+Tierra Bomba, which Dick decided had better be their first
+halting-place.
+
+The night was, fortunately, fine, with a high and spacious sky of
+indigo, star-studded, flecked with a few thin, fleecy clouds driving up
+solemnly out of the eastward, and the moon, in her second quarter,
+sailing high overhead and affording them all the light that they needed,
+with perhaps a little to spare.  The boat which they had appropriated
+was a very good craft of her kind, about fifteen feet long, very shallow
+and beamy, and equipped with a pair of oars, a tiller and rudder, and a
+mast and sail.  The latter they were especially thankful for, as the
+journey before them was one of about seven miles; and as soon as they
+were fairly clear of the town and had reached a point at which they
+could bear away far enough to the southward to permit of setting the
+sail, they stepped their mast, unfurled their canvas, and went buzzing
+merrily down the harbour, passing on their way the hulk of the _Santa
+Margaretta_, which had been burnt to the water's edge before the flames
+could be extinguished.  Their destination was the creek in the eastern
+shore of Tierra Bomba in which the longboat had lain hidden when Dick
+and Marshall had reconnoitred the town together; and they reached it
+about midnight, secreted the boat beneath the well-remembered bushes,
+and then composed themselves to sleep as well as they could in her
+stern-sheets.
+
+The sun was a full hour above the horizon when his beams, piercing the
+thick canopy of foliage which overhung their place of concealment,
+awakened the two fugitives, who arose from their hard couch refreshed
+but hungry.  A plunge into the shallow waters of the creek washed the
+lingering remains of sleep out of their eyes, and further refreshed
+them, when, having allowed their bodies to dry in the brisk warm breeze,
+they dressed and scrambled ashore to hunt for food.  Of this they
+obtained without difficulty as much as they required; for Tierra Bomba
+was at that time densely overgrown with trees and bushes of various
+kinds, among which several fruit-bearing varieties flourished wild,
+particularly plantains and bananas.  Upon these, then, they satisfied
+their hunger, at the same time taking the precaution to secure a bunch
+of sufficiently generous dimensions to meet all their needs for several
+days to come.  Then, their immediate wants satisfied, they retreated to
+their place of concealment and, seating themselves in their boat,
+proceeded to discuss their plans for the future.
+
+The information respecting the doings of the _Adventure_, communicated
+to them by their fair friends the Senoritas Clara and Dolores, left
+little doubt in their minds that the crew, thoroughly discouraged at the
+disastrous result of their adventure in Cartagena, had decided to rest
+satisfied with the treasure which they had already acquired--and which,
+indeed, was considerable enough to satisfy most reasonable people--and
+had sailed direct for England upon quitting the harbour, too hastily
+concluding, perhaps, that all the missing were dead; or, if not dead, at
+least captive beyond all hope of deliverance.  This assumption seemed to
+Stukely and Chichester to be the only one at which they could reasonably
+arrive; and since its acceptance shut them out from all hope of ever
+again seeing the _Adventure_ and being able to rejoin her, the question
+that naturally arose in their minds was: What were they to do now?
+
+It was Dick who first put this question into words; and by way of reply
+Stukely put another question--"Why did we come here at all?"
+
+"Well," retorted plain, matter-of-fact Dick, "because we couldn't help
+ourselves, I suppose."
+
+"Very well," agreed Stukely, "I will concede that, if you like.  We came
+because we could not help ourselves; because, in other words, after we
+were picked up by the _Adventure_, no opportunity occurred to land us
+again, and therefore we had no choice but to remain in the ship.  But
+why did we consent to become members of her crew?"
+
+"Why, in the hope of making our fortunes, of course," returned Dick.
+"And we did so, too; or should have done so, rather, if thicky stone had
+not cracked my skull for me."
+
+"Precisely," agreed Stukely.  "If your skull had not been cracked, and
+if we had both contrived to get back to the ship, as some of the others
+appear to have done.  But it is just those little ifs, my dear Dick,
+that rule the destinies of men.  If this, that, or the other thing had,
+or had not, happened, everything would have been very different.  Now,
+for my own part, I am a great believer in destiny; I do not believe that
+there is such a thing as accident or chance, but that what we usually
+call by one or the other of those names is ordered by what some men call
+Fate, but what I prefer to call Providence.  I will not attempt to argue
+this matter out with you just now, but will simply content myself with
+the assertion that you and I were destined to be left behind.  If you
+ask, for what purpose, I reply that I do not know; I cannot even guess;
+but I have no doubt that it will be revealed in due time.  If my theory
+is correct and Providence is indeed interfering in our affairs, we may
+do as we will, but we shall be guided and governed, in spite of
+ourselves, until we have accomplished the work which we are destined to
+do.  That being the case, let us leave ourselves in the hands of
+Destiny, to do as she will with us, watching for such right impulses as
+she may impart to us, and following them implicitly, under the belief
+and conviction that she is guiding us.
+
+"Now, why did we come to this Golden West?  Was it not to make our
+fortunes, to acquire a share of the wealth with which the land teems?
+Of course it was; and since we are here, and cannot get away, I say let
+us push into the interior and see if we cannot find for ourselves some
+of the gold, or gems, with which the soil is said to abound.  There must
+be scores, nay, hundreds, of undiscovered mines in the lonely fastnesses
+to which no man has thus far penetrated; and I can see no reason why we
+should not find one of them.  Now, what say you?"
+
+"Simply, that I agree with every word you have said, Phil, and am quite
+ready to go to the world's end with you," answered Dick.  "Now, when do
+we start, and which way do we go?"
+
+"Well," returned Stukely, "our first business is to get safely away from
+Cartagena; and the sooner the better.  For it is evident that the
+authorities have somehow obtained an inkling of the fact that two
+Englishmen belonging to the band who have wrought them so much damage
+have been lurking hidden in the city; and if my estimate of the Spanish
+character be correct I believe they will take a good deal of trouble to
+find us; and if they find us we may rest assured that they will clap us
+into the Inquisition, by hook or by crook.  Therefore, I say, let us get
+away to-night, immediately after dark, so that we may have a chance to
+put as many miles as possible between ourselves and Cartagena before
+daylight.  Then, as to which way we should go, the interior is where we
+are bound for, and the interior lies to the southward, therefore when we
+get out to sea, let us steer south, and enter the first river of any
+importance that we happen to come to, knowing that all rivers lead to
+the interior."
+
+"Agreed!" exclaimed Dick.  "We will leave here as soon as the darkness
+is deep enough to conceal our movements; and we will begin our voyage by
+slipping across the bay and going out to sea by way of the channel at
+the back of the island of Baru, by which means we shall reach the open
+sea some twenty-five miles south of Cartagena, and so avoid the risk of
+being seen and informed upon by any of the local fishing boats.  I would
+that I had one of Mr Bascomb's charts with me; but as I haven't we must
+e'en do without it and trust to memory.  I have some recollection of
+having seen a river of some importance marked on the chart not very far
+south of this; and if we hug the shore pretty closely we can scarcely
+fail to find it."
+
+This matter settled, they proceeded to take stock of their possessions,
+which totalled as follows: a pair of pistols each, the locks of which
+had fortunately been fitted with new flints immediately before the
+disastrous attempt to force a way to the Inquisition at Cartagena; two
+powder horns full of powder; thirty bullets each, together with a
+considerable quantity of greased rags to serve as wadding; a good,
+serviceable hanger, each; and last, but not least, the splendid sword
+which Dick had taken from the Spanish cavalier during the fight in the
+square.  These, the clothes which they stood up in, and the boat in
+which they had made their escape, were all that they possessed in the
+world; and thus scantily provided these two young men were calmly about
+to plunge into the very heart of a hostile country, of which they knew
+nothing, in search of fortune!  Truly was it said of these men and their
+contemporaries that "they feared God and naught else!" and it was they
+who laid the foundations of that greatness among the nations of the
+world which Britain enjoys to-day.  May she have the wisdom to retain
+it!
+
+All day the two fugitives lay in their place of concealment, resting and
+otherwise preparing for a wakeful and busy night; and when at length the
+sun plunged down into the western sea in a transient blaze of glory, and
+the sea breeze began to die away, they cautiously pushed out from
+underneath their leafy screen and proceeded to paddle quietly down the
+little cove toward the south bay, which they reached just as the last of
+the daylight was fading out of the sky and the stars were beginning to
+twinkle out, one after the other, in swift succession, in the great
+purple dome of heaven above.  The evanescent twilight now shrouded
+everything in mystery; a few boats could be seen moving about here and
+there, but only by the lingering golden light in the western sky
+reflected gleamingly from the ripple of bow or paddle, and the fugitives
+passed across the bay and entered the narrow channel between the island
+of Baru and the main, just as the first soft breathings of the land wind
+began to make themselves felt.  To these they gladly spread their sail--
+for paddling was rather too warm work to be agreeable--and went gliding
+easily and pleasantly along, closely hugging the weather shore, for the
+sake of the smooth water and the deep shadow afforded by the mangroves
+that thickly lined the beach.
+
+They had reached thus along the shore for about an hour and a half when
+a sudden brightening of the sky to the eastward heralded the rising of
+the moon; and presently the orb, now nearly at the full, sailed up over
+the tops of the trees which lined the shore, and flooded the entire
+scene with her soft orange radiance.  And the first thing upon which the
+eyes of the fugitives fell was a large galley lying at anchor right in
+the middle of the fairway, scarcely a mile ahead.  There were no lights
+visible on board her; but the frequent flash of the moonlight upon
+polished steel showed that someone at least, probably a sentinel, was
+moving and presumably on the watch on board her.
+
+Now arose the question: What was to be done?  Should they stand boldly
+on and take the risk of being challenged; or should they run the boat
+ashore and take to the woods?  Everything depended upon the question of
+what was the galley's business just there, of all places in the world;
+and it did not take the Englishmen long to make up their minds that in
+all probability she had been stationed there to keep a lookout for them,
+as the passage out at the back of Baru was so obviously the one that
+would be most likely to be taken by people anxious to escape from
+Cartagena by water.  If that were the case they could not possibly hope
+to slip past the craft unchallenged, for the moon was every moment
+soaring higher into the sky and more clearly lighting up the scene, and
+especially the surface of the water.  And if they were challenged and,
+refusing to reply, attempted to escape, what hope of success had they?
+Absolutely none!  Therefore they put down their helm, hove the boat
+about, and headed in for the land.
+
+If any doubt remained in their minds as to the character and intentions
+of the galley, it was speedily dissipated, for they had scarcely got
+their boat round upon the other tack when a musket was discharged on
+board the craft, and a hail was faintly heard pealing across the water
+from her, and some two minutes later a ruddy flash succeeded by a puff
+of smoke leapt from her forecastle, followed, a second or two later, by
+the splash of a heavy shot in the water a dozen yards or so astern of
+the boat.  Five breathless minutes followed for the fugitives, and then
+a whole forest of oars suddenly sprang from the galley's sides, plunged
+into the water, and she was under way, heading straight after the boat.
+
+"Shall we do it, Dick, think you?" demanded Stukely, as he peered
+anxiously under the foot of the sail.
+
+"Yes," answered Dick, "if the wind holds.  Blow, good breezes, blow!" he
+murmured, and began to whistle softly.  Suddenly he sat more upright in
+the boat and gazed eagerly ahead.
+
+"Look ahead and all along past our weather bow, Phil," he said.  "Is my
+sight deceiving me, or do I see a number of water channels running into
+the land there?  To me it looks as though there was an indentation of
+some sort, like--well, like the mouth of a river choked with islands,
+away ahead of us.  And, if so, we are saved, for it will be strange
+indeed if we cannot dodge the galley among those islands--even if she
+can get in among them," he added.  "For unless I am very greatly
+mistaken the water shoals close inshore of us.  Do you notice how smooth
+it is?"
+
+"I do," said Stukely.  "I humbly hope it may not be too shoal for us as
+well as for the galley.  All right, fire away," he continued,
+apostrophising the galley; "fire away and waste your powder!  You will
+have to shoot a good deal better than that to hit us."  For the people
+in the galley were loading and firing in feverish haste, evidently
+anxious to hit the boat before she should reach the shelter of the
+islands, now less than a quarter of a mile ahead.
+
+Presently the boat shot into the belt of smooth water that Dick's keen
+eye had detected, and Phil seized a paddle and plunged it over the side,
+to withdraw it a moment later and inspect it by the light of the moon.
+
+"Four foot of water, with any quantity of soft black mud under it," he
+announced.  "If thicky galley keeps as she is going for another five
+minutes, Dick, she'll be stuck so hard and fast in that same mud that
+she'll have something else to think about than chasing us.  Ah!" as the
+boat luffed round a small mangrove-covered island, and the galley was
+shut out from view, "there goes their last chance of hitting us with
+their footy ordnance--with a murrain on them!"
+
+The fugitives now suddenly found themselves sailing through a labyrinth
+of small, mangrove-covered islets intersected by water lanes so narrow
+and winding that they were only able to sail the boat along them by
+exercising the utmost care and vigilance.  This intricate and difficult
+navigation continued for nearly three hours, at the end of which time
+they suddenly emerged from the maze of islets and found themselves in a
+stream of thick, muddy water, averaging about a quarter of a mile in
+width, with low banks fringed by mangrove trees, beyond which it was
+occasionally possible to catch glimpses of more lofty vegetation.  The
+water here was so deep that, except when close to the bank on either
+side, it was impossible to reach bottom with a six-foot paddle; but when
+they had traversed the river far enough to enable them to get a vista of
+a clear mile astern of them there was still no sign of the galley, which
+they therefore concluded had been unable to pass the mud bar at the
+entrance of the river.
+
+The course of the stream which they were now following was,
+approximately, north-north-east, for a distance of about twenty-two
+miles, which was traversed in a trifle over four hours.  Here the river
+suddenly bent sharply round in a south-easterly direction; the mangroves
+disappeared, being replaced by a thick fringe of reeds, the banks of the
+river gradually increased in height, and were covered to the water's
+edge with a thick tangle of bushes, amid which towered the outposts of a
+forest of magnificent trees that could be seen stretching away for miles
+ahead.  The fugitives considered that they were now well beyond all
+likelihood of pursuit, and the thick beds of reeds which fringed the
+river at frequent intervals afforded them excellent opportunities for
+concealment; but the wind continued favourable, and the moon afforded
+them ample light; they therefore determined to press forward so long as
+the conditions continued favourable, one of them remaining on watch and
+steering the boat while the other slept.
+
+In this fashion they sped up the stream hour after hour, all through the
+night, the width of the waterway remaining about the same, but the
+character of the country ever-changing, the banks in places rising to a
+height of quite a hundred feet, here in the form of a gentle, tree-clad
+slope, and there towering precipitously, a rocky face, with overhanging
+bushes and great clumps of fern springing from every fissure.  At length
+the moon sank beneath the tree-tops on the western bank, and the light
+became so uncertain that the voyagers were seriously debating the
+advisability of seeking a suitable spot in which to tie up the boat,
+when a sudden chilliness in the wind warned them that the dawn was at
+hand, and a few minutes later the sky to the eastward paled, so that the
+tops of the trees stood out against the pallor black as though drawn in
+Indian ink, the stars dimmed and blinked out, one after another, the
+eastern pallor became suffused with delicate primrose that rapidly
+warmed into clear amber, a beam of golden light flashed through the
+branches of the trees on the eastern bank of the river, and in a moment
+the whole scene changed as if by magic, a thousand lovely tints of
+green, blue, orange, crimson, and white, leapt into view as daylight
+flooded the landscape, revealing great masses of flowering shrubs and
+enormous festoons of queer-shaped and gorgeously coloured orchids;
+colibris that flashed like living gems darted hither and thither; flocks
+of gaily plumaged parrots winged their way, screaming discordantly,
+across the stream; brilliantly painted kingfishers darted like streams
+of living fire from bough to bough, or perched staring intently down
+into the water from some overhanging branch; enormous butterflies of
+exquisite colours, and dragon-flies with transparent rose-tinted wings
+flitted inconsequently over the surface of the water and were leaped at
+by fish as brilliantly tinted as themselves--and it was day in the South
+American forest.  Half an hour later, as the boat rounded a low bluff, a
+break in the forest appeared ahead, beyond which a wide expanse of water
+was seen sparkling in the rays of the early morning sun; and presently
+the boat shot out of the stream which she had been traversing all night,
+and the wanderers found themselves floating upon the bosom of a
+magnificent river about a mile wide, flowing as nearly as might be due
+north.
+
+For a few seconds the young Englishmen were silent, lost in admiration
+at the spaciousness, the grandeur, and the tropical luxuriance and
+beauty of the scene upon which their gaze rested entranced; then Dick
+broke the silence by murmuring:
+
+"Now, what river is this, I wonder?  Surely it cannot be the Magdalena,
+of which we have heard so many wonderful stories?  And yet, if it is
+not, I know not what river it can be.  The Magdalena lies somewhere in
+this direction, I believe, and--but what matters the name?  It is a
+superb waterway, however it may be called, the current is not so strong
+but that we can easily stem it with the help of our sail, and it comes
+from the direction in which we want to go.  What say you, Phil?  Which
+is it to be, north or south?"
+
+"South, of course," answered Stukely; "why ask such a totally
+unnecessary question?"  He spoke with so much irritation of manner that
+Dick looked at him anxiously, fearing that he might be suffering from a
+slight touch of fever.  But no, there was nothing in Stukely's
+appearance to suggest that he was suffering either from fever or any
+other malady; but he was glancing about him keenly, eagerly, yet with a
+puzzled expression, as though he recognised what he was looking at, but
+could not understand why he recognised it.  And his next words conveyed
+precisely the same impression, for he murmured, as though speaking to
+himself:
+
+"Now, this is most extraordinary!  This scene is absolutely familiar to
+me; I seem to have gazed upon it--or upon something precisely similar to
+it in every respect, thousands of times before.  Look at those gigantic
+ceibas yonder; those long, trailing ropes of purple orchids; see those
+flamingoes with their scarlet, black-barred wings, their long thin legs,
+and their curiously twisted beaks; observe those graceful white birds
+with their handsome crested heads; ay, and even the very monkeys
+swinging down by the creepers to dip up the water and drink it out of
+the palms of their hands; it is all much more familiar and homelike to
+me than ever was the scenery of Devon.  Yet I have never been here
+before, unless indeed it has been in my dreams.  But could a dream, or
+even a series of dreams, impart to me the perfect knowledge that I seem
+to possess of everything upon which my eye rests?  Now, yonder, for
+instance, is a tree out of which I used to make--I mean that in some
+strange way I seem to know that splendid bows can be made out of the
+wood of that particular tree; and there, growing close beneath its
+shade, in the water, is a clump of rushes which, when dried in the sun,
+make perfect shafts for arrows.  And that reminds me, Dick, that, since
+we must save our powder and shot for very special occasions, we ought to
+provide ourselves with bows and a good stock of arrows, if only to
+enable us to procure game.  Now, I know perfectly well, in some
+mysterious manner, how to make bows and arrows; and since the materials
+for making both are at this moment before our eyes, we ought to avail
+ourselves of the opportunity.  Don't you think so?"
+
+"Certainly," answered Dick.  "Though what you mean by saying that you
+know what particular kinds of trees make the best bows, and all the rest
+of it, I confess I don't understand."
+
+"Nor do I," admitted Stukely.  "But, all the same, I possess the
+knowledge, however strange it may appear; and perhaps, later on,
+understanding will come to me.  Now, there is a good place to land,
+among the reeds; push the boat in through them, Dick; we shall find the
+bank low just there, with water enough for the boat alongside it."
+
+"Now, how can you possibly know that?" demanded Dick.  "Nevertheless,"
+he continued, "we will try, because it will afford an excellent
+opportunity to test the accuracy of your boasted knowledge."  And he put
+the helm up and headed the boat straight for the reeds, into the midst
+of which she plunged a minute later, pushing them easily aside as she
+drove through them, while they closed up again behind her, effectually
+screening her from view from the river, and as effectually obliterating
+the track which she had temporarily made through them.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE.
+
+HOW PHIL AND DICK VOYAGED UP THE MAGDALENA.
+
+"There, now, what did I tell you?" demanded Stukely, triumphantly, as
+the boat slid easily through the reeds and glided alongside a smooth,
+grassy bank, the top of which was scarcely a foot above the surface of
+the river.  "Now," he continued, "if we lower the sail and unstep the
+mast, we may remain here as long as we please, undetected."
+
+Indeed the statement was strictly true; for, having lowered the sail and
+unshipped the mast, they stepped ashore upon a smooth, grassy lawn, of
+some four acres in extent, completely hidden from the river by the
+screen of tall reeds, the feathery tops of which rose some ten feet
+above the water's surface, while inland it was completely encircled by a
+belt of forest the undergrowth of which was so dense as to be absolutely
+impenetrable by man without the aid of axes or other hewing implements.
+The lawn was thickly dotted with trees and shrubs of various kinds, amid
+which was conspicuous the tree which Stukely had asserted was good for
+the making of bows; and many of the trees were fruit bearers, among them
+being bananas, pawpaws, guavas, mangoes, and other excellent varieties.
+
+Dick stared about him in amazement as he stepped ashore, taking the
+boat's painter with him and making it fast to a sturdy bush which grew
+conveniently close to the water's edge.  "Well," he said, in answer to
+Stukely's question, "you were perfectly right, however you came by your
+knowledge.  And, as to remaining here--well, I think we might do worse.
+We ought to accustom ourselves gradually to the outdoor, semi-savage
+life which will henceforth be ours; and I think we cannot do better than
+begin here.  And that reminds me that I have not yet breakfasted, while
+yonder I see some bananas that appear to have reached the very pink of
+perfection.  Are you hungry, Phil?"
+
+"I am," answered Stukely, with emphasis; "and we have a full larder, it
+seems; so help yourself, lad.  At present we shall be obliged to content
+ourselves with an exclusively fruit diet; but in the course of a few
+days, when we have provided ourselves with bows and arrows, we can vary
+it a little by adding an occasional venison steak, or a parrot or two.
+I can assure you, Dick, that parrots are very excellent eating."
+
+"How do you know?" demanded the matter-of-fact Dick.  "Have you ever
+eaten one?"
+
+"Ay, often enough," answered Stukely, impulsively, then he checked
+himself.  "At least," he stammered, "I seem to have done so; and yet, of
+course, 'tis impossible.  Do you believe, as some assert, that a certain
+number, if not all, of us have lived on this earth once, twice, thrice
+before this present life, Dick?  Because that is exactly how I feel, as
+though I had spent at least one previous existence here, in this very
+part of the world, amid such surroundings as those which our eyes now
+gaze upon.  It all seems so absolutely familiar; I feel that I know all
+that there is to know about everything, except the names of them; ay,
+and there are even times when strange dim memories of past scenes seem
+to visit me, and for a moment I picture myself surrounded by all the
+pomp and grandeur of a civilisation that has long passed away.  You will
+call me a dreamer, as indeed you have often called me already; and
+perhaps you are right.  Yet it is strange that all my dreams should
+centre round scenes glorious as this, and have been so vivid that I
+recognise hitherto unseen objects as perfectly familiar when my gaze
+rests upon them.  But this is unprofitable talk; the really important
+thing is that we are hungry, and are surrounded by food in abundance.
+Let us to breakfast."
+
+When at length they had satisfied their hunger by feasting upon the
+several kinds of delicious fruits which abounded in the enclosure, Phil
+approached the tree which he had asserted was good for making bows from,
+and, drawing his hanger, proceeded to examine very carefully its several
+boughs, finally choosing two which were absolutely straight and about
+twelve feet long.  These he hacked off from the parent trunk, without
+difficulty, using his hanger as an axe; then, handing one to Dick, whom
+he directed to follow his own example, he sat down in the shadow of a
+great umbrella tree and proceeded to trim away first the twigs and then
+the bark.  This done, he took the bare, straight branch, and trimmed off
+the thin end until the wood, which was perfectly round, was about
+three-quarters of an inch thick.  Then he cut away enough of the thick
+end of the branch to leave a pole about six feet long, which he
+proceeded to whittle away at the thick end until it also was about the
+same thickness as the thinner end, leaving the middle part about two
+inches thick.  This he did with his pocket knife, without any
+difficulty, the wood seeming to be quite soft and yielding itself to the
+sharp blade with the utmost facility.  And as he worked, so did Dick,
+the latter with a smile of amusement upon his face, for he flattered
+himself that he knew a thing or two about bows; and to him it seemed
+ridiculous to suppose that this wood which yielded itself as readily as
+cheese to the shaping of the knife could ever be of the slightest use as
+a bow.  But he worked steadily on, following Stukely's lead, and shaping
+his own branch precisely as Stukely shaped his, and after some three
+hours of by no means arduous work each possessed a perfectly straight,
+smooth rod, accurately trimmed into the form of a bow about six feet
+long, with properly notched ends for the string to fit into.
+
+"There," said Stukely at last, as he critically inspected his own and
+Dick's production, "I do not think we can improve upon either of those,
+which ought to make really formidable weapons when they are ready for
+use.  Now, the next thing is to hang them up in the shade to dry, and
+that will take three full days at least, after which they will be ready
+to use, and will steadily improve in quality until the whole of the sap
+is completely dried out of them.  If they have a fault it will probably
+be that we shall find them a shade too strong for us at first; but we
+shall grow accustomed to that in time.  We cannot do better than hang
+them to a bough of this tree, where they will be completely shielded
+from the rays of the sun, and will dry slowly and evenly.  Now, the next
+thing we need is a string for each bow, and--if we can contrive it--a
+spare string as a stand by.  And"--glancing about him--"I think we ought
+to find the materials for the manufacture of those strings not very far
+away."
+
+He hung up the two bows in such a situation that at no time of the day
+would the rays of the sun get at them, and then wandered round the
+enclosure, peering up among the branches of the trees, and at length
+seemed to find what he was seeking, for presently he swung himself up
+into a particular tree, and climbing some little way up it, plucked two
+brown balls about the size of oranges, with which he descended.
+
+"Here we are," he exclaimed in accents of satisfaction, as he exhibited
+the balls to Dick.  "These are the cocoons of a certain caterpillar, the
+name of which I forget, but they spin a kind of silk which is admirably
+adapted for the making of bowstrings, for it is incredibly strong, does
+not fray, and is not affected by damp.  Now--"
+
+"But how on earth do you come to know all this, Phil?" demanded Dick, as
+he took one of the cocoons in his hand and examined it curiously.
+
+"I cannot tell you," answered Stukely, rather impatiently; "let it
+suffice you that I possess the knowledge, in some inscrutable way, ay,
+and a good deal more, too, of which you are like to reap the benefit in
+the long run."
+
+He then proceeded to explain and illustrate how the silk was to be
+unwound--a task which kept them both busy for several hours--and when
+this was at length done he showed Dick how to spin the fine, tough
+filament into a thin but immensely strong cord.  But the most remarkable
+part of the whole affair was the perfectly intimate knowledge which he
+displayed of the various operations, none of which, be it remembered, he
+had ever performed before.  The unwinding of the cocoons and the
+spinning of the cords--two for each bow--occupied the young men during
+the remainder of that first day and the whole of the second, for the
+process was a rather tedious and delicate one, in which Dick at least
+exhibited all the inaptitude of the novice.  The third and fourth days
+were fully occupied in the cutting of reeds and the conversion of them
+into arrows; and here again Stukely showed the same weird,
+incomprehensible knowledge and skill that he had so conspicuously
+displayed in his choice of the wood for the bows, his working of it to
+the proper shape, and his manufacture of the bowstrings; for the arrows,
+when finished, were as nearly perfect as such missiles could possibly
+be, the shafts being of uniform length, perfectly straight, and each
+tipped with a strong, hard thorn, sharp as a needle, and growing
+naturally in the form of a barb.  Two dozen arrows for each constituted
+their initial equipment, but they cut a considerable quantity of spare
+reeds and thorns, and wound quite a large skein of silk to bind the
+barbed heads with, as they were quite prepared to lose several of their
+arrows at the outset, and accordingly made ample provision for their
+replacement, which could be done at odd moments, while working their way
+up the river.  Their next business was to plait two quivers of palm-leaf
+fibre, with shoulder straps to support the same; and it was Stukely who
+had to make these, for when Dick endeavoured to follow his friend's
+instructions he proved to be so absolutely lacking in the necessary
+skill that, to save time, Phil undertook to do all the work himself.
+These several occupations kept them busy for an entire week, during
+which they saw no sign of human presence on the river; and by the time
+that all was finished the bows had dried into prime condition, and Dick
+found, to his amazement, that the wood which, when first cut, had been
+soft and workable as cheese, had become as hard as iron, tough, elastic,
+and extraordinarily strong; that it had, in short, become perfect for
+use as a bow.
+
+Being now equipped with powerful and effective weapons which would
+enable them to save their powder and ball for special emergencies, and
+provide them with all the game they might require, the two adventurers
+resumed their journey, heading up the wide, deep river which they
+believed to be the Magdalena, sailing when the wind permitted, and
+paddling when it did not, unless they happened to be within sight of a
+good camping place when the wind failed them, in which case they very
+frequently ran in alongside the bank, moored the boat, and rested or
+hunted, or both, until the wind sprang up again.
+
+They were perfectly happy now, these two; and it is difficult to say
+which was the happier.  The life which they were living was, as nearly
+as possible, ideal; it was passed in the open air, in the midst of
+glorious scenery which was constantly revealing new beauties and
+wonders; they had not a care in the world, for the river and the forest
+provided them with an ample supply of food, while they had no anxiety
+with regard to clothing in a climate which rendered clothes a
+superfluity.  In short, their every physical need was abundantly
+satisfied; they enjoyed perfect health, and if their adventures thus far
+were of a somewhat tame and commonplace description, well, what mattered
+it?  They had not a doubt that excitement in plenty lay before them, and
+meanwhile their daily life was insensibly training and preparing them to
+cope with it.  Each of them was happy in his own way; Dick, because all
+was new and splendid, and Phil, because he was possessed of a wonderful
+overmastering feeling that after a long period of exile he once more
+found himself amid scenes that were familiar, and, although he could not
+say precisely in what way, suggestive of glorious associations.
+
+Late on the second day of their resumed voyage they arrived at a point
+where the river forked, the stream on their right hand being almost as
+important as the other; but they decided that the stream on their left
+was the main stream, and therefore followed it.  Although they knew it
+not at the moment, this decision of theirs to follow the left instead of
+the right stream was of the utmost import to them; for had they decided
+differently they would have missed the extraordinary adventure that
+awaited them among the mountains which lay so far ahead that many a
+weary mile of river, forest, and plain must be traversed before their
+peaks should swing into sight.
+
+They camped that night on the point of land where the two rivers united
+their waters, and had scarcely landed when, without a sound to tell of
+his coming, a graceful antelope emerged from the brake a few hundred
+yards away, evidently going to the river to drink.  The adventurers were
+at the moment partly concealed by the reeds among which they had moored
+their boat, moreover the wind was in their favour, and for nearly half a
+minute the creature failed to see them.  By the time that he did,
+Stukely had seized his bow, fitted an arrow to the string, and risen
+cautiously to his feet.  Then the antelope appeared to become aware of
+some unusual feature in the scene, and halted to investigate, whereupon
+Phil cautiously drew his bowstring, released it with a loud twang, and
+the arrow, flying straight and true, pierced the creature's heart, so
+that it fell dead in its tracks, and they had their first deer.  And now
+again Stukely gave fresh evidence of his uncanny knowledge, for although
+he had never before killed a deer, and might be supposed to know nothing
+of the verderer's art, he at once set to work to skin and "break up" the
+animal with all the skill of an adept.  So that night they feasted
+sumptuously upon venison steaks, grilled upon the embers of a fire
+which, with a further display of his strange knowledge, Phil kindled by
+the apparently simple but really exceedingly difficult process of
+rubbing two sticks together!  And that night, too, they heard for the
+first time the roar of the jaguar in the adjacent forest.
+
+For several days--so many, indeed, that they lost count of them--they
+voyaged steadily up the great river, sailing when the wind permitted,
+paddling when it did not, passing, at tolerably frequent intervals,
+points where lesser streams discharged themselves into the main body of
+water, while by imperceptible degrees the waterway narrowed, and the
+forest--dense, green, flower-decked, alive and gay with bird and insect
+life--pressed its foliaged walls in upon them ever closer and closer,
+except where an occasional break caused by fire or windfall afforded
+them a momentary glimpse of giant mountain ranges to right and left, at
+first a delicate purple-grey in the distance, but ever, like the forest,
+creeping closer in upon them.  And now at increasingly frequent
+intervals, they began to see Indians, at first a solitary "buck"
+spearing fish from his canoe, but later on in parties of from half a
+dozen to fifty or more, crossing the river, or, like themselves, using
+it as a highway.  But thus far, much as Stukely desired it, they had
+never succeeded in getting into touch with the natives, for the latter
+invariably fled at the mere sight of them.
+
+One of the most surprising circumstances, perhaps, in connection with
+this voyage up the river, was the rapidity with which the two
+Englishmen--or Dick, rather--lost the capacity to be astonished.
+Stukely, indeed, had never manifested the least surprise at any of the
+wonders that were continually coming under their observation, for,
+steadfastly adhering to that strange fancy of his that he must have
+lived in these regions during some former state of existence, he
+persistently asserted that everything he saw was perfectly familiar to
+him.  But with Dick it was very different; he was as matter-of-fact as
+Phil was fanciful; and the sight of giant trees between two and three
+hundred feet in height towering up into the cloudless blue a solid mass
+of purple, scarlet, or yellow bloom; of graceful clumps of feathery
+bamboo a hundred feet long; of the lofty forest walls on either hand
+draped with festoons of orchids of the most extraordinary and
+undreamed-of shapes and the most gorgeous colours; of birds, insects,
+ay, and even fish, that flashed and glittered with all the hues of the
+rainbow; of monkeys who followed their course up the river in troops of
+a hundred or more; of the lithe and graceful jaguar lying stretched upon
+some trunk or branch that closely overhung the water, watching with
+ready paw to seize any unwary fish that might chance to swim past within
+reach; of alligators that basked log-like on the mud banks--all these
+things were to Chichester at first a source of utmost wonder and
+admiration; yet within a month they had become the veriest commonplaces
+to him, and had entirely ceased to attract his attention.  He was far
+more interested in the sight of a fair breeze stealing up the river
+after them than he was in the sight of the most beautiful flower, the
+most gorgeous butterfly, or the most dainty and brilliant colibri, for
+he knew that all these things he would see again a thousand times or
+more; but a wind that would relieve them of the labour of paddling in
+that scorching climate--ah! that was indeed a sight worth seeing.
+
+At length, when they had been journeying up the river in leisurely
+fashion for about three weeks, meeting with no adventure worthy of
+record, on a certain hot and steamy afternoon, when the boat, under
+sail, was doing little more than barely stem the current, they gradually
+became aware of a low, faint roar, at first scarcely distinguishable
+above the rustle of the wind in the trees aloft and the buzzing hum of
+the innumerable insects which swarmed in the forest and hovered in
+clouds over the surface of the water.  But as the boat continued to
+creep upstream the roar gradually increased in intensity, until at
+length, as they rounded a bend and entered another reach of the river
+which extended practically straight for nearly three miles ahead of
+them, they saw, at a distance of about a mile, a long stretch of
+foaming, tumbling water, rushing headlong down through a rocky gorge,
+about three hundred yards wide, over what was evidently a rocky bed, for
+the brown heads of several rocks were seen protruding above the leaping
+water in the channel.  Rapids! with a fall of nearly thirty feet in
+about half a mile.  This was a formidable obstacle indeed, for it did
+not seem possible that they could get the boat through them; and if they
+should be obliged to abandon her, what would then happen?  Obviously
+they would be obliged to walk the rest of the distance--or to build
+another boat, or canoe, above the rapids; and it was difficult to say
+which was the more distasteful alternative of the two.  Walking,
+probably, for although their belongings were few and by no means
+cumbersome to carry, the forest was so dense that, as they had already
+proved by experience, it was scarcely possible to travel a hundred feet
+without being faced by the necessity to cut their way.
+
+"Well," said practical Dick, after they had sat staring at the beautiful
+but tantalising scene for full five minutes, "it's no use meeting
+trouble halfway, or wondering how we are going to get across the bridge
+until we come to it; let's push on and get as close up as we can; then
+we'll get ashore, walk up along, and have a look at the place.  Perhaps
+when we come to it, it will not look so bad as it does from here."
+
+The bank on either hand was so densely overgrown with shrubs that
+landing seemed out of the question; but, seizing their paddles, the two
+adventurers drove the boat up against the rapidly strengthening current.
+Presently a tiny strip of beach, a yard wide by ten or twelve yards
+long, came into view; and here they beached the boat, making her well
+fast in order that the current might not sweep her away.  The rapids
+were now less than a hundred feet distant, and the rush of the water
+brought down with it a cool, spray-laden breeze that was infinitely
+refreshing after the baking breathlessness of the stream below; but the
+roar of the chafing waters was so loud that it was almost impossible to
+make one's voice heard; Phil therefore scrambled up the steep bank, and
+signed to Dick to follow.  Fighting their way through the dense
+undergrowth, through which they were obliged to cut much of their way
+with their hangers, they at length came out upon a jutting spur of bare
+rock which overhung the rapids at a height of some fifty feet, and from
+this point they were able to obtain a tolerably distinct view of the
+whole gorge.  And, as Dick had suggested, when they came to look at the
+place from close at hand, it did not appear to be nearly so
+impracticable as they had at first imagined.
+
+The bed of the channel was badly encumbered with rocks, it is true, but
+only for about two hundred feet at the lower end; the rest of it, while
+showing a partially submerged rock here and there, was on the whole
+remarkably clear, the water rushing over its bed in a swift,
+glass-smooth stream.  Even where the rocks were thickest, it was
+apparent that there was a very well-defined channel between them, up
+which a carefully navigated boat might easily pass--if propulsive power
+enough were applied to her to overcome the downward rush of the stream.
+But how was that power to be obtained?  Certainly not by paddling; the
+stream was too swift for that.  But it was just possible that it might
+be done by warping if a warp long enough and strong enough could be
+obtained.  Moreover the warp need not be so prodigiously long, for now
+that they came to look at the rapids at close quarters they saw that
+their original estimate of their length had been a long way over the
+mark; it was much nearer a quarter than half a mile long.  They glanced
+about them and saw that the trees were here, as everywhere along the
+river bank, thickly draped with long, thin, tough lianas, and the same
+idea flashed into both their minds at the same moment: why should they
+not twist or plait a warp of lianas?  There were plenty of them, and,
+after all, it merely resolved itself into a question of time, while
+time, just then, was of less importance to them than labour.  There was
+an alternative, of course, they might abandon the boat and construct a
+canoe above the rapids; and it was worth considering whether the
+construction of a canoe or the making of a warp would involve the more
+labour.  To settle the point they decided to go on through the woods
+until they reached the head of the rapids, and there inspect the trees
+with the view of ascertaining whether there were any suitable for the
+construction of a canoe; and having come to this decision, they left the
+rock and re-entered the forest.
+
+For more than half an hour they were so busily engaged in forcing and
+hewing their way through the dense, parasitical undergrowth that they
+had no attention to spare for anything else; but at length they became
+conscious of certain discordant sounds, reaching their ears above the
+roar of the rapids, which presently became distinguishable as the
+beating of drums, mingled with a sort of braying bellow, comparable to
+nothing that they had ever heard before.  As the pair pressed on, the
+unearthly sounds gradually grew louder, not only because they were
+approaching the source of them but also because it was evident that the
+producers of the sounds were becoming more excited, for the tapping of
+the drums increased in rapidity while the braying as steadily grew in
+stridency and discord.  Another five minutes of strenuous labour then
+the two Englishmen burst through the last of the undergrowth and emerged
+upon a cleared space of about a hundred acres on the bank of the river
+just above the rapids.  At this point the river widened out again to
+about the space of half a mile from bank to bank, the gorge being about
+a hundred yards below, and the current was again gentle enough to render
+paddling against it an easy matter.  A small strip of shingly beach was
+dotted with some forty or fifty canoes, each hewn out of a single log;
+and adjoining the beach, scattered over a space of about five acres of
+ground, was a native village consisting of about fifty palm-leaf huts,
+dotted about without the slightest attempt at symmetrical arrangement,
+except that they were built round an open space.  The remainder of the
+clearing consisted of cultivated ground divided into patches devoted in
+about equal proportions to cassava and maize, with a little indigo here
+and there.  A whole forest of slender poles, connected with each other
+by lianas, from which large quantities of fish were suspended, drying in
+the sun, and which, by the way, gave off a most intolerable odour,
+indicated that the inhabitants depended as much upon the river as upon
+the soil for their subsistence.
+
+Apparently some sort of festival or religious ceremony was in process of
+being observed when Dick and Phil burst in so unceremoniously upon them,
+for the entire population of the village, men, women, and children, were
+squatted in a circle round the open space in the middle of the village.
+Despite the scorching heat a large fire was blazing in the centre of the
+open space, and round it sat the village band, consisting of four drums,
+made of sections of trees with the inside cut away, leaving a thin
+cylinder of wood, over one end of which was tightly strained a skin of
+some sort which was slapped with the palm of the open hand, and about a
+dozen flageolet players, their instruments being made of baked clay.  It
+was these last that emitted the unearthly braying, bellowing sounds
+already mentioned.  To this hideous medley of sounds a figure in the
+middle of the circle was dancing, a figure so queer that for a second or
+two the young Englishmen scarcely knew what to make of it.  But
+presently they saw that it was a man laced-up in a jaguar skin, with
+teeth, claws, and tail complete, the face of the man peering out from
+between the gaping jaws.  He was not only dancing vigorously, if indeed
+dancing it could be called, which consisted in leaping violently into
+the air and springing from side to side over a bundle, the nature of
+which the intruders could not at first make out, but also singing, or
+rather howling, certain words which appeared to be gradually working his
+audience up into a state of savage excitement; for at intervals one or
+another of them, apparently moved out of himself, would yell furiously
+and shake in the air a villainous-looking, triple-barbed spear.
+
+For nearly a minute the people were so completely absorbed in the
+movements and words of their piache, or medicine man, or witch doctor,
+as the man in the jaguar skin proved to be, that they were quite
+oblivious of the presence of the two Englishmen; but suddenly the piache
+caught sight of them and stopped short in his leapings and howlings, and
+glared, open-mouthed, at the strangers for a second or two before, with
+a yell of dismay, he turned tail and, leaping right through the blazing
+fire in his panic, dashed into a hut and violently drew across the mat
+which served as a door.  This extraordinary behaviour on the part of the
+medicine man naturally excited the wonder of his audience, and also
+aroused in them a feeling of consternation which caused them to spring
+to their feet and look about them apprehensively.  Then they, too,
+caught sight of the Englishmen, and, like their piache, made a mad dash
+for their huts, yelling as they went.  Thus, in the course of a couple
+of minutes, the two young Devonians were left in complete, undisputed
+possession of the village, although they were conscious of being
+stealthily observed from practically every hut in the place.
+
+"Well," exclaimed Dick, as he stared about him in astonishment, "this
+beats everything!  Men and women, big and little, there must have been
+close upon two hundred of them, and not one had the courage to stay and
+face us!"
+
+"They probably took us for Spaniards," answered Stukely, "and may have
+thought that we were merely the advance guard of a considerable force.
+Hence their terror.  I only hope that when they discover their mistake
+they may not revenge themselves upon us for the fright which we have
+given them.  I would that one or the other of us possessed a smattering
+of their lingo, sufficient to make ourselves understood; I am afraid
+that we shall find our ignorance in that respect a very serious
+hindrance as we penetrate farther into the interior; and we must do our
+best to remedy the--hallo! what on earth is in that bundle?  Did you see
+it move?"
+
+Phil referred to the bundle over which the piache had been performing
+his extraordinary dance when they interrupted him, and which had the
+appearance of being simply a bundle of ordinary matting.  But Stukely's
+eye happened to have been resting upon it while he spoke, and he had
+distinctly seen it move.
+
+"No, I didn't," answered Chichester, in reply to his friend's question,
+"for the simple reason that I wasn't looking at it.  But we'll look at
+it now, if you like."  And striding over to where the bundle lay upon
+the ground, he drew his knife, severed the thongs that bound it,
+unrolled the matting, and disclosed to his own and his companion's
+astonished gaze the figure of a little old man, securely bound hand and
+foot.  He was an Indian of some sort, evidently, but not of the same
+race as the inhabitants of the village, his colour being that of light
+copper, while that of the others was a very dark brown, nearly
+approaching to black; also his features were of a totally different and
+much higher type, his forehead being broad and high, his nose thin and
+aquiline, and his cheek-bones rather high and prominent; in fact he
+must, in the days of his youth, have been a decidedly handsome man, with
+an imposing presence; but now he was old--how old it was rather
+difficult to guess, but probably not far short of a hundred--shrunken
+and shrivelled up until he resembled an animated mummy more than
+anything else.  His head and face were clean shaven, and he was naked,
+except for a sort of petticoat of feathers about his loins, the said
+petticoat having evidently at one time been an exceedingly handsome
+garment, though now it was soiled, frayed, and generally very much the
+worse for wear.
+
+As Dick bent over the old fellow, with his long, keen knife in his hand,
+to sever his bonds, the creature suddenly cried out some half a dozen
+words, in a thin, high, piping voice, causing Stukely to start forward
+and gaze earnestly into the face of the speaker; then, to Dick's
+stupefaction, Stukely replied in apparently the same tongue, bent over
+and rapidly loosed the thongs which bound the old fellow's hands and
+feet together, and proceeded gently to chafe the shrunken limbs.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN.
+
+HOW THE TWO ADVENTURERS ACQUIRED A COMPANION.
+
+"Why, Phil," exclaimed Dick, in amazement, "what does this mean?  Surely
+you are not pretending that you understand the old chap's lingo?"
+
+"No, Dick, I am not pretending," answered Stukely, regarding Chichester
+with a dazed expression.  "It is a fact--a most extraordinary and
+unaccountable fact, that I really understand what the poor old chap
+says, without knowing it, without even previously suspecting it for an
+instant.  I seem to possess a sufficient knowledge of his tongue to be
+able to comprehend his speech, and even to answer him; and I believe
+that in the course of a day or two I shall be able to converse freely
+with him.  What he cried out just now was an entreaty that we would
+spare his life, and I answered that he need not fear us, for we meant
+him no harm."
+
+"Um-m-m!" commented Dick.  "Well, this is the land of marvels, and no
+mistake!  I thought I had grown accustomed to the wonders of it, and
+that I had no capacity for further astonishment, but I confess that you
+have contrived to give me one more spasm of surprise.  Ask your friend
+who he is, and where he hails from: I dare swear that he is not a native
+of this village."
+
+Stukely turned to the old man, who was by this time sitting up and
+gently chafing his wrists and ankles, and attempted to put to him the
+question which Dick had suggested.  But he found that the words would
+not come to him; he felt that he knew but could not remember them; and
+after two or three bungling attempts he was obliged to give it up.
+
+"Now, that is very extraordinary," said he, attempting to explain his
+failure to Dick; "almost as extraordinary as the fact that I understood
+the old chap's words, and was able to answer them.  But I know his
+language--I am certain I do--and after I have practised with him a
+little, it will all come back to me.  Meanwhile we must do the best we
+can.  Are you feeling better, `gramfer'?  And what were the Indians
+going to do to you?"  This in English.
+
+The Indian looked up in Stukely's face and spoke for nearly a minute;
+and when he had finished Stukely was again, to his own and Dick's
+amazement, able to reply.
+
+"We are getting on," Phil explained.  "The old gentleman asked me why I
+did not address him in his own tongue, since I evidently understand it;
+and then went on to say that we arrived here just in the nick of time,
+as the villagers were about to torture him to death, to secure the
+favour of some god or devil of whom they appear to be particularly
+afraid.  And I said that he might depend upon us to protect him so long
+as we have the power to do so."
+
+Then he turned again to the old man, and, with a good deal of stammering
+and hesitation, and many long pauses for consideration, said something
+else, to which the ancient again replied; whereupon Phil made a further
+attempt, with the result that ultimately the two had quite a long
+conversation together, although it must be confessed that the elder man
+did most of the talking.  At length the conversation came to an end, for
+the moment, and Stukely seized the opportunity to transmit to Dick the
+information which he had acquired.
+
+"Our friend's story is a very remarkable one," he said.  "He tells me
+that his name is Vilcamapata; that he is a Peruvian; and was once a
+priest of the Sun, in a temple which stood--and the ruins of which,
+indeed, still stand--on an island in the midst of a great lake which,
+lies among the mountains far away to the southward.  This was when Peru
+was at the zenith of its power and glory under an Inca named Atahuallpa,
+whom the Spaniards under Pizarro decoyed into their power and murdered
+most shamefully and cruelly; afterward seizing the country and making it
+their own.  Since then `gramfer' Vilcamapata has been a wanderer and a
+fugitive, always fleeing from the Spaniards, who, it appears, are doing
+their utmost to extirpate the Peruvians under the pretence of
+converting--or trying to convert--them to the Christian faith.  Thus it
+was in the course of his aimless wanderings that he came to this
+village, three days ago, and was seized by the inhabitants, who, after
+much deliberation, decided to sacrifice him to one of their demons, and
+were, indeed, about to do so when we appeared upon the scene and
+interrupted them."
+
+"Well," said Dick, "it seems to me that he stands a very good chance of
+being sacrificed still, as soon as these Indians find that there are
+only two of us to defend him.  Pray heaven that they may not take it
+into their heads to sacrifice us too, with a murrain on them!"
+
+"Oh, I don't think they will do that, or even attempt to take gramfer
+from us," replied Phil, cheerfully.  "It seems that they have a very
+great respect for white men--except Spaniards--and are ever on the
+lookout for a paleface named Amalivaca to come across the Great Water
+and unite all the Indians into one great and powerful nation which shall
+utterly destroy the Spaniards and restore the country to its original
+owners."
+
+"I suppose they could not be persuaded to accept us as two of
+Amalivaca's sons, come over as a sort of advance guard to prepare the
+Indians for the arrival of the old boy himself?" suggested Dick.  "But
+then the difficulty is that we don't understand their lingo.  Does
+gramfer, think you?  If so, he might be induced to act as our
+interpreter, and inform the Indians that we are their friends.  Perhaps
+if they could be persuaded of that they might be induced to help us to
+get the boat up above the rapids."
+
+"Yes," agreed Phil, "they might; that is a very good idea, and I'll see
+what can be done."  Therewith he turned to the ancient, and again, with
+much halting and stammering, contrived to explain what they desired to
+accomplish.
+
+The Peruvian put several questions to Stukely, seeming not quite to
+comprehend what the white men required; and Dick noticed that after the
+ex-priest had spoken a little while with Phil, the latter became much
+more fluent and certain in his speech, so that, in the course of a
+further conversation of some ten minutes' duration, he contrived to make
+Vilcamapata clearly understand what he wanted; whereupon the old man,
+facing round toward the huts, lifted up his voice and made what seemed
+to be a long proclamation in a language of which Stukely understood
+nothing.  But if what he said was incomprehensible to the white man, it
+was evident that it was clearly enough understood by the Indians, who,
+before the speech was half over, came swarming out of their huts and
+prostrated themselves before Phil and Dick, grovelling in the dust.  Nor
+did they attempt to interfere further with the Peruvian; on the
+contrary, they listened with the utmost attention to all that he had to
+say to them; and when he had finished, about a dozen of them jumped into
+one of the largest canoes, paddled across to the opposite side of the
+stream, vanished into the forest, and after an absence of about an hour
+and a half, reappeared, singing a song of triumph and carrying the white
+men's boat, with all her gear and contents intact, upon their shoulders,
+having evidently brought her up past the rapids by a path through the
+forest, on the opposite side of the river to that by which Phil and Dick
+had ascended.
+
+It was by this time within half an hour of sunset; and when the boat had
+been launched in the river above the rapids, towed across to the village
+side of the stream, and safely moored, the piache again made his
+appearance and addressed himself at considerable length to Vilcamapata;
+who, in his turn, addressed himself to Phil, informing the latter that
+the villagers were profoundly grateful for the honour which the white
+men had done them in condescending to visit their village, and that they
+trusted the said white men would, by lodging in the village for that
+night at least, if not for a much longer time, afford them an
+opportunity to show their gratitude in a practical way.  To which Phil,
+after consultation with Dick, replied that they were gratified to find
+that their Indian children duly appreciated the honour which had been
+done them, and that, as a token of their favour, they would accede to
+their request to spend the night in the village, provided that a new hut
+were erected for their accommodation; but that they must depart at
+sunrise, as they had a long journey before them.  Whereupon the Indians,
+with joyful songs, at once proceeded to erect the new hut on a vacant
+space somewhat apart from the village, pushing forward the work so
+rapidly that the hut was completed and ready for occupation by the time
+that the first stars began to appear in the sky.  And no sooner had the
+two white men installed themselves therein, with a large fire blazing
+before the hut to afford them light, and drive off the mosquitoes, than
+several women appeared with baskets on their heads, some of which
+contained cassava, while the contents of others consisted of the young
+heads of Indian corn, boiled, and wrapped in plantain leaves, the hind
+quarter of a kid, roasted, roasted plantains, a quantity of fruit, and a
+calabash containing a liquid which had a faint, mellow, acid flavour,
+something like weak cider, exceedingly refreshing as a beverage, but
+decidedly heady, as they discovered a little later on.  The Peruvian, at
+the joint request of the white men, established himself in a corner of
+the hut, thankfully accepted such viands as they gave him, and generally
+comported himself in such a manner as to convey the idea that he
+regarded himself as under their special protection.  Indeed they were
+glad enough that he should so regard himself, for there could be no
+doubt that he would be of very great service to them, if only as a guide
+and interpreter; he having, it appeared, been a wanderer up and down the
+country for--as Phil understood--nearly forty years.
+
+"The thing that puzzles me most of all," said Dick, when they were
+discussing the day's doings as they sat at supper that night, "is how
+you and the Peruvian came to be able to converse together.  To me it
+seems nothing less than a miracle."
+
+"Yes," agreed Stukely, "I have no doubt it does; I can quite understand
+that it would so appear to you.  Indeed, when I come to reflect upon it,
+it also appears miraculous to me; for why should I be able to understand
+a language that I have never studied, spoken, or even heard before?  It
+seems impossible, upon the face of it, doesn't it?  Yet, although I know
+that I never was abroad until I came over here in the _Adventure_, I
+have, from the earliest days of my childhood, had a feeling, amounting
+sometimes to conviction, that sometime in the past I dwelt in just such
+another land as this; a sound, an odour, has brought to me vague,
+elusive memories of a country of vast forests, great, shining rivers,
+stupendous mountains, and island-dotted lakes crowned with vast
+buildings constructed in a style of architecture such as these eyes of
+mine have never beheld in England.  Then again I seem to be able to
+recall gorgeous pageants in which I took a prominent part, and at which,
+in the presence of an innumerable people, I assisted in the performance
+of strange rites.  Such scenes come to me most vividly in my dreams at
+night; and there are occasions when those dreams are so realistic that
+when I awake I am puzzled to decide which is the dream and which the
+reality.  And--strangest thing of all--on all these occasions I have
+spoken the language which I spoke with Vilcamapata to-day!  I recognised
+him, or rather his type of countenance, the moment I set eyes upon him,
+for I have beheld many such in my dreams.  And ever since I have been in
+this country I have had the feeling of one who, after a long absence,
+finds himself again among familiar and homelike surroundings.  Those are
+the facts; but I cannot explain them any more than you can explain to me
+why that fire throws out heat."
+
+On the following morning the up-river journey was resumed, much to the
+grief of the villagers, who seemed to have taken a most extraordinary
+liking for the Englishmen, possibly because of some fancy that the
+presence of the white men would bring good luck to the village and its
+inhabitants.  But neither Stukely nor Dick was minded to delay their
+journey, and met the pressing invitation of the Indians to remain with
+them by repeating their explanation that a long journey lay before them,
+and that there were urgent reasons for the utmost haste.  Whereupon the
+headman of the village, through Vilcamapata, petitioned that a party
+might be permitted to accompany the palefaces two days' journey up the
+river, in order that they might transport their friends' boat past
+certain rapids and a cataract which would be met with at that distance
+above the village.  This statement as to the existence of the rapids and
+cataract being confirmed by Vilcamapata, Stukely graciously gave the
+required permission; and when, after an early breakfast, the little
+expedition set out, it consisted not only of the two Englishmen and
+Vilcamapata, but also of twenty Indians in two canoes, who were vastly
+astonished when, a fresh and favourable breeze happening to be blowing,
+they saw the white men step their mast, unfurl their sail, and go
+scudding upstream against the current at a speed which taxed their
+utmost energies to keep pace with.  But the wind died away about noon,
+and then nothing would satisfy the Indians but that they must take the
+boat in tow, which they did, with the result that Dick and Stukely were
+spared a long and hot afternoon's paddling.  Moreover, not content with
+this, when the time came for them to camp for the night, the friendly
+Indians insisted on building a hut for Dick and Phil to pass the night
+in, one half of the party undertaking this task while the other half
+plunged into the woods, to return, some three-quarters of an hour later,
+loaded with fruit and game of various descriptions, the choicest
+portions of which they placed in the white men's hut.
+
+The next day's journey was, in all essential particulars, the
+counterpart of that which preceded it, except that about mid-afternoon
+they arrived at the foot of the rapids, of the existence of which the
+Indians had warned them.  These rapids were very much more formidable
+than those which they had first encountered, the channel being
+considerably narrower and the current consequently far more rapid; also
+the river bed was here full of enormous rocks and boulders, over and
+between which the water rushed and leapt and boiled in a turmoil of fury
+that no boat or canoe could possibly have faced.  Furthermore, the
+rapids were nearly a mile and a half in length, beyond which was about a
+mile of comparatively quiet water, and then came a cataract of over a
+hundred feet in perpendicular height, with another half-mile of rapids
+beyond it, before the river once more widened out sufficiently to be
+navigable.  Had the two adventurers been alone they would certainly have
+been compelled to abandon their boat at this spot; but the Indians made
+light of the difficulty, beginning by building a hut for their white
+friends, as on the day before, on a small open plateau near the foot of
+the rapids, while half a dozen of their number explored the banks on
+either side of the river in search of a practicable road, by means of
+which the boat could be carried up past the rapids and the cataract to
+the navigable water beyond.  This they eventually discovered in time to
+effect the portage before dark.  Then, more fruit having been found, and
+game taken on the way back, a great fire was kindled, and a farewell
+feast was held in honour of their paleface friends, which was wound up
+with some of the most weird and extraordinary singing and dancing that
+the Englishmen had ever heard or seen.
+
+On the following morning the Indians escorted Phil, Dick, and
+Vilcamapata to the spot where, beyond the cataract and the upper rapids,
+their boat, with all its contents intact, rode safely in the placid
+waters of a little bay where the river widened out and navigation was
+once more possible.  Here at last the kind-hearted natives bade a
+reluctant and sorrowful farewell to Dick and Stukely; the bitterness of
+parting being mitigated by a promise on the part of the white men that,
+in the event of their returning by way of the river, they would not fail
+to make a stay of at least a week in their friends' village.
+
+Now, with a long stretch of unobstructed navigation before them, they
+had time to improve their acquaintance with Vilcamapata, who was never
+tired of expressing his gratitude to Dick and Stukely for having saved
+him from a terrible death.  But it soon became apparent that, for some
+inexplicable reason, he regarded Stukely as much the more important
+personage of the two, his devotion to Phil being of such a pronounced
+character that it almost amounted to worship.  This, of course, might
+have been accounted for to some extent by the fact that Stukely was able
+to converse with him in his own tongue, and the rapidity with which Phil
+attained to proficiency in the Peruvian language was a never-ending
+source of wonderment to Dick.  But there was evidently something more
+than this in it, something which he did not offer to explain, and upon
+which Stukely did not care to question him, fearing that, if he did so,
+such an exposure of ignorance on his part might result in a weakening of
+his influence over the Peruvian, while from this influence he hoped to
+obtain certain very important advantages.  A rather remarkable
+circumstance, which gradually revealed itself in the course of Phil's
+conversations with the ex-priest, was that the latter did not seem to be
+in the least surprised that Stukely should be desirous of penetrating
+Peru; on the contrary, he appeared to regard it as quite a matter of
+course; nay, more, it almost appeared as though Stukely's visit had been
+long expected, and was a thing to be rejoiced over.  At least this was
+the impression which Stukely gathered from remarks and expressions
+dropped by Vilcamapata from time to time; and he would greatly have
+liked to have questioned the man upon the subject, and learned precisely
+what he meant by such references; but forbore for the reasons above
+stated.  When at length Stukely cautiously hinted that the object of his
+journey was the acquisition of wealth, the ex-priest, far from
+exhibiting surprise or displeasure, displayed the utmost satisfaction,
+and eagerly assured Phil that he could place him in possession of all
+the wealth that he could possibly desire.  Upon Phil asking where the
+wealth was to come from, the Peruvian replied that when the country fell
+into the hands of the Spaniards an enormous quantity of gold, silver,
+and uncut gems had been concealed in a secret chamber of the temple of
+which he had been a priest; that it was there still; and that he was
+quite prepared to reveal the hiding-place to his English friends,
+feeling assured that they would use it in the manner which had been
+intended when it was first concealed.  This again was a distinctly
+cryptic remark, of which neither of the Englishmen could possibly guess
+the meaning; but Stukely replied that Vilcamapata might rest assured
+that they would employ it wisely and well; and with that answer the
+Peruvian seemed perfectly satisfied.  But when he was asked to describe
+the whereabouts of the temple, he could only very vaguely indicate it as
+being built on an island situated in the midst of a sacred lake; that
+the lake lay at an immense distance to the southward, under the shadow
+of a rather remarkable snow-capped mountain; that the way thither was
+encompassed with dangers from wild animals, hostile Indians, and--worst
+of all--Spaniards; and that, if they were fortunate, they might possibly
+reach the place in about four moons of diligent travel.  Four moons, or
+months, of diligent travel!  It seemed an immense distance; for
+"diligent travel" through the virgin forest--and Vilcamapata gave them
+to understand that a very considerable part of the distance would have
+to be traversed by land--meant something like an average of fifteen
+miles a day; and fifteen miles a day for one hundred and twenty days
+meant a journey of eighteen hundred miles!  But they were not dismayed;
+for by this time they had come to have unlimited confidence in
+themselves.  They were daily becoming more learned in woodcraft, being
+now able to traverse at least three miles of forest in the time that it
+had originally taken them to travel one mile; familiarity had caused
+them to lose completely their original dread of wild animals and noxious
+reptiles and insects; and as for Indians and Spaniards--well, they
+believed they could always circumvent either or both of them; while, so
+far as the length of the journey was concerned, what was four months, if
+there was a fortune to be gained at the end of it?  So with light hearts
+they pressed forward day after day, always following the river, until at
+length they were obliged, first to abandon their boat in consequence of
+the increasing number of rapids and falls, and take to a light canoe
+instead, which they were easily able to transport overland when
+necessary; and finally they reached a point where the river was no
+longer navigable, even for a canoe, and they were obliged to take to the
+forest.
+
+But although they could no longer travel by water they still clung
+closely to the river, as it was their only source of supply of drinking
+water; moreover, it happened to lead pretty nearly in the direction of
+their route.  They were now proceeding up a valley, hemmed in on either
+side by mountains ranging in height from ten thousand to fifteen
+thousand feet, yet so dense was the forest through which they were
+travelling that they seldom caught a glimpse of them, except in one
+particular instance where they frequently sighted a majestic,
+snow-capped peak right ahead of them when they encamped in a clearing
+close to the river.
+
+At length a day came when the noble river, upon the broad bosom of which
+they had journeyed for so many days, dwindled to a tiny brook brawling
+over a rocky bed, across which they could leap, the forest grew thin and
+stunted, degenerated to a few scattered scrub oaks, and finally ceased
+altogether, and they found themselves confronted by a mountain barrier,
+the bare rocks of which were interspersed with patches of grass, upon
+some of which were grazing small flocks of most extraordinary animals,
+such as they had never seen before, but with which Vilcamapata was
+evidently quite familiar.  There were three distinct species of them,
+although they all bore a striking resemblance to each other, being about
+the size of donkeys, but having long necks, heads somewhat like those of
+sheep, and legs and feet resembling those of camels.  Vilcamapata
+informed the Englishmen that these animals were known respectively as
+alpacas, llamas, and vicunas, and that the first were used by his
+countrymen for food, while their wool was woven into garments; the
+second were used as beasts of burden, and the third were valuable
+principally for their hair and hides.
+
+The river was now left behind; but this caused the travellers no
+inconvenience, for the mountains which they were ascending, were most of
+them snow-capped, and tiny rivulets of ice-cold water, formed by the
+melting snow, were frequently met with, so that they were at no loss for
+water wherewith to quench their thirst.  But as they pressed on,
+climbing ever higher and higher, they began to suffer very severely,
+first from cold, and next from mountain sickness, due to the steadily
+increasing rarefaction of the atmosphere.  Vilcamapata, however, had a
+remedy for both evils, for he killed three alpacas and stripped off
+their skins to serve as wraps for himself and his companions, to protect
+them from the cold; while, as soon as the first symptoms of mountain
+sickness declared themselves, he produced from his pouch a quantity of
+leaves of the marvellous coca, and bade the Englishmen chew them, which
+they did; whereupon not only did the sickness disappear, but they felt
+no further need of food, while their strength was restored to them in a
+manner that seemed absolutely miraculous.  It cost them three days of
+arduous labour to cross this mountain range; but the evening of the
+third day found them once more encamped in the tropical forest beside a
+tiny stream that flowed to the southward and eastward, while, on the
+farther side, the valley sloped away into a still deeper depression.
+
+Six days later, having meanwhile traversed about a hundred miles of
+stifling tropical forest, travelling all the while in a due southerly
+direction, and having crossed two important streams running in an
+easterly direction, to say nothing of numberless rivulets, they came to
+the bank of a third stream, also running almost due east; and here
+Vilcamapata announced that it would be necessary to build a canoe, as he
+now proposed to take to the water again.  Upon Stukely pointing out to
+him that this river, like those others that they had recently crossed,
+flowed east, whereas he understood that their own route lay to the
+southward, the Peruvian replied that such was certainly the case; but
+that although the river which they had now reached ran eastward, it
+eventually discharged into another, by travelling up which they would in
+process of time come very near to their destination; and that although
+the distance which they would have to travel by water was very much
+greater than the direct overland route, they would be able to accomplish
+it in a much shorter time, and with considerably more ease and comfort
+to themselves.  With this reply the Englishmen were obliged to be
+content; accordingly while Dick and the Peruvian proceeded to hunt for a
+suitable tree out of which to construct a canoe, within a reasonable
+distance of the river bank, Stukely, taking his bow and arrows, went off
+into the forest in search of game.
+
+There had been a time when he would have hesitated to go very far into
+those depths of green shadow alone, for fear of losing himself; but that
+time was now long past for both the young Englishmen.  They had grown
+quite accustomed to travelling through the pathless forest, to wandering
+hither and thither in it in pursuit of game, and mechanically to note
+while doing so a thousand signs, quite imperceptible to the novice,
+whereby they were enabled to return with certainty to the spot where
+they had temporarily fixed their camp.  Therefore on this occasion, as
+on many others, Stukely, with a word of explanation to his companions,
+plunged unhesitatingly into the labyrinth of tangled undergrowth which
+covered the soil between the boles of the giant trees, instinctively
+taking the direction in which he would be likely soonest to come upon
+the track of game.
+
+Yet he might have been excused had he hesitated to enter such a maze as
+that which reared itself within less than a hundred yards of the spot
+which the party had fixed upon for their temporary camp, for there was
+no semblance of a path through it, and the mode of progress consisted
+simply in entering at the spot where the tangle was thinnest and, still
+following the line of least resistance, in that way make one's devious
+way forward.  Progressing in such a fashion, it would have been quite
+possible, nay more, almost inevitable, that one unaccustomed to such a
+mode of travel should become hopelessly lost within the first five
+minutes; but not so Stukely or Dick; they had learned to preserve their
+bearings by noting the moss growing on the trunks of the trees, the
+direction in which their principal branches pointed, and a hundred other
+apparently trivial signs.  But it was a weird place in which to be
+alone, for, apart from the green twilight produced by the filtration of
+the light through the dense canopy of foliage that shut out all view of
+the sky overhead, the under-brake was so thick that it was seldom
+possible to see more than a yard or two ahead, and it was impossible to
+say what strange or thrilling sight might at any moment meet the gaze.
+Then there was the uncanny silence of the place, the kind of silence
+that caused an involuntary movement on tiptoe and the holding of the
+breath for fear of breaking it, yet which was broken at recent intervals
+by stealthy, unaccountable rustlings, or sudden, violent commotions
+beginning close at hand and gradually dying away in the distance.  These
+strange, sudden, unaccountable sounds, caused in all probability by a
+boa-constrictor, a buck, or some other creature startled into quick
+movement by the scent of a human being, wafted to their nostrils by an
+errant draught of air, were even more startling to the nerves than the
+distant roar of the jaguar, or the call of the bell bird which
+irresistibly suggested the incongruous idea that at no great distance in
+those gloomy forest depths would be found a church!
+
+But Stukely was thoroughly accustomed to these and the various other
+strange sounds that so frequently broke the silence of the forest, and
+if he noted them at all it was merely as a hunter notes sounds that
+guide him toward his game, or warns him of possible dangers.  It was
+not, however, in such a spot as this that he expected to find game, it
+was in the open glades that occur here and there, where for some
+unaccountable reason an acre or so of ground is entirely free from
+trees, or at all events from undergrowth, and where the soil is covered
+with thick, rich grass, upon which the deer love to graze, and which
+they seem capable of scenting for miles.  So he pushed forward, worming
+his way through the tangled brake with an ease and celerity that would
+have seemed absolutely miraculous to him three months earlier, and ever,
+as he went, his glances darted hither and thither, searching for the
+stronger light which should reveal to him the whereabout of one of those
+open glades, or, incidentally, a venomous snake or other noxious
+creature lurking in his path.
+
+At length, when he had been thus engaged for about an hour, and had
+travelled a distance of about two miles, a somewhat stronger light away
+on his right front conveyed to him the welcome intimation that such an
+open glade as he sought was at hand; and ten minutes later he emerged
+from the forest to find himself confronted by a scene of so
+extraordinary a character that he halted abruptly and rubbed his eyes,
+uncertain for the moment whether what he beheld was reality or the
+effect of a disordered imagination.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN.
+
+HOW PHIL ENCOUNTERED A MOST MARVELLOUS ADVENTURE.
+
+The place in which Stukely now found himself was a perfectly open glade
+of about forty acres in extent, carpeted with rich, luscious grass, such
+as the antelope loves to feed upon, without a tree or shrub of any kind
+upon it.  It was not this, however, which excited his astonishment, for
+such glades were by no means uncommon even in the densest parts of the
+South American forest; nor was it that, immediately facing him, on the
+opposite side of the glade, towered a bare, vertical stretch of porphyry
+cliff towering up full three hundred feet into the cloudless blue.  But
+it was the unique spectacle which the face of that cliff afforded that
+excited the Englishman's admiration and astonishment, for it was
+sculptured all over, from base to summit, with boldly executed figures
+of men, women, and animals, which, when his admiration had passed
+sufficiently to enable him to study them in detail, seemed to Stukely to
+tell some sort of a story.  But what the story was he was quite unable
+to puzzle out, for there were hunting episodes depicted, and also scenes
+which seemed to represent some sort of religious ceremonial, while
+others, again, might be interpreted as representing either a human
+sacrifice, or, possibly, the execution of a criminal; for they
+represented a group of men thrusting forward by a long pole another,
+whose hands were bound behind him, toward a great uncouth-looking
+monster that was emerging from a pool and advancing ponderously toward
+the unwilling victim with widely opened, cavernous jaws thickly set with
+most formidable-looking teeth.  The figures were executed in rather high
+relief, and there was a certain quaintness and stiffness of outline in
+their delineation that marked them as the work of an untutored artist,
+yet the action of them was depicted with a spirit and vigour which
+proved that the sculptor, although untutored, was undoubtedly a keen
+student of nature.  Altogether, it was by far the most surprising thing
+of its kind that Stukely had ever seen, and he stood for a long time
+studying the various tableaux, and wondering why in the world anyone
+should have thought it worth while to spend the best part of a lifetime
+in carving in the stubborn rock so elaborate a series of pictures, where
+probably no one but an occasional wandering Indian would ever behold
+them.
+
+Somewhat to Stukely's surprise, there was no game in the glade, yet it
+was the one place of all others where he would have expected to find
+antelope at least.  He looked about him to see whether he could discover
+a cause for the emptiness of the glade, and presently thought he had
+found it in a cave, the opening of which in the face of the opposite
+cliff he had already curiously noted while examining the sculptures.
+Doubtless that was it; a panther or some other evil beast had made its
+home in the cave, and had preyed upon the game that frequented the glade
+until it had all been frightened away.  He decided to go across and
+investigate the place; possibly the panther, or whatever it was, might
+be at home, and, if so, its skin would be very useful, for his clothes
+were becoming much the worse for wear.
+
+So he walked across the glade, and presently noticed, as he drew near
+the mouth of the cave, that the soil round about it was damp, and that a
+small trickle of water was issuing from the opening.  By the time that
+he had advanced a few steps farther he had also noticed that the grass
+immediately about the entrance of the cave was very nearly all worn
+away, as though by the feet of many animals, while the damp soil about
+the opening was trodden into the consistency of thick mud that bore the
+impress of the feet of many animals, among which he recognised those of
+antelope, wild pig, monkeys, and a jaguar or two.  These last confirmed
+his theory as to the reason why the glade presented such an utterly
+forsaken appearance; a pair of jaguars, knowing by instinct that such a
+spot would be largely frequented by various kinds of game, had no doubt
+taken up their quarters in the cave, and had fared sumptuously every day
+until their repeated attacks had driven the game away.
+
+Stringing his bow and drawing an arrow from his quiver, Stukely strode
+forward until he stood in the mouth of the cave, when he halted and
+looked in.  He now saw that it was a very much larger place than he had
+at first imagined it to be; for, looking inward, he was able to follow
+the rough walls for a few yards, as they receded inward, when he lost
+sight of them in the gloom.  Also he became aware of a curious
+charnel-house kind of stench that now and then issued from the cavern.
+It was just the kind of odour that one would expect to meet with in the
+den of a carnivorous beast, and Phil peered keenly into the darkness,
+more than half-expecting to see the shining eyes of a jaguar or puma
+glaring at him when his own eyes had become accustomed to the subdued
+light of the place.  But no such sight greeted him, only, as he stood,
+staring and listening, a sudden faint splash of water reached his ears
+from within the dark depths of the cavern, and a few seconds later, as a
+little stream of water came trickling down the slope from the interior,
+a hot, strong puff of the peculiar effluvium which he had previously
+noticed, smote him and almost turned him sick.
+
+He retreated hastily to the open air--noticing as he did so that the
+momentary trickle of water had ceased to flow; he felt that after
+inhaling that dreadful odour he must get a breath of fresh air; also, if
+he desired to explore the interior of that cavern, he must provide
+himself with a torch.  Accordingly he retraced his steps across the
+glade, re-entered the forest, and proceeded to look about him for a few
+dry branches to serve as torches, some dry moss for tinder, and a couple
+of pieces of wood suitable for rubbing upon each other when it was
+desired to kindle a fire.  These things were soon found, and Stukely was
+returning to the open glade with the perfect silence and caution which
+had now become habitual to him, when, as he parted the last branches of
+the scrub which shut him in, his quick eyes detected something moving
+along the base of the cliff toward the cave.  A single glance sufficed
+to assure him that it was one of the large apes, almost as big as a man,
+which abounded in the forest; and he determined to remain where he was
+for a few moments and watch the creature; if the brute entered the cave,
+as seemed to be his intention, Stukely felt he might safely conclude
+that the jaguars, or whatever they might be, were not at home, and that
+consequently he might himself enter without the observance of quite so
+much precaution as he would otherwise have considered necessary.
+
+As he had anticipated, the ape was evidently bound for the interior of
+the cavern, for upon arriving at the entrance the creature paused for a
+moment, appeared to sniff the air carefully for a second or two, and
+then went boldly in, somewhat to Stukely's surprise, for although when
+he first saw the creature he gathered from its movements that it
+intended to enter the cave, he could not imagine why it should do so;
+for he knew perfectly well by this time that that particular species of
+ape lived in a tree, not in a cave.  Then he recollected the water, and
+immediately came to the conclusion that there must be a spring or pond
+of some sort inside the cave to which the animals of the neighbourhood
+were accustomed to resort in order to quench their thirst.  Yes, of
+course, that would be it, he told himself; and it would account in a
+perfectly natural manner for the many footprints which he had seen in
+the mud at the entrance.  And, if that were the case, of course it would
+not be the den of a panther or other carnivorous animal at all; for
+monkeys, pigs, and antelopes would not frequent a spring in a cave which
+one or more of their most deadly enemies had made their lair.  And yet--
+what about that abominable stench which issued from the cave; how was
+that to be accounted for?  It was a difficult question to answer, and
+Stukely felt that there was but one way of getting at the truth, namely,
+by thoroughly examining the interior of the cavern.  So, forgetting for
+the moment that he was out after game, and was not engaged upon an
+exploring expedition, he passed out through the parted scrub and headed
+straight for the mouth of the cave.
+
+He had traversed about half the width of the glade when the sound of a
+sudden, loud splashing of water reached his ears, immediately followed
+by an outburst of the most appalling shrieks and yells; and a couple of
+seconds later out dashed the ape at a speed of which Stukely would never
+have believed the creature capable, had he not beheld it with his own
+eyes.  The ape cleared the mouth of the cave as though he had been shot
+out of it, and came straight across the glade toward Phil.  For an
+instant the latter thought that the simian had caught sight of him and,
+transported with rage, intended to attack him; so he halted, dropped his
+branches and tinder, and prepared to fit an arrow to his bow to repel
+the attack; but a second glance assured him that he was mistaken, for
+the monkey was not coming directly toward him, but would pass him at a
+distance of about a dozen paces.  Moreover, it was more than likely that
+the creature did not even see him, for Phil could now see that the poor
+brute, as it dashed toward him in great, headlong bounds, with its long,
+hairy arms and hands stretched out before it, its eyes turned back in
+its head, and the most hideous shrieks issuing from its foaming jaws,
+was frantic with terror!  In the drawing of half a dozen breaths the
+terrified beast had come up level with, dashed past him, and plunged
+headlong into the depths of the forest, where its yells at once raised a
+tremendous commotion among the parrots and other birds, to say nothing
+of the monkeys and jaguars that made it their home.
+
+Phil meditatively gathered up the materials wherewith he proposed to
+illumine the interior of the cavern, and slowly resumed his way across
+the glade.  Evidently there was something in the cavern after all,
+otherwise that poor ape would not have dashed out of it so
+precipitately, and in such a ghastly state of terror.  But what could it
+be?  It must be something even more formidable than a jaguar or a puma,
+to have terrified that unhappy monkey to the verge of madness; yet, so
+far as Phil knew, the jaguar was the most dreaded beast to be found in
+the South American forest.  There was but one way of determining the
+point satisfactorily.  So, completely forgetful now of the errand upon
+which he had started out, Stukely at once decided to adopt that way,
+which was, of course, to enter the cavern and see for himself.
+
+Accordingly, having arrived within about thirty feet of the opening in
+the face of the sculptured rock, the young Englishman looked warily
+about him and peered into the interior of the cavern to make sure that
+there was no likelihood of his being attacked unawares; and when at
+length he had satisfied himself on this head, he laid down his bow and
+proceeded to arrange his dry moss so that it would kindle readily; then
+he took his two fire-producing sticks, rubbed them one against the other
+in the most approved manner, and presently had a little flame which he
+deftly communicated to the tinder-like moss.  When this was fairly
+ablaze, he ignited the biggest and thickest branch he had with him, and
+was soon in possession of a brilliantly burning flambeau, holding which
+in one hand, and his bow and arrow in the other, he at once boldly
+plunged into the interior of the cavern, glancing keenly about him as he
+held his torch aloft.
+
+The first thing that Phil noticed was that the fetid, charnel-house
+odour which had before assailed his nostrils was now, for some reason,
+not nearly so strong as when he had previously stood in the entrance of
+the cavern; indeed it was scarcely perceptible.  The next thing to
+attract his attention was the fact that the cavern widened out very
+considerably as it receded into the interior of the rock, and that the
+floor slightly rose as he walked forward.  Then the shimmer of water
+ahead in the light of the torch caught his eye, and when he had
+penetrated about fifty feet he suddenly found himself in a vast rock
+chamber, so large that the light of his torch could scarcely reach its
+farther extremity or its roof.  And there was a peculiarity about this
+rock chamber which consisted in the fact that the whole of its interior,
+from wall to wall, was occupied by a pool of water which brimmed to the
+level of the highest part of the upward sloping entrance passage--nay,
+it did even more, for it occasionally slopped over and went trickling
+away in a tiny stream down the passage into the open, thus moistening
+the soil at the entrance and creating the mud in which Phil had detected
+the spoor of numerous different kinds of animals.  A further
+circumstance which at once arrested Phil's attention and caused him
+again to look sharply about him was that the surface of the pool,
+instead of being glass-smooth, as one would naturally expect water to be
+in a place completely sheltered from the wind, was considerably
+agitated, as though some creature of great bulk had recently been
+swimming in it.  Yet, so far as he could observe, he was himself the
+only living creature in the cavern, and he could see to its farthest
+extremity pretty clearly, now that his eyes had become accustomed to the
+comparatively dim light of the torch.  Moreover, upon carefully
+examining the rocky floor upon which he stood, the only wet footprints
+visible were those of the ape which had recently beaten so precipitate a
+retreat from the cavern, and Phil was quite certain that the creature
+had not been indulging in a swim, for he was prepared to swear that the
+brute's fur was perfectly dry when it dashed past him on its way across
+the glade.  No, so far as the ape was concerned, the signs indicated
+that it had waded into the water far enough to bend down and drink, and
+then had been suddenly and very badly frightened.  Again Phil gazed
+about him, searching the obscurity on the far side of the cave, and now
+he noticed that there was another passage over there, a roughly circular
+hole about five feet in diameter, running still farther into the heart
+of the rock.  He thought he would like to get across and explore that
+hole; but how was he to do so?  Of course he might swim across the
+water; but that idea did not appeal to him, for it meant risking the
+extinguishment of his torch; also he could not very well carry torch,
+bow, and arrows in the one hand while swimming with the other, and he
+was by this time much too wise to go poking about in strange places
+without his weapons.  No, that would certainly not do; rather than be
+guilty of so foolish an act as to discard his weapons he would leave
+that hole on the other side unexplored.  But that alternative, too, was
+distinctly distasteful to the young Englishman, and he once more raised
+his torch and carefully examined the walls of the cavern, to see if he
+could find a way of getting to the other side without being obliged to
+swim across.  And now that he was definitely looking for it he saw that
+there was a something in the nature of a narrow ledge running along the
+left side of the chamber, at a height of about six inches above the
+water's surface, by means of which, and aided by the roughnesses of the
+cavern wall, he believed he could scramble over to the other side.  He
+at once determined to make the attempt, noticing at the same time,
+without attaching any particular significance to the fact, that the
+agitation of the surface of the pond had so far subsided that there was
+now but the merest suggestion of a ripple on it.
+
+When Stukely reached the ledge by means of which he proposed to essay
+the passage to the far side of the cavern he found, to his satisfaction,
+that it was a quite well-defined projection running the entire length of
+the wall, and apparently nowhere less than four inches wide, while there
+were places where it widened out to nearly a foot in breadth, also the
+surface of the wall was so rough that the irregularities would afford
+him excellent grip for one hand.  Therefore returning to its quiver the
+arrow which he had thus far been holding in readiness for a sudden
+emergency, and slinging his bow over his shoulder, so that he might have
+one hand quite free to cling by, the young man set his foot upon the
+ledge and began to make his way cautiously across.
+
+He had accomplished rather more than half the distance across when he
+suddenly felt the water surge up over his feet and ankles, and, upon
+looking down, saw, to his consternation, that it was once more violently
+agitated, the swirling eddies upon its surface plainly indicating the
+presence of some powerful disturbing influence at the bottom of the
+pool.  Then, as Phil continued to gaze, that influence revealed itself
+as a shapeless fawn-coloured something imperfectly seen through the
+disturbed water, and the next moment an enormous head emerged, a pair of
+monstrous jaws gaped widely, and the air of the cavern at once became
+again surcharged with the disgusting effluvium which Phil had once
+before observed.  As Stukely gazed, fascinated, at the terrifying object
+which had thus suddenly appeared he became aware that the creature was
+dazzled and to some extent discomfited by the light of the torch, for
+the lids of its immense goggle eyes blinked incessantly as it returned
+Phil's gaze, taking immediate advantage of which the young man thrust
+his torch toward it as far as he could reach, with the immediate result
+that the great head again sank out of sight.  Only for a few brief
+seconds, however; but the young Englishman availed himself of those few
+seconds to scramble along the remainder of the ledge and reach the point
+for which he was aiming, and which now proved to be a sloping surface of
+rock about twenty feet broad, leading up from the water to the circular
+opening which Stukely had been so anxious to explore.
+
+Now that he was there he was ready to execrate his folly for not having
+retraced his steps along the ledge and made good his escape by way of
+the mouth of the cavern, instead of continuing his journey, as he had
+done; for his ill-judged action had resulted in placing him at the wrong
+end of the cavern, and, to escape, he would be obliged to make his way
+along the whole of that narrow ledge again, with the possibility that
+the monster, recovering from its discomfiture, might snatch him off
+before he had traversed half the distance.  No, Phil felt that with such
+a horrible possibility as that confronting him he simply could not essay
+the return passage along the ledge.
+
+Indeed he was not afforded the opportunity; for he had scarcely reached
+the broad slope of rock leading up to the circular tunnel which he had
+been so anxious to explore, when the surface of the pool again became
+violently agitated, and the monstrous head again appeared, followed this
+time by an enormous body, four thick, clumsy legs, and a tail; and with
+a ponderous rush the creature at once made for the spot where Stukely
+stood.  But Phil, without waiting for further developments,
+incontinently turned tail, and, stooping, bolted up the tunnel-like
+opening, the comforting assurance coming to him that so monstrous a
+beast could not possibly enter so comparatively small a passage.
+Moreover, he was right, for after running a few feet he looked back over
+his shoulder and saw that although the beast had thrust its head, as far
+as its eyes, into the opening, it could advance no farther.  Then,
+summoning all his courage to his aid, he retraced his steps, and,
+plucking an arrow from his quiver, poised it in his hand for a moment--
+he could not use his bow, as it was too long to be drawn in so confined
+a space--and then hurled it with all his strength straight at the
+beast's left eye.  The missile flew true--indeed it could scarcely miss
+at such exceedingly short range--and buried itself half its length in
+the great blinking orb; whereupon, with a bellowing roar that echoed and
+reverberated like thunder in that underground chamber, the monstrous
+head was suddenly withdrawn, and the next moment a sound of tremendous
+splashing told the hardy assailant that his enemy had precipitately
+retreated to the depths of the pool.  Then, acting more by instinct than
+reason, Phil rushed back along the way which he had come, out of the
+tunnel, on to and along the ledge--heedless of the violent disturbance
+of the water which told of the convulsive movements of the enormous
+shape hidden beneath its surface--and so back to the cavern entrance,
+out of which he rushed almost as precipitately as the ape had done half
+an hour earlier.  "No wonder," thought the young man, "that the poor
+beast was frightened, if he happened to catch a glimpse of the monster
+of the pool!"  Some two hours later he turned up at the spot where the
+little party had made their temporary camp beside the river, and
+nonchalantly flung to the ground the carcass of a Guazu-puti deer which
+he had chanced to encounter on his way back.  He found that Dick and
+Vilcamapata had made good use of their time during his absence, for they
+had not only found a splendid tree out of which to fashion a canoe, but
+had actually felled it; and there it lay, within a couple of hundred
+feet of the river, ready to be hewn into shape and hollowed out.
+
+"You've been away a long time," remarked Dick; "gramfer here and I were
+seriously discussing the desirability of starting out to look for you.
+Have you found the game scarce?"
+
+"Game of the kind that I was after, yes; but game of a very different
+sort, no," answered Stukely.  "The fact is, Dick," he continued, "that I
+have had quite an interesting afternoon.  For I have discovered a cliff
+carved all over with pictures that there is nobody to look at, and--why,
+yes, now that I come to think of it, some of those pictures show the
+very beast itself!"
+
+"My dear Phil," remonstrated Dick, "are you talking to yourself or to
+me?  Because, if the latter, let me remind you that I don't in the least
+understand what you are referring to."
+
+"No," laughed Stukely, "of course you don't.  But all in good time,
+friend; hurry no man's cattle.  Thou wilt understand when I explain.
+Know, then, O most matter-of-fact Dick, that I have this day seen a
+sight--or two sights, to be strictly truthful--that will cause thee to
+open thine eyes in amazement.  The first of them is, as I have already
+said, a cliff pictured all over its face with strange and wonderful
+sculptures, which doubtless tell a story if one had but the wit to read
+them; and that reminds me that we ought to take the ancient along with
+us when we go to see them to-morrow; he may be able to interpret their
+meaning to us.  Now, among those pictures there is one depicting--as I
+read it--a man being thrown to a huge and monstrous beast; and inside a
+cave in that same cliff I not only found the beast himself, but narrowly
+escaped being devoured by him.  Fortunately for me, there happened to be
+a hole in the rock big enough for me to enter, but not big enough for
+him; and when he would fain have followed me his head got stuck fast in
+the opening, in which position, he being at my mercy, I drove an arrow
+into his left eye, and escaped while he was endeavouring to free himself
+therefrom.  But we must all go together to-morrow, Dick, and see these
+wonders; for they are worth seeing, I warrant thee."
+
+Dick Chichester, however, was not to be satisfied with any such bald and
+incomplete statement as the foregoing, and accordingly, when they sat
+down, an hour later, to take their last meal for the day, Stukely gave a
+full, true, and particular account of his entire afternoon's adventure;
+and it was agreed, then and there, that the first business of the
+following day should be a visit to the sculptured rocks and the slaying
+of the strange and monstrous beast.
+
+Accordingly, on the following morning, immediately after an early
+breakfast, the trio set out, arriving in due course at the glade which
+lay at the foot of the cliff.  As usual, they approached the open space
+with the utmost precaution, and were thus enabled to secure an antelope,
+one of a small herd that happened to be grazing there at the moment of
+their arrival.  They killed the creature, not because they required it
+for food, but because Phil was of opinion that its carcass might serve
+as a bait for the enticement of the monster out of the pool, thus
+enabling them to get a fair shot at him; and having dragged the dead
+animal to the mouth of the cave, they next proceeded to examine at
+leisure the sculptured face of the rocks, which Vilcamapata at once
+unhesitatingly pronounced to be the work of Amalivaca, the wonderful
+being whom the Indians were looking for from across the Great Water to
+deliver them from the power of the hated Spaniard, and restore to them
+the undisputed possession of their own country.  But he was unable to
+interpret the meaning of the sculptures, beyond stating vaguely that
+they, like many others existing in the country, undoubtedly portrayed
+certain customs and modes of life peculiar to a race who inhabited the
+country long before the Indians came into it.
+
+Then, having at length satisfied their curiosity by gazing their fill at
+the curious scenes set forth in the imperishable porphyry, they entered
+the cavern and inspected the pool, the surface of which was still
+agitated, showing that its tenant was restless, as indeed might be
+expected.  Then, returning to where they had left the carcass of the
+deer, they dragged it far enough into the cavern to enable the monster
+just to reach it by completely emerging from the pool; and then,
+stringing their bows, and satisfying themselves that the priming of
+their pistols was as it should be, calmly sat down to await the issue.
+
+For more than an hour they waited in vain; for beyond an occasional
+stirring of the water, which caused it to overflow momentarily and
+trickle down the slope of the approach, nothing happened.  Then a troop
+of small monkeys suddenly approached the cavern, and, seeing its human
+occupants, bolted, loudly chattering their indignation and fright.
+Shortly afterward a deer came tripping daintily across the glade, halted
+suddenly, threw up its head, and after sniffing the air for a few
+seconds, wheeled smartly round and bounded back into the forest.
+Another hour passed, and they were discussing in low tones the
+advisability of adopting some other plan for the enticement of the great
+beast from his lair, when they heard a sudden rippling and splashing of
+water in the interior of the cave, followed by a low moan and a gust of
+the offensive effluvium which Phil had noticed on the previous day, then
+a still more violent splashing of water, accompanied by a quick rush of
+overflow, a sound of ponderous movements, and then, looming out of the
+darkness, there vaguely appeared an enormous shape coming slowly and
+cautiously toward the carcass of the deer.  In another moment it had
+advanced sufficiently to enable the watchers to observe the shape of its
+monstrous head, and Phil saw that in some way the creature had managed
+to free itself of the arrow which he had implanted in its left eye on
+the preceding day; but the brute had doubtless lost the use of that eye,
+for it could now be seen that it was closed, and that a small trickle of
+blood was flowing from between the lids.  As it slowly advanced, the
+beast moaned frequently, while the disgusting odour which it exhaled
+momentarily became stronger.
+
+It had been agreed that if the beast could be enticed out of the water,
+all three of the hunters should, at a given signal, discharge an arrow
+at its right eye, and the trio were now standing, with bows fully bent,
+awaiting the signal.  Another moment, and the brute slightly raised its
+head and halted, as though suspicious of danger.  The slight raising of
+the head was just what was required to enable a perfect aim to be taken,
+and Phil at once gave the word "Shoot!"
+
+The loud and practically simultaneous twanging of the three bows was
+instantly followed by a hideous roar, and in another moment the great
+beast, bellowing horribly, came charging right out of the cave, all but
+crushing to death his adventurous enemies as he did so, for the three
+had only just time to dodge behind a projection of the rock when the
+monster rushed past them at a lumbering trot, to stumble and roll over,
+just as it reached the open.  For a moment the trio thought that in some
+unaccountable manner they must have missed their aim, for as the
+creature passed them they were unable to see any portion of the shafts
+of their arrows protruding from its remaining eye.  But it, too, was now
+closed, and they presently concluded that, with the momentum imparted to
+them by their exceedingly powerful bows, the arrows must have completely
+buried themselves in the monster's eyeball.  At all events it was
+perfectly evident that the missiles had got home somewhere, for the huge
+creature was now rolling and bellowing in agony, as it clawed
+frantically at its eyes with its immense feet.  It was a distressing
+sight to see such an enormous animal suffering so intensely, so
+presently Phil and Dick ran out, put fresh arrows to their bows, and
+stood at a distance of about a dozen paces from the beast, watching for
+an opportunity to plant an arrow in its heart.  It came after a while,
+the beast subsiding at last into quiescence, as though exhausted; and
+upon the instant Dick and Phil drew their bows to their fullest possible
+extent, the arrows flew straight to their mark, and, with a tremendous
+convulsive shudder and a last moaning bellow, the enormous brute
+stretched itself out on the grass dead.
+
+Then they proceeded to examine the creature at their leisure, but at a
+respectful distance, for the odour which it exhaled was so overpowering
+that they found it impossible to approach the carcass nearer than within
+three or four yards.  The head was somewhat like that of an alligator,
+but immensely larger, and its enormous jaws, slightly open, disclosed
+two rows of huge teeth similar to those of an alligator.  This monstrous
+head was joined to the body by a neck as long, proportionately, as that
+of a horse; the body was lizard-like in shape, but humpbacked; it had
+four very thick, lizard-like legs and feet, each terminating in four
+long toes armed with formidable claws.  Its tail was nearly as long as
+its body, thick, deep, and blunt; and a sort of serrated fin ran the
+whole length of its body from the nape of its neck to the extremity of
+its tail.  Its total length, from snout to tail, as it lay stretched out
+on the grass, was just a trifle over twenty-two paces!
+
+When they had at length satisfied their curiosity by exhaustively
+examining the enormous carcass--which, they agreed, must be that of the
+identical beast portrayed in the carved pictures on the cliff face, or
+of one precisely similar--they procured torches, and, having lighted
+them, proceeded to examine thoroughly the interior of the cavern.  In
+the outer chamber, or that which contained the pool--the surface of
+which was now perfectly placid and mirrorlike--there was nothing to see
+beyond what has already been described.  After a brief glance round,
+therefore, they passed over to its far side by means of the rock ledge
+along the margin of the pool, and entered the tunnel-like passage in
+which Phil had taken temporary refuge on the previous day.  This proved
+to be about one hundred feet long, and gave access to another chamber of
+such immense dimensions that, standing just within it, and holding their
+three torches high above their heads, they were unable to see the
+opposite wall or the roof.  But it was a wonderful cavern, and worth
+travelling a long distance to see; for upon examination they discovered
+that its walls, as high up as the light of the torches would enable them
+to see, were most elaborately sculptured in high relief with figures of
+men, women, animals, trees, representations of spacious landscapes with
+buildings, and even the sea, with either the rising or the setting sun
+partially obscured by clouds.  And the remarkable thing about these
+sculptures was that they were very much more finely and artistically
+executed than those outside; the representation was much more true to
+nature; the details of clothing were rendered with the most minute
+elaboration and exactitude; and there was also evidence of a knowledge
+and understanding of perspective.  For the first quarter of an hour or
+so of their inspection they were unable to obtain any clue to the
+purpose to which this enormous chamber had originally been put, or the
+reason which could induce a person--or, rather, a number of persons, for
+no single individual could possibly have produced the whole of that
+work, even if he had devoted an entire lifetime to it--to spend time in
+laboriously executing such work in a situation where it would seem that
+it could be seldom or never seen.  But by and by, when the explorers
+arrived at the far end of the chamber, they saw that it was neither more
+nor less than an immense temple; for there, in the very centre of the
+wall, was a most beautifully and elaborately sculptured niche, within
+which was enshrined a lifesize figure, in black marble, of a man, in the
+carving of which the unknown sculptor seemed to have reached the very
+summit of perfection of his art.  For with the most scrupulous and
+precise fidelity he had succeeded in reproducing every minutest detail,
+the texture and wrinkles of the skin, the finger and toe nails, the
+course of the veins, and even the curls in the long hair, bushy beard,
+and drooping moustache.  The figure had originally been executed nude;
+but, whether from considerations of modesty, or for the glorification of
+the idol, it had afterwards been clothed in a most elaborate costume
+consisting of a tunic, confined to the waist by a belt, a cloak, and
+sandals.  The tunic was made of a kind of fine canvas that crumbled away
+when touched; the mantle was of feathers of the most gorgeous hues; and
+the sandals were of some delicate kind of leather dressed with the hair
+on; and they, as well as the tunic and belt, were encrusted with minute
+scales of dull, ruddy yellow metal, which proved to be virgin gold.
+These scales were not only sewn on to the material, but were also sewn
+to each other; and it was due to this latter fact, no doubt, that the
+garment had not powdered away long ago.  The eyes of the idol consisted
+of two large green polished stones which looked so much like emeralds--
+which indeed they were--that, Vilcamapata offering no objection, the two
+young Englishmen determined to appropriate them, as well as the gold
+scales; with the result that they left the figure denuded of all its
+finery, and, from an artistic point of view at least, far more worthy of
+admiration than it was before.
+
+They spent quite two hours in this wonderful cavern, and when at length
+they emerged into daylight once more they found that already a whole
+army of vultures had gathered about the carcass of the strange monstrous
+beast, and were busily engaged in devouring the malodorous flesh.  The
+trio made a wide circuit so as not to disturb the obscene birds at their
+disgusting banquet, and in due time found their way back again to their
+camp, where, after a hearty meal, they set to work in earnest upon the
+construction of their canoe.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE.
+
+HOW THE TWO ADVENTURERS LOST THEIR COMPANION.
+
+To hew and hollow a canoe out of a solid tree trunk is a sufficiently
+formidable task for two men to undertake when they possess no more
+suitable tools than their hangers--the hanger being a weapon very
+similar to the more modern cutlass; and although the two Englishmen had
+already done a similar piece of work once before, and were therefore not
+altogether lacking in experience; and although Vilcamapata taught them
+how to hollow out the hull expeditiously, after it was properly shaped,
+by the use of fire, it cost Phil and Dick very nearly a month's
+strenuous labour to get their new craft to their liking.  But when she
+was finished she was a very good canoe, indeed, much more shapely than
+those made by the Indians, and her hull was so thin that, although she
+measured about eighteen feet long over all by four feet beam, she was
+light enough to be carried easily a distance of two or three miles, if
+need be, by the two Englishmen, Vilcamapata being too old and feeble to
+be capable of lending assistance in work of that sort.
+
+But at length the work was finished, the craft was taken down to the
+river, put in the water, and found to float true, and as buoyantly as an
+egg-shell.  The trio therefore put their few belongings into her, not
+forgetting the two fine emeralds and the gold scales taken from the
+idol, embarked, and resumed their journey.
+
+They were now on the headwaters of a river which had its rise somewhere
+on the eastern slope of the Andes; and the water was icy cold, being in
+fact nothing but the drainings from an enormous glacier which could be
+seen, some forty miles away, clinging to the side of a majestic peak
+that towered nearly twenty thousand feet into the deep blue of the
+tropic sky.  But that was a blessing rather than otherwise, for although
+they were not yet down among the plains the weather was intensely hot--
+they being now immediately under the equator--and the coldness of the
+water helped somewhat to mitigate the stifling heat between the two
+great walls of forest which bordered the river on either hand.
+
+No sail was needed, for they were now travelling with the stream, which,
+being as yet little more than a mountain torrent, ran rapidly, so that a
+paddle over the stern to keep the craft in midstream was all that was
+necessary.  But although the stream ran at the rate of fully six miles
+an hour their progress was not by any means as speedy as one might at
+first suppose, for rapids occurred at frequent intervals, and if these
+were found to be impassable it became necessary to carry the canoe past
+them through the forest.  This plan, however, was only resorted to in
+extreme cases, for if, upon examination, it was deemed at all possible
+to shoot the rapids, they were shot; and as this sometimes happened as
+often as three or four times a day, the adventurers soon acquired a
+degree of dexterity in the art that they would have regarded as
+perfectly amazing at the beginning of their journey.
+
+On the evening of the fifth day of their journey down the river they
+chanced to camp at a spot which afforded them an exceptionally fine view
+of the mountain range to the westward; and when on the following morning
+they rose to prepare for the day's journey they saw that a terrific
+thunderstorm was raging about halfway up the eastern slope of the range.
+It was a magnificent sight, the clouds, black as night below, but
+brilliantly illuminated by the sun above, clinging to the mountain spurs
+in enormous masses which rolled together, parted, and rolled together
+again like charging squadrons, while the lightning, keen and vivid as
+molten steel, incessantly darted from their black breasts like the
+flashes of a platoon of musketry.  And while this elemental warfare was
+raging furiously up there among the mountains it was brilliant weather
+where the wanderers were camped, with not a breath of wind to assuage
+the torrid heat.  Stukely happened to make some remark upon the contrast
+to Vilcamapata, to which the old man replied:
+
+"Yes, it is well for us that we are here rather than there; for such a
+storm might well mean death for us all.  But we must be watchful to-day,
+lord, for that storm covers many miles of country, and the rain is
+falling in torrents; and, unless I am greatly mistaken, most of it will
+find its way into this river.  Therefore must we be on our guard against
+a sudden spate, which may overwhelm us if we are caught unawares."
+
+The Englishmen agreed, and nothing further was said about the matter,
+for they were busy making their preparations for the day; and in due
+time they embarked and proceeded on their journey.  About midday, in
+confirmation of the old Peruvian's words, the first of the expected
+spate revealed itself in a sudden acceleration of the current and a
+change in the appearance of the water, which became turbid with mud in
+suspension.  Yet although the speed of the current continued to increase
+gradually, it merely helped the voyagers on their way, for they now
+seemed to have reached a stretch of the river that was entirely free
+from rapids, nothing of the kind having been encountered since their
+start in the early morning.  Swiftly the canoe sped down the river,
+running now at the rate of a good nine miles an hour, and her occupants
+rejoiced exceedingly, for they were getting over as much ground in a
+single hour as sometimes cost them a whole day to cover.  They began to
+make light of the precautions which they had observed during the earlier
+hours of the day, and told each other with glee that if this was the
+worst a spate could do they would welcome one every day so long as they
+were bound downstream.
+
+Indeed it was speedy travelling compared with what they had been
+accustomed to; it was like journeying by postchaise after travelling in
+a market wagon.  The country swept past them at a speed that almost made
+them giddy as they watched it, while the motion of the canoe was smooth
+and easy as that of a cradle.  Then, as they whirled round a bend they
+suddenly, and without warning, found themselves sweeping through a gorge
+with vertical, rocky, fern-grown banks on either hand.  Too well they
+knew what that sort of thing was the prelude to.  There were rapids
+ahead, almost to a dead certainty, and they had missed their chance of
+inspecting before attempting to shoot them, for there was no landing on
+either of those vertical banks; while as for returning to a point where
+landing was possible, they might as well have attempted to fly!  Well,
+there was but one thing for it; if there were indeed rapids ahead they
+must do their best to shoot them without the usual preliminary
+inspection; they were growing quite accustomed to that kind of work now,
+and it ought not to be so very difficult.
+
+Accordingly Dick placed himself in the bow of the canoe and Phil
+stationed himself amidships, each armed with the long pole which they
+used to bear the canoe off the rocks when shooting rapids, while the
+Peruvian perched himself up in the stern with the short steering paddle
+in his hand.  Presently the expected rapids swung into view ahead, and a
+sufficiently formidable sight they presented.  It was difficult, nay
+impossible, to tell how far they extended, for a bend of the river shut
+out the view; but there was at least half a mile of them in plain sight,
+a narrow channel of foaming, leaping water, with the black head of a
+rock showing occasionally here and there amid the foam.  Dick drew his
+feet up under him and raised himself to his full height in the crank
+cockleshell of a canoe, in order that he might obtain as extended a view
+as possible of what lay before him: he was admittedly far the more
+expert canoeist of the two, especially when it came to shooting rapids,
+therefore on such occasions his post was always in the bow, which then
+becomes the post of honour--and of responsibility.
+
+What he saw was by no means reassuring; there was far too much spouting
+and foaming water for his taste, for such appearances invariably
+indicated rocks submerged to the extent of a few inches at the utmost,
+contact with any of which meant at least the destruction of the canoe,
+if no worse mishap.  True, in almost every stretch of rapids there
+exists what may be termed by courtesy a channel, that is to say, there
+is a passage, more or less tortuous, between the rocks where the water
+is deep enough to float a canoe if one can but hit it off in time.  This
+channel or passage is usually distinguishable by the comparative
+smoothness of the water in it; so that if the navigator can guide his
+canoe fairly into it by the time that the rapids are actually reached,
+he stands a very fair chance of accomplishing the run in safety,
+although even then he must be continually on the alert, since the turns
+are often so sharp that, unless taken at precisely the right moment, the
+canoe may be dashed with destructive violence against an obstructing
+rock; and it was the part of the bowman, or pilot, to look out for such
+rocks and bear the canoe off them with the long pole which he invariably
+wielded.
+
+At length Dick believed he saw the beginning of such a channel, close
+under the right bank of the river, and waved Vilcamapata to steer the
+canoe toward it.  Half a minute more, and the little craft had darted in
+between two formidable walls of leaping water and was speeding downward
+at a speed of fully fifteen miles an hour, with Dick and Phil standing
+upright and thrusting their long poles first to one side and then the
+other as Chichester's experienced eye detected the signs which mark the
+presence of dangerous rocks to right or left, and signalled accordingly.
+To cry out was utterly useless, the roar and hiss of the tortured
+waters was far too loud to render even the voice of a Stentor audible,
+and those behind the pilot could but watch his motions, and act
+accordingly.
+
+Two minutes of strenuous labour brought them to the bend in the river,
+and this, Dick knew, would be one of the most critical points in the
+whole run; for it is difficult enough to follow the turns of the
+channel, even when the course of the river is straight, but when the
+river as well as the channel bends it is difficult indeed to avoid
+disaster.  Still, Dick remained perfectly cool and self-possessed; the
+certainty and success with which he had piloted the canoe through that
+unknown half-mile of chaotic leaping and rushing water had given him
+more confidence in himself than all the rest of his experience put
+together, and he felt that unless something quite unexpected and out of
+the common happened, there was no reason why they should not accomplish
+the remainder of the run in safety.  He held up his hand as a warning to
+those behind him to be extra vigilant, for they were at what was
+probably the most dangerous point of the run, and the next instant waved
+to the Peruvian to swerve the canoe powerfully to the left.  The Indian
+obeyed, to the best of his ability; but he was old, his strength was
+nothing like what it had been, and the little craft did not swerve quite
+smartly enough to carry her clear of a rock that lay in her course.
+Therefore out shot Dick's long pole, and the moment that he felt the jar
+of it upon the rock he threw his whole weight upon it in the attempt to
+save the canoe.  The shock was tremendous, the canoe was turned
+violently broadside-on to the current, and at that critical moment
+Dick's pole snapped clean in two, the recoil sending the youngster
+headlong into the boiling current, while the next moment the canoe swept
+up against the submerged rock, was rolled over and over, and her
+remaining occupants were flung into the swirl.
+
+The moment that Dick felt the pole snap in his hand he knew that a
+capsize was inevitable, and, with the instinct which belongs to the
+accomplished swimmer, he at once made up his mind what would be the best
+thing for him to do.  If he could manage to get into the centre of the
+main current he could probably retain his position there, and so swim
+the remainder of the distance to the lower end of the rapids in safety,
+provided that he could avoid the rocks.  There was no use in looking out
+for the others; they were as well able to take care of themselves as he
+was; besides, they would each stand a better chance apart than together
+in that mad turmoil.  As for the canoe, she must take her chance;
+probably she would be smashed to splinters; but if so, it would only
+mean the making of another one.  True, it would involve a month's delay,
+but time of late had seemed to lose its value for them all; they were
+bound for a definite goal, which they would assuredly reach sooner or
+later, and the loss of a month or two seemed a mere trifle not worth
+consideration.  Accordingly, the moment that Dick rose to the surface he
+shook the foam and spray from his eyes, glanced round him, verified his
+position, and at once struck out powerfully for the comparatively smooth
+water that indicated the main current, noting, as he did so, that Phil
+and the Peruvian were both swimming strongly, and that the canoe, full
+of water, was slowly rolling over and over as she drove along through
+the worst of the broken water.  Five minutes of desperate struggle,
+during which he had no time to think of anything but his own safety, and
+during which he had several very narrow escapes of being dashed
+violently against rocks and sustaining serious injuries, if not being
+killed outright, and he suddenly found himself in smooth water, with the
+canoe swinging hither and thither in the eddies, close beside him.  To
+swim to her and proceed to push her before him toward the nearest bank
+was an instinctive act with Dick; and he presently had the satisfaction
+of grounding her on a small strip of shingly beach where there was a
+slight back eddy.  Then he looked about for the other two, and presently
+caught sight of Phil, a little lower down, swimming slowly and
+supporting Vilcamapata's apparently senseless form.  Phil looked as
+though he were rather in difficulties, so Dick at once plunged in again
+and swam to his assistance, and ten minutes later all three of them were
+ashore again, about a mile lower down the river than the spot where the
+canoe had been beached.
+
+"I'm afraid gramfer, here, is rather badly hurt," gasped Phil, as he and
+Dick lifted the insensible form of the Peruvian to the top of the low
+bank.  "Evidently he has been dashed against a rock and stunned, if not
+worse," he continued, pointing to a very ugly jagged wound in the right
+temple, from which the blood was welling pretty freely.  "I noticed, as
+I drove past, that you had saved the canoe.  Do you think you could
+manage to go back and fetch her down, Dick?  My case of medicaments is
+in her--if the thwart to which it was lashed has not gone adrift--and I
+should be very glad to have it just now.  Dost thou mind; or art too
+tired?"
+
+"Not a bit of it," answered Dick.  "Of course I'll go, with pleasure.
+And you will be glad to hear that, so far at least as I could see, the
+craft is not damaged at all.  But of course her paddles are lost, except
+the one that gramfer, there, has stuck to so tenaciously, so I must
+borrow it from him."  And he stooped down and, with some difficulty,
+loosened the grip of the unconscious man's hand on the steering paddle,
+which he had, no doubt unconsciously, retained in his grip ever since
+the capsize.  "I'll be back as quickly as possible," concluded Dick, as
+he struck off into the bush that, just there, bordered the river.
+
+He returned again in about half an hour, with the canoe intact, nothing
+having been lost but the paddles, which were the only articles that
+happened to have been loose in her when she capsized.  With quick
+fingers he cast loose the small medicine case which Phil had taken
+ashore with him on the occasion of the ill-fated landing at Cartagena,
+and which he had carried about with him ever since, carefully enwrapped,
+like their powder horns, in portions of their shirts liberally smeared
+with caoutchouc juice to exclude all moisture.  Poor old Vilcamapata was
+still insensible when Dick returned, and Phil was looking exceedingly
+anxious about him; but the production of the medicine case soon altered
+matters; and a few minutes later the old man was sitting up and looking
+about him dazedly.  At first he seemed not to recognise Phil or Dick, or
+to be able to remember what had happened; but gradually it all came back
+to him; and when Phil asked him how he felt he replied that he was
+fatigued and desired to sleep.  Accordingly, the young medico bathed the
+wound with water from the river, applied some healing ointment to it,
+bound it up with what remained of their shirts; then they made up a
+temporary couch for the sufferer under the shadow of a bush, and left
+him to sleep as long as he would, while Dick went off in search of game,
+and Phil proceeded to carve a pair of new paddles and to cut a couple of
+new poles.
+
+When Dick returned from his hunting expedition, some two hours later,
+with a small deer and a brace of guinea fowl, he found that Vilcamapata
+was still asleep, while Phil was putting the finishing touches to the
+new paddles.  The Peruvian, it appeared, had scarcely moved since he
+fell asleep; and there was some peculiarity in the manner of his
+breathing which was causing Stukely a good deal of anxiety.
+
+"I am rather afraid," explained Phil, "that the poor old man has
+sustained some internal injury, in addition to the wound on his head;
+and, if so, we may have trouble with him.  But we will let him sleep as
+long as he will; for sleep is a great restorer; and the breathing
+difficulty may disappear when he awakes and sits up.  But when he does,
+I will subject him to a very careful examination.  It was most
+unfortunate that your pole broke, Dick; but for that I believe we should
+have shot the rapids in perfect safety."
+
+While Phil completed the paddles, Dick set to work to light a fire,
+break up the deer, and prepare the guinea fowl for cooking; and still
+the injured man slept on, his breathing ever growing more laboured and
+stertorous, until at length the difficulty with which he drew his breath
+awakened him and, with a groan, he strove to raise himself.  In an
+instant Stukely was by his side and, slipping an arm beneath his
+shoulders, he raised the old man to a sitting position, with his back
+supported by the stiff branches of the bush under the shadow of which he
+had been sleeping.  And while he was making the poor old fellow as
+comfortable as he could he enquired solicitously how he felt; but
+Vilcamapata only looked at him blankly, and murmured a few words in a
+tongue that was quite unintelligible to his listener.  Then, with gentle
+touch, Phil began to pass his hand cautiously over his patient's body,
+searching for possible fractured ribs or some similar injury; but the
+old man waved him impatiently away, and presently broke forth in a low,
+crooning sort of chant.
+
+"My days are done," he murmured; "my wanderings are at an end; my Father
+the Sun and my Mother the Moon call me, and I must depart for those
+Islands of the Blessed that our Father sometimes deigns to show us
+floating afar in the serene skies of eventide.  My spirit is weary and
+longs for rest.  Full forty years have I been an outcast and a wanderer
+in the land that once belonged to my people; and during those years no
+friendly face have I ever beheld, no friendly voice has ever reached
+mine ear until the day when the two white men saved me from the fire of
+the Pegwi Indians.  And to me have they been since then as sons; nay,
+more than sons, for there was a time when I dreamed that he whom the
+fair young giant calls Phil might be our Father Manco Capac returned to
+earth to deliver his people from the thraldom of the Spaniard.  But
+to-day have mine eyes been opened, and I know of a surety that Manco
+will never return to earth to deliver his people, whose doom it is to
+disappear gradually from off the face of the earth, and be known no
+more.  Therefore, listen unto me, O ye who have been as sons to me in
+the days of my loneliness and old age: Ye crave for gold, and the stones
+that gleam in the light white and bright as stars, green as the young
+grass that springs to life after the rains of winter, and red as the
+heart's blood of a warrior; and in my blindness I dreamed that ye sought
+them as the means whereby ye might obtain the power to drive out the
+Spaniard from the fair land of the Incas and restore it to those from
+whom it was wrongfully taken.  And in the days of our great calamity
+there arose one who prophesied that in the latter days our Father Manco
+should return to earth and do this thing; therefore was a great treasure
+of gold and stones secretly gathered together from mines known only to
+our own people, and securely hidden from the Spaniard, in order that
+when Manco came he might have an abundance of wealth wherewith to buy
+arms and food and clothing for his armies.  But to-day I know that the
+prophet who foretold this thing was a false prophet, and that the hidden
+treasure will never be needed for the accomplishment of the purpose for
+which it was gathered; also I am the last of those who knew the secret
+of the hiding-place, and if I pass away, taking the secret with me, the
+treasure will be lost, wasted, useless, remaining for ever undiscovered.
+
+"Therefore hearken now unto me, O ye who have been to me as sons in
+these the last days of mine old age.  When my spirit leaves this
+withered shell, as it is about to do, ye shall build a funeral pyre, lay
+my body thereon, and put fire thereto; for by fire are all things
+purified, and on the wings of the flames shall my spirit mount and soar
+away to those Happy Isles where is neither sin, nor sorrow, nor
+suffering, nor any other evil thing.  This shall ye do to-night.  And
+with the rising of to-morrow's sun ye shall resume your journey down the
+river, and so continue for, it may be, twelve days, until this river
+flows into a much mightier one.  Then ye shall journey up that mightier
+stream--which flows to the south and west--and, turning neither to the
+right hand nor to the left, shall follow it to its source beyond Cuzco,
+until ye sight Sorata's mighty snow-clad crest.  And there, under
+Sorata's morning shadow shall ye find the Sacred Lake.  There are
+islands in that lake: that which lies in the centre of the lake is the
+island which ye must seek, for on it stands the ruined temple of the
+Sun, beneath the great marble floor of which lies--lies--the--Yea, great
+Lord and Father, I come!"
+
+And, sinking back among the branches of the bush which supported him,
+Vilcamapata, the one-time priest of the Sun, closed his eyes as a
+torrent of blood gushed from his mouth, and quietly passed away.
+
+"Internal haemorrhage!" exclaimed Stukely, as he lightly laid his
+fingers upon the pulseless wrist.  "I feared it.  Yes"--as he passed his
+hand over the body--"three of his ribs are broken, and the jagged ends
+have doubtless lacerated some internal organ--the lung, perhaps.  Well,
+he is dead, beyond all question; and now, all that remains for us to do,
+Dick, is to dispose of his body in accordance with his instructions.
+But I do not altogether like the idea of building his pyre just here.
+We must see if we cannot find a suitable spot about a quarter of a mile
+away."
+
+"I know a perfectly suitable spot about that distance from here,"
+answered Dick; "I passed through it on my way back to camp, about an
+hour ago.  Come, I will show it to you; there is plenty of dry wood
+there, and there is a path by which we can easily carry the body to it.
+Better make a litter, perhaps, and take it with us now."
+
+Stukely eagerly concurred in this view, and they at once proceeded to
+construct a litter of boughs bound together with lianas, upon which,
+when it was finished, they laid the attenuated form of the old man, and,
+with measured steps and slow, bore him to the spot where his mortal
+frame was to undergo its typical purging by fire.  The place was one of
+those perfectly open clearings which are so frequently met with in the
+South American forest; it was about ten acres in extent, roughly
+circular in shape, and was carpeted with thick grass which the deer and
+other grazing animals kept close cropped; consequently it was well
+adapted for the purpose to which it was about to be put, since by
+erecting the pyre in the centre of the clearing there would be no risk
+of setting the adjoining forest ablaze.
+
+Laying the litter and its burden down in a convenient position just
+within the clearing, the two Englishmen plunged back into the forest,
+and, using their hangers as axes, vigorously proceeded to hew down all
+the dry, dead branches and underwood they could find; for the afternoon
+was waning apace and it was essential that the flames should be kindled
+in time to allow of their returning to their camping place by daylight.
+Fortunately there was no lack of suitable material close at hand; and an
+hour's arduous work sufficed to provide a sufficiency for their purpose.
+Then they proceeded to build the pyre, laying the smallest branches at
+the bottom, intermingled with plenty of dry brushwood, and putting the
+thickest branches on the top.  Then, on the top of all, they placed the
+body; and Phil next proceeded to make fire in the usual way by rubbing
+two sticks together.  This was soon done, the fire was inserted into the
+heart of the pyre by means of an aperture left for the purpose, and
+then, when the whole was fairly alight, Phil and Dick bared their heads,
+fell upon their knees, and with the simple faith which so strongly
+characterised the religious feeling of the time, humbly commended the
+soul of Vilcamapata to the mercy of God who gave it.  By the time that
+they had finished their petitions the pile was a mass of flame which
+roared and crackled fiercely as it shot straight upward in the still
+evening air; and, with a last parting glance at the body, which could be
+seen shrivelling in the midst of the flames, they turned and silently
+wended their way back to their camping place.  And thus passed
+Vilcamapata, the last of the ancient Peruvian priests of the Sun, with
+two men only, and they of alien blood and alien religion, to perform the
+last sacred rites for him.
+
+On the following morning, having breakfasted and completed their
+preparations for immediate departure, the two young Englishmen, feeling
+strangely lonely, walked over to the spot where the funeral pyre had
+been built, and inspected what remained of it.  They found that it had
+been completely consumed, to the very last twig; and upon searching
+among the white ashes they found a calcined skull and a few fragments of
+the larger bones.  These they gathered carefully together and reverently
+buried; after which, having now done all that was possible to preserve
+the remains of their late friend from desecration, they returned to the
+camp, embarked in their canoe, and resumed their voyage down the river.
+
+The following fortnight proved quite uneventful for our two adventurers;
+they journeyed on down the river at an average rate of about twenty
+miles a day, and from time to time encountered rapids or cataracts, or
+both together, shooting most of the former, and, of course, being
+compelled to carry the canoe down past the latter; but they had by this
+time become so thoroughly accustomed to the negotiation of rapids and
+waterfalls that they had long since ceased to regard the passage of one
+or the other as an adventure.  True, they saw a few Indians
+occasionally; but these generally beat a hasty retreat when the white
+men appeared, and remained concealed until the canoe and its two
+occupants, now garbed like savages in the skins of beasts, had
+disappeared round the next bend in the river.
+
+As foretold by Vilcamapata, they reached the "much mightier river"--the
+Maranon--on the afternoon of the twelfth day, and there their pleasant
+journeying with the current ceased; henceforward the current would again
+be their enemy, instead of their friend as it had been of late, and
+every inch of progress would have to be won either with the assistance
+of the sail or by arduous toil with the paddle.  Luckily for them, they
+had had the prescience to bring the sail along with them when they found
+themselves obliged to abandon the boat, and now they reaped the full
+reward of their labours, and were glad that they had resisted the
+often-repeated temptation to leave it behind when they encountered some
+exceptionally difficult bit of road.
+
+Thanks to the help afforded by a strong breeze from the north-east, the
+end of their second day's journeying on the Maranon found them some
+seventy miles above the spot where they had struck the river, and in the
+territory--had they but known it--of the fierce and warlike Mayubuna
+Indians.  They had seen several parties of these during the latter part
+of the day, and, contrary to the usual custom of the Indians which they
+had thus far met with, instead of running away at the first sight of the
+canoe, the Mayubunas had stood on the river bank and watched their
+progress, manifesting no fear of the whites, but, on the other hand,
+displaying no outward signs of hostility, unless, indeed, the fact that
+about an hour before sunset a large canoe had been manned at the last
+village which the white men had passed, and had proceeded rapidly up the
+river ahead of them, might be so construed.  Unfortunately for them,
+they did not so construe it, but regarded it rather as a sporting
+attempt on the part of a number of Indians, bound up the river, to
+display the superiority of the paddle over the sail, and were amused
+accordingly.
+
+But when, upon rounding the next bend of the river, the two Englishmen
+sighted two large canoes, full of Indians, ahead of them, one canoe
+paddling along close in with the left bank, while the other as closely
+hugged the right, they began for the first time to suspect that all was
+not quite as it should be, and Phil--who was sitting idly amidships,
+while Dick sailed the canoe--rose to his feet and hailed them in the
+Indian dialect, which he had picked up from Vilcamapata.  No notice,
+however, was taken of the hail, but it was observed that the sailing
+canoe was now gaining distinctly upon the others.
+
+Encouraged by this evidence of superior speed, the white men pressed on,
+anxious to get into communication and establish friendly relations with
+the Indians before nightfall; and it was not until the two canoes ahead
+suddenly swerved outward and laid themselves athwart the hawse of the
+sailing canoe, as though to bar her further progress, that either of the
+occupants of the latter thought of looking astern.  Then they realised
+that matters were indeed beginning to look serious, for behind them were
+no less than four large canoes, each containing twenty-one men, which
+had evidently emerged from a small creek about half a mile lower down,
+and were now drawing near with unmistakably hostile intentions.
+
+"This looks awkward, Dick," exclaimed Stukely, seizing his bow and
+arrows.  "Surely they cannot seriously intend to try to stop us?"
+
+"If they don't, why are they laying their canoes across our hawse like
+thicky?" demanded Dick.  "Hadn't you better speak to them a bit, Phil?"
+
+"Ay, I'll try," answered Stukely.  And, stepping into the bows of the
+canoe, he ostentatiously laid down his weapons and made the usual signs
+of amity.  The reply was a yell of anger and hatred from the Indians,
+who were blocking the way, while one of them, springing to his feet,
+shouted:
+
+"Go back, dogs of Spaniards; go back!  This is the land of the Mayubuna,
+and we will permit no Spaniard to set foot upon its soil.  We have no
+desire to be swallowed up, as Atahuallpa and his people were, after he
+had welcomed you to his country; therefore go back--or die!"
+
+"They take us for Spaniards," explained Phil to Dick; and, raising his
+hands, he shouted back:
+
+"People of the Mayubuna, you are mistaken; we are not Spaniards, but are
+the enemies of the Spaniard, and the friends of all who hate them.  We
+are on our way up the river to fight them, now; and we beg you to give
+us free passage through your land, and also a little cassava."
+
+A laugh of derision greeted this statement; and the Indian who had just
+spoken shouted in reply:
+
+"You lie, dog and son of a dog; you are Spaniards, for your skins are
+light, like theirs, and one of you has a beard."  And suddenly raising
+his bow, the speaker discharged an arrow at Phil, which whizzed past
+within half an inch of that gentleman's ear.
+
+"Make as though you intended to run down that canoe," ordered Phil.
+Then, seizing his bow and fitting an arrow to the string, he answered:
+
+"Fools! we are English, I tell you, and the deadly enemies of the
+Spaniard; therefore let us pass in peace, otherwise must we make a
+passage for ourselves by force of arms."
+
+The reply to this was another scornful laugh and a flight of arrows from
+every Indian in the two opposing canoes.  By a miracle Phil again
+escaped unhurt, although no less than five arrows lodged in the
+puma-skin tunic which he was wearing, and the sail of the canoe was
+literally riddled with them.  He felt that the matter was getting beyond
+a joke, that the time for fair speaking was past and the time for action
+had arrived, so, raising his bow, he drew his arrow to its head, and
+aimed it full at the breast of the Indian who had addressed him so
+abusively.  For a single moment he hesitated, then he released the
+arrow, and the next moment, with the shaft buried so deep in his body
+that the point protruded nearly a foot out of his back, the savage flung
+up his arms, reeled backward, and fell into the water, capsizing the
+canoe in which he had been standing as he did so.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN.
+
+HOW THEY FELL INTO THE HANDS OF THE MAYUBUNA.
+
+A yell, expressive in about equal proportions of amazement at the
+strength which could drive an arrow very nearly through the body of a
+man, and fury against the audacious slayers of that man--who happened to
+be a cacique--immediately arose from the occupants of the companion
+canoe, to be almost immediately succeeded by loud cries of dismay as a
+sudden swirl and rush along the surface of the stream toward the spot
+where the occupants of the capsized canoe were splashing in the water
+betrayed the presence of a hungry alligator.  Paddles were dashed into
+the water with frantic energy as the occupants of the other canoe,
+abandoning all attempts to bar the passage of the Englishmen, whirled
+their craft round and sped to the assistance of their friends.  But the
+alligators were beforehand with them, for before they could reach the
+spot where the capsized canoe floated, bottom up, surrounded by her
+crew, two piercing shrieks were followed by the abrupt disappearance of
+two Indians beneath the surface of the water; and a few seconds later a
+third Indian vanished in the same terrible manner.
+
+"The caimans are among them!" shouted Stukely to Dick.  "This is our
+chance to get past, lad.  Starboard your helm a little.  So, steady!
+Keep her at that.  Now, if we were vindictively inclined, we could
+hamper their efforts very considerably by galling them with our arrows
+as we slip past.  But let be; perhaps the lesson which they have already
+had will teach them the folly of interfering with Englishmen!"
+
+The Mayubuna, however, had not yet received their full lesson; for when
+the canoe of the would-be rescuers dashed in among the swimmers the
+latter, frantic with fear of the alligators, seized her gunwale and made
+such frenzied and reckless efforts to scramble into her that, despite
+the warning cries of her occupants, she, too, was instantly capsized.
+And now blind, senseless panic seized in an instant upon every Indian
+present; for shriek after shriek told that the alligators were still
+busy; while the remaining four canoes, which had also been hastening to
+the rescue, suddenly paused, evidently fearful lest, if they approached
+the scene of the disaster, they, too, might be involved in it.
+
+Meanwhile, the Englishmen, taking the fullest possible advantage of the
+situation, slid at a safe distance past the spot where the Indians were
+all struggling in the water in a vain effort to right their canoes and
+climb into them, and, favoured by a freshening breeze, pursued their way
+up the river.  But although they had escaped for the moment, Phil and
+Dick still had plenty of cause for anxiety; for they had by this time
+been long enough in the wilds to have learned that when Indians are
+hostile their hostility is very bitter and pertinacious; and they could
+scarcely hope that, having mistaken them for Spaniards--who at that time
+were more feared and hated than any other earthly thing by the Indians--
+the Mayubuna would be satisfied with the issue of their first encounter
+with the white men.  Moreover to add to the difficulties of the said
+white men, evening was now drawing on apace, the sun had already sunk so
+low that his beams were unable to pierce the forest on their right hand,
+while the orange glow which suffused the tree-tops on their left told
+them as plainly as words that the great luminary was within a brief
+half-hour of his setting.  And, unfortunately, there was no moon just
+then; while without the light of the moon it was impossible to use the
+river at night.  It would therefore be imperatively necessary for them
+to seek quickly a place of concealment wherein to pass the night if they
+wished to avoid being overtaken by darkness on the river; they therefore
+now proceeded to look anxiously about them for such a place.
+Eventually, when the brief twilight of the tropics was closing down upon
+the scene and the fireflies were beginning to appear, they sighted a
+spot which, while by no means ideal for their purpose, might possibly be
+made to serve.
+
+It lay about a hundred yards up a small creek branching out of the main
+stream, and as it was the only spot at all suitable which they had seen
+since their encounter with the Indians, they really had no choice but to
+avail themselves of it.  It consisted of a little grassy mead of about
+two acres in extent, lying quite open to view from the main river, the
+surface of the soil being not more than a foot above that of the water,
+and with no rushes to form a screen.  Therefore, if they were to camp
+there for the night, as indeed they must, there being apparently no
+other place for them, they would have to manage as best they could
+without a fire wherewith to cook their supper.  But needs must, under
+certain circumstances, so, with a glance astern to assure themselves
+that they were not being followed, the sail was lowered, the canoe was
+turned into the creek, and a minute later the voyagers were ashore and
+glancing keenly about them to ascertain the possibilities of the place.
+These were rather better than a first glance had led the wanderers to
+hope for, for their first necessity was to find a hiding-place for the
+canoe, and there, about a hundred and fifty yards away, was a clump of
+detached bush which would serve admirably for such a purpose.  So,
+availing themselves of the very last of the waning light, they hauled
+the canoe out of the water, hoisted her upon their shoulders, and,
+carrying her to the clump of bush, very effectively concealed her
+therein, afterwards going back over their trail through the grass and
+carefully obliterating it by means of a leafy branch, in the manner
+which they had learned from Vilcamapata.  Then they looked about them
+for a spot in which they might themselves pass the night.  The place was
+by no means an ideal one for fugitives to pass the night in, for there
+was nothing even remotely resembling a hiding-place that they could see;
+and concealment was just then what they wanted more than anything else.
+True, there was an enormous ceiba tree growing upon the very edge of the
+clearing, among the upper branches of which they might possibly be able
+to conceal themselves; and in the absence of anything more suitable they
+at length determined to avail themselves of that, braving the perils of
+possible jaguars, scorpions, snakes, ants, and other undesirable
+bedfellows.  Accordingly, the two friends ascended to the lower branches
+of the tree by climbing the lianas, hand over hand, which depended
+conveniently from the boughs, and, working their way aloft as well as
+they could in the thick darkness created by the luxuriant foliage, at
+length established themselves quite safely and comfortably in the fork
+formed by the junction of two enormous branches with the parent stem.
+They had no food with them, and were possessed of a healthy hunger, for
+they had eaten nothing since midday; but they were also exceedingly
+tired; and it was not long before they forgot their hunger in profound
+sleep.
+
+Probably they would not have slept so soundly had they known that they
+had unwittingly entered a trap.  But they had; for the Indians whom they
+had encountered shortly before knew that part of the river perfectly,
+and were fully aware that the difficulties of navigation were such that
+the fugitives could not possibly proceed very far in the darkness, and
+they also knew that the spot where Dick and Phil had landed was the only
+one within many miles where an upstream landing was possible.  They
+therefore conjectured shrewdly that, since the white men would arrive at
+this spot just about nightfall, they would be certain to land there, and
+they took their measures accordingly.  First of all, to make everything
+quite sure, they sent a messenger on to the next village, some fifteen
+miles up the river, to inform the cacique of the presence of the two
+white men in the neighbourhood, and to request that a watch for them
+should be kept, with a view to their capture.  They requested further,
+that in the event of the white men being captured, they should be sent
+back down the river to pay the penalty for having caused the death of
+seventeen Mayubuna Indians.  Then, having by this means ensured the
+capture of the fugitives, in the event of their succeeding by any chance
+in forcing their way up the river in the darkness, they launched and
+manned four canoes, each containing ten men, and these four canoes,
+spreading themselves right across the river, so that nothing could
+possibly pass downstream undetected, proceeded to make their way
+cautiously up the river to the spot where they knew it was morally
+certain that the white men must and would land.  It was nearly eight
+o'clock at night when the four canoes arrived at the spot for which they
+were bound, and it was then of course much too dark for them to see
+anything.  They therefore troubled themselves not at all to search for
+signs of the white men's presence, but assumed that they were there
+somewhere, and at once, with infinite precaution, proceeded to surround
+the open plateau, cunningly concealing themselves in the long grass.
+Half a dozen of them lay immediately beneath the overhanging branches of
+the ceiba tree; but they arrived there so silently that, even if Dick
+and Phil had been awake, they would have heard nothing.
+
+Now, there is probably no creature in this world of ours more vindictive
+than an angry Indian; and these particular Mayubuna Indians considered
+that they had ample cause for their anger against the two white men whom
+they were taking so much trouble to capture; for had not those same
+white men been directly responsible for the loss of seventeen male
+Mayubuna lives?  And among the South American Indians, who, even then,
+were beginning from a variety of causes to die out, nothing is so
+valuable as the life of a male--females they care nothing about; they
+may live or die as they please--therefore those who were responsible for
+the sacrifice of no less than seventeen men's lives must receive a
+punishment, the severity of which should be proportionate to the
+enormity of their crime.  Consequently not one of those Indians closed
+his eyes for a moment throughout the long hours of that night; and with
+the first hint of approaching dawn, long before either of the occupants
+of the ceiba were awake, they were keenly looking about them for "sign"
+of the white men's presence.  For some time, however, they looked in
+vain, for the Englishmen had learned a few of the ways of the wild from
+Vilcamapata, and had succeeded in obliterating their tracks so
+completely that even the sharp eyes of the savages failed to detect
+them.  But by and by, when it was broad daylight, one of the Mayubuna
+who had recognised the possibilities of concealment afforded by the
+ceiba detected spots here and there on two of the depending lianas where
+small strips of the bark had been freshly torn off as though somebody
+had very recently climbed up them, and to this he immediately directed
+the attention of the rest, with the result that it soon became a
+practical certainty that the fugitives were somewhere in that tree.
+This having been determined, certain of the Mayubuna young men of the
+party, anxious to distinguish themselves, proposed to climb the tree
+forthwith and bring the white men down, dead or alive; but the cacique
+in command of the party, who happened to have been in one of the
+attacking canoes on the preceding night, and had therefore already had
+experience of the prowess of the hunted men, at once vetoed the plan as
+being far too dangerous; besides, for certain grim reasons which will in
+due time appear, he wanted the quarry to be taken alive and unhurt, if
+possible.  Therefore, instead of permitting any of his men to climb the
+tree, he so disposed them round the base of it that, while far enough
+away to ensure that they should not be seen by the occupants during
+their descent, they should be near enough to rush in and effect the
+capture of the white men the moment that they set foot on the ground.
+
+Meanwhile Stukely and Chichester, absolutely unconscious of the
+elaborate preparations that were being made for their capture, slept
+soundly on until the sun was fairly above the horizon, when the cries of
+the birds in the neighbouring branches of the tree aroused them to the
+fact that another day had arrived, and that it was high time for them to
+descend from their lofty hiding-place and proceed with the preparations
+for the resumption of their journey.  Accordingly, they began their
+descent with the observance of every precaution which their past
+experience had taught them; but, unfortunately, they had not yet learned
+that when you ascend a tree in search of concealment, it is always
+advisable to descend some other, as they might easily have done had they
+thought of it; for, as is the case almost everywhere in the South
+American forest, the trees grew so thickly together that they might
+easily have travelled for miles without descending to the ground, merely
+by climbing along from branch to branch.  But this idea did not occur to
+them, therefore they proceeded to lower themselves gradually down the
+giant trunk, carefully inspecting what lay beneath them before
+attempting to reach the next branch below.  For the first fifty feet or
+so of their descent, however, the foliage of the tree was so dense that
+it completely shut out all view of the ground beneath; and by the time
+that an occasional glimpse of the grassy glade below became visible they
+were so near the ground that, as the cunning cacique had anticipated, it
+was impossible for them to detect the hiding-places of the concealed
+Indians.
+
+At length the two adventurers reached the lowest branch of all; and here
+they paused and very carefully scrutinised the ground beneath them.  But
+if they knew how to obliterate their tracks, so did the Indians, and
+there was nothing visible to indicate the presence of forty foes lurking
+in the long grass below, or indeed anywhere within the glade.
+Therefore, with the assurance begotten of a conviction that they had
+succeeded in hoodwinking their foes of the preceding evening, they
+boldly ran out along the great spreading branch, seized a liana each,
+and slid rapidly to the ground--to find themselves skilfully noosed in a
+lasso and their arms tightly confined to their sides, the moment that
+their feet touched the earth.  Then, despite their frantic struggles to
+free themselves from the entangling lassos, they were instantly seized
+and other ropes of raw-hide were deftly twisted about their limbs and
+bodies, until in less than a minute they were so tightly and securely
+trussed up that they could scarcely wag a finger; after which they were
+each hoisted upon the shoulders of four Indians and borne with songs of
+triumph and rejoicing to the canoes, into which they were tumbled with
+scant ceremony.  Then, with further songs of triumph, they were swiftly
+transported back down the river to the village to which their captors
+belonged.
+
+This village was quite invisible from the river, being approached by
+means of one of those small, short, winding creeks that so frequently
+occur on the South American rivers, and the existence of which seems so
+difficult to account for; but when, upon the canoes rounding a bend, the
+place swung into view, it was seen to be of quite considerable extent,
+consisting of fully one hundred palm-leaf huts standing in an open glade
+of about two hundred acres in extent, part of which was under
+cultivation, being planted, in almost equal proportion, with bananas,
+yams, and cassava.
+
+The triumphant songs and shouts of the victorious expedition caused the
+entire population of the village to turn out and swarm down to the small
+strip of beach which constituted the landing-place; so when Dick and
+Phil were lifted out of the canoes they beheld a crowd of some four or
+five hundred Indians, men, women, and children, crowded together to gaze
+upon and jeer at them.  And jeer at them they did, with all the more
+gusto when it was seen that so tightly had the bonds been drawn about
+the prisoners' limbs that when they were set upon their feet they were
+unable to stand, but sank helplessly to the ground with an involuntary
+groan.  But the Indians had already had enough of carrying their
+stalwart prisoners, and especially Dick, who towered head and shoulders
+above the tallest of them; therefore when they saw that it was
+impossible for the white men to stand, and had fathomed the reason for
+their helplessness, they loosed the thongs about their prisoners' feet
+and legs, and allowed them a few minutes pause for the blood to
+circulate afresh.  Those few minutes were surcharged with exquisite
+suffering for the unfortunate victims, but they bore it with stoical
+silence and composure; and when at length the cacique gave the order for
+them to rise and march they at once scrambled to their feet and
+proceeded, in charge of a dozen Indians, fully armed with pocunas, or
+blowpipes, bows--the arrows of which were doubtless poisoned with
+curare--and long spears.  In this order, and followed by the entire
+population, our friends were marched up through the village to a hut
+situated near its northern extremity, into which they were bundled,
+while the guards ranged themselves round the hut outside, to frustrate
+any attempt at escape.
+
+The unfortunate prisoners were by this time suffering so acutely from
+the tightness of the ligatures which confined their arms to their bodies
+that they were in no mood for conversation, but just lay upon the
+earthen floor of the hut in silent torment.  But, luckily for them, they
+were not called upon to endure very much longer; for when they had lain
+there about half an hour the cacique appeared and gave orders that their
+bonds were to be loosed, at the same time warning them that the first
+indication of an attempt to escape would be met by a shower of arrows,
+the smallest scratch from which would be followed by a death of
+intolerable agony.  Phil replied that under those circumstances the
+cacique might rest assured that no such attempt would be made, and
+followed up the assurance by asking why they had been taken prisoners,
+seeing that they were not Spaniards, but were enemies of the Spaniard
+and therefore ought to be regarded as friends by all who hated the
+Spaniard.  To which statement the cacique made no reply, but simply
+turned on his heel and departed.  A few minutes later, however, two
+women appeared bearing food--a portion of roast kid on a plantain leaf,
+and some cassava bread, together with a small gourd of what looked like
+sour milk--which they set upon the ground before the prisoners; and Phil
+and Dick both agreed that in the regards of these women there was more
+of pity than of hate.
+
+During the whole of that day and the next our friends were kept close
+prisoners; but on the morning of their third day of captivity they were
+summoned from their hut almost before they had finished breakfast; and,
+upon emerging, were conducted to the open space in the middle of the
+village, where were assembled not only all the inhabitants of the place
+but some seven or eight hundred more who seemed to be visitors.  The
+crowd generally were densely packed round the sides of the quadrangle,
+the middle being kept clear by a line of armed men who maintained order
+by the free use of their heavy clubs, which they unhesitatingly drove
+into the pit of the stomach of any unauthorised person who displayed an
+undue eagerness to get a good view of the impending proceedings.  In the
+middle of the clear space sat the cacique of the village, with two men,
+apparently visitors, on either side of him; and a little apart from
+these stood two other men, one of whom Phil immediately recognised as
+having been in one of the canoes which had attempted to bar their
+progress up the river.
+
+A little murmur of excited expectancy, perhaps mingled with wonder,
+swept through the crowd as the two prisoners were led forward and halted
+in front of the cacique; but it quickly died away and an intense silence
+ensued, which was presently broken by the cacique, who, addressing
+Stukely, said:
+
+"White man, whence come you, and whither were you going when you strove
+to force a passage up the river on the evening of the day before last?"
+
+"We come," replied Phil, "from an island far away across the Great
+Water; so far that we were voyaging a whole moon and more without sight
+of land; and our business is to fight the Spaniard, who is our enemy, as
+well as that of the Indian.  Twice have we fought him already; once on
+the Great Water, where we took from him one of his great canoes; and
+once again in one of his towns, far away to the north, where we took
+another of his great canoes, with much gold of which he had robbed the
+Indian.  But by a mischance my friend and I were left behind when our
+comrades sailed away; and for a time we were in danger of falling into
+the hands of the Spaniard.  Then we escaped from them, but, having no
+canoe big enough to take us across the Great Water, we were obliged to
+remain in this land; and, having heard that there are many Spaniards in
+the land lying to the southward, we determined to seek them out and take
+from them as much as we can get of the gold which they have
+unrighteously taken from the Indians."
+
+"If that story be true, why did ye not tell it us instead of slaying
+many of my people, one of them by an arrow from your bow, and the rest
+by the jaws of the caimans?" demanded the cacique.
+
+"Nay, why ask a question of which you yourself know the answer?"
+retorted Phil.  "For you were in one of the canoes, and saw and heard
+everything that passed.  Did not I make to your leader all the signs of
+amity and goodwill?  But he rejected them; he called us dogs of
+Spaniards; bade us go back by the way that we had come; and himself shot
+the arrow which led to all the trouble.  Is that the way in which the
+Mayubuna treat those who come to them as friends?"
+
+"How do I know that ye come as friends?" demanded the cacique.  "When
+the Spaniards first appeared in this land they, too, said that they came
+as the friends of the Indian; and how have they proved their friendship?
+By killing the Inca Atahuallpa and seizing his kingdom; by enslaving
+the Indian and despoiling him of all that he possesses; by ravaging the
+country with fire and sword!  Nay, I believe not your story.  If ye are
+not Spaniards, ye are white-skinned, even as they are; your hearts are
+evil and full of guile, like theirs; and if we were foolish enough to
+listen to your lying words you would treat us even as they treated
+Atahuallpa and his people.  But there are only two of you, and you are
+in our power; moreover ye have slain, or caused to be slain, seventeen
+men of the Mayubuna; therefore shall ye die; not quickly and easily, but
+little by little, so that ye shall die not once but a thousand times;
+and your torments shall be as honey to the friends of those whom ye have
+slain, and your groans and cries for mercy shall be more pleasant to
+them than the songs of birds.  Go; I have spoken!"  And amid tumultuous
+shouts of rejoicing from the assembled multitude the two Englishmen were
+conducted back to their prison hut and once more placed under strict
+guard.  For they were trebly valuable now, having been condemned to die
+by the torture, and it was seldom indeed that an Indian was afforded so
+delectable a sight as that of a white man suffering the unspeakably
+hideous torments which, with fiendish cleverness, were designed to
+inflict the maximum amount of pain which the human frame could possibly
+endure, and still continue to live.  Moreover there were two of them;
+big, strong men, apparently in the very pink of health and condition;
+they would linger long and endure unimaginable torments before
+succumbing; and the sight of their agonies would be one long-drawn-out
+rapture to those who were privileged to witness them.  Oh yes; they must
+be guarded well, for their escape now would mean lifelong disappointment
+to the whole village and its guests.
+
+But they must not only be kept safe; their health and strength must be
+preserved intact; therefore during the remainder of that day an abundant
+supply of food was provided for them, and they were urged with the
+utmost solicitude to partake of it freely.  Which they did; for as Phil
+remarked to Dick, their strength was never of such vital importance to
+them as now; since it was not to be supposed that they were going to
+submit to be slowly tortured to death without at least making an effort
+to escape; and for that effort to be successful they must keep well and
+strong.
+
+The worst of it was that they were quite unable to obtain the slightest
+inkling of the form which their torture was to take; the men who guarded
+them were willing enough to converse with them upon general subjects,
+indeed they were full of curiosity, and asked innumerable questions
+respecting the past adventures of the Englishmen; but when it came to
+talking about the forthcoming festivities they at once fell silent; they
+either could not or would not give the slightest information.
+
+"Well," said Phil, at the conclusion of a long conversation with their
+jailers, "we are at least unbound; our hands and feet are free; and
+before I suffer myself to be again tied up a good many of the Mayubuna
+are going to die."
+
+"I say ditto to that," replied Dick, rising to his feet and stretching
+his long limbs as though to test their strength, an action which, by the
+by, at once brought the guard facing round with their spears poised and
+their bows bent, so alert were they to act upon the slightest thing that
+seemed to hint at an attempt to escape.  Yet that was precisely the
+problem that was exercising the minds of the two white men all through
+that day and the succeeding night; and three times during that night did
+they make tentative efforts to escape the watchfulness of their gaolers,
+but without success.
+
+One thing, however, was pretty evident, and that was that the torture,
+whatever might be its nature, was to begin on the morrow; for the
+village was in a perfect ferment of excitement all day, and all through
+the night, too, for that matter; people were constantly coming and going
+in crowds past the hut, merely for the sake, apparently, of getting a
+casual peep at the prisoners as they passed; and with nightfall great
+fires were lighted in the square, and singing and dancing went on all
+through the night as a fitting introduction to the entertainment of the
+following day.
+
+At length, after a sleepless night of intense anxiety on the part of the
+prisoners, and, as has been said, more than one unavailing effort to
+elude the vigilance of their guards, the morning dawned of the day which
+was to see those prisoners begin to die; and with the rising of the sun
+the excitement and hilarity of the village became still more pronounced.
+The crowds grew more dense, the laughter and conversation louder; the
+people had donned their holiday attire--such as it was--and the children
+chased each other with joyous shouts in and out of the throng.  Then a
+meal was brought to the prisoners; and while they were partaking of it a
+sudden clamour of drums and horns arose, and the laughing, chattering
+crowd seemed to dissolve as suddenly from the vicinity of the prison
+hut, leaving it plunged in an atmosphere of silence, save for the
+monotonous banging of the drums, the blare of the horns, and a low,
+humming murmur which might be that of a multitude of people conversing
+in low, hushed voices.
+
+"That means that our time has come, I suppose," remarked Stukely, as he
+set down the food of which he had been partaking.  "Well, keep up your
+courage, lad; and remember that if we are to die we will do so in a
+fashion which the Mayubuna will never forget, so long as they are a
+people.  There are wives now who will be widows before the sun goes
+down; for they shall never torture me to death; nor you, either, lad, if
+I can help it.  We have our hands free, and a Devon man can do much with
+his hands alone, when put to it; but my plan is to watch our chance, and
+snatch the first weapon that comes to hand, and make play with it.  They
+will no doubt shoot us down with their arrows, rather than let us
+escape; but that kind of death will be infinitely preferable to one of
+lingering torture--if die we must."
+
+"Yes," agreed Dick; "and you may depend upon me to--"
+
+He was interrupted by the arrival of a messenger who summoned them and
+their guards to follow him; whereupon they rose to their feet and,
+completely hedged in by sixteen fully armed men, were marched toward the
+centre of the village, ultimately arriving in the square where they had
+previously been interviewed by the cacique.  And a curious sight the
+square presented on this occasion, for it and the long street which ran
+through it from end to end of the village were packed with people who
+had come, in response to an invitation, from all the villages within a
+radius of twenty miles, to see the two white men die.  They were ranged
+right along what may be called the main street, in a dense crowd some
+eight or ten deep, for a distance of a quarter of a mile, and were
+arranged in two compact lines, with a clear lane of about six feet wide
+between the two lines of people.  Through a gap which had evidently been
+left open in one of these lines for that especial purpose, the two
+prisoners were conducted into this lane and led to one extremity of it,
+where upon a raised platform sat the cacique, with five men, presumably
+the caciques of neighbouring villages, on either side of him.  The
+Englishmen were marched up to this platform and there left face to face
+with the cacique and his friends, the guards retiring through the gap by
+which they had entered, which thereupon was immediately closed.
+
+For the space of a full five minutes or more Phil and Dick stood facing
+the cacique, while a profound and impressive silence fell upon that vast
+crowd of Indians, broken only by the rustle of the wind in the
+tree-tops, and a faint rumble caused by the movement of the naked feet
+of the assembled multitude, who were in the grip of an excitement so
+intense that they apparently found it impossible to stand quite still,
+but must needs continually shift the weight of their bodies from one
+foot to the other.
+
+At length, when the pause had become almost unbearably impressive, the
+cacique rose to his feet and, lifting his hand to command attention,
+spoke.
+
+"White men," he said, "ye have told me a story which may or may not be
+true.  Ye have declared yourselves to be the enemy of the Spaniards and
+the friend of the Indian; but how have ye shown your friendship for us?
+By causing the death of seventeen men of the Mayubuna, by creating
+seventeen widows and forty-six fatherless children, for whom the rest of
+the villagers must now provide food.  For this great wrong ye are doomed
+to die; and it rests with yourselves whether your death shall be quick,
+or whether it shall be one of long-drawn-out torment.
+
+"Ye see this great lane of people stretching right through the village,
+and ye will note that each man of the front rank is armed with a club.
+Now, your doom is this.  Ye shall start from where ye now stand, and
+shall run to the farther end of the lane of people; and as ye run each
+man on either hand shall smite ye as often as he may with his club.  If
+ye can hold out against the blows which ye will receive, and retain
+strength enough to reach the other end of the lane without falling by
+the way, then your death shall be quick; but if ye fall, then he who
+falls will be tied to a stake and slowly done to death for the pleasure
+of the spectators.  You understand?  Then--go!"
+
+During this brief address the two Englishmen had been thinking hard and
+rapidly.  Phil's first thought had been to force his way up on to the
+platform, seize the cacique, and threaten him with instant death unless
+the man would consent to give them both immediate liberty; but he
+instantly discarded the idea, for as the thought flashed through his
+mind he noticed that the Indians in front of the platform were all fully
+armed; and for an unarmed man to force a passage through that hedge of
+deadly spears, ten deep, was a simple impossibility.  Then he threw a
+glance along the lane which he and Dick were to traverse, and which was
+hedged in on either side by serried ranks of Indians, each armed with a
+heavy club about three feet long.  The Indians were by no means
+powerfully built, and, individually, looked by no means formidable; and
+the thought came to him that if he and Dick, instead of starting to race
+at top speed from end to end of the lane, were each to snatch a club
+from the nearest man, and then, back to back, fight their way slowly
+along the lane, they might possibly contrive to reach the end of it
+without being beaten to the earth, after which who knew what unforeseen
+possibilities might arise?  It was not a particularly hopeful plan, but
+it was the best that suggested itself on the spur of the moment;
+moreover, both he and Dick were experts at quarter-staff play, and they
+would at least be able to make a fight for it, so he hastily
+communicated his plan to Dick while the cacique was speaking, and
+received Dick's murmured acceptance of it at the precise moment when the
+cacique uttered the word "Go!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN.
+
+HOW PHIL AND DICK WERE MADE TO RUN THE GAUNTLET.
+
+"Go!"
+
+As the word left the cacique's lips the two Englishmen faced round, back
+to back, and each sprang straight at the Indian who happened to be
+nearest him.  A perfect forest of bludgeons whirled in the air on both
+sides of the human lane, and from one end of it to the other, in savage
+anticipation of the moment when the two victims should dash past; but
+the length of the weapons was such that not more than three could reach
+each victim at any given moment; and of this the two friends had already
+taken note, deciding with the rapidity of thought that if by skill and
+quickness of action they could evade those three simultaneous blows,
+they need not trouble about anything more for the moment; for their
+progress down the lane would simply be a continuous succession of
+evasions of three blows aimed at them at the same moment.  Their object,
+therefore, was each to secure a bludgeon before receiving a disabling
+blow; and this they contrived to do, their sudden spring taking the
+Indians so completely by surprise that the weapons were wrenched out of
+their hands without the slightest difficulty.  Then, instead of
+sprinting for their lives down the lane, by which course of action they
+must have inevitably exposed themselves to the certainty of receiving a
+sufficient number of violent blows to disable them, and in all
+probability prevent them from reaching their goal, they placed
+themselves back to back and, each facing his own particular line of
+assailants, moved sideways along the length of the lane at ordinary
+walking pace, contenting themselves with parrying with their bludgeons
+the blows aimed at them, and not attempting to return those blows
+excepting when some particular Indian happened to exhibit especial
+vindictiveness, when, if opportunity offered, they retaliated with such
+effect that before fifty yards of their course had been traversed at
+least half a dozen Indians were down with cracked skulls.  Now, it would
+naturally be imagined that a multitude of savages, finding themselves
+thus baulked of the vengeance to which they had been so eagerly looking
+forward, would have with one accord broken their ranks and, rushing in
+upon the two white men in overwhelming numbers, have slain them out of
+hand.  But they did nothing of the sort.  On the contrary, the cool,
+calm courage of the prisoners, their audacity in daring to face such
+enormously overwhelming odds, the gallant fight that they were putting
+up, and the extraordinary skill with which they handled their bludgeons,
+all seemed to appeal to some elementary sporting instinct that must have
+been lurking dormant and unsuspected in the Mayubuna nature, exciting
+their admiration to such an extent that several of the Indians who might
+have struck an unfair blow actually forbore to do so, and presently they
+even began to utter shouts of admiration when either of the white men
+achieved a particularly brilliant passage of defence.  In short, it
+seemed gradually to dawn upon them that they were playing a game, and
+that since the balance of advantage was enormously on their own side
+they were morally bound to play it fairly.  And within certain limits
+they did, although there were not wanting those whose ferocious passions
+were so deeply stirred that all they seemed to crave was the life of the
+white men, and they were willing to go to all lengths to get it.  Thus
+one man aimed so savage a blow at Dick that he smashed his bludgeon to
+splinters upon that of Chichester as the latter guarded the blow.  Then,
+doubtless enraged at his failure, he sprang out of his place in the
+ranks and, catching Dick unawares, stabbed at him with the splintered
+fragment of the weapon that remained in his hand, inflicting quite a
+painful jagged wound on the young Englishman's shoulder.  But it was his
+last act, for, stung into sudden fury by the smart of the wound, Dick
+turned upon him and, throwing all his strength and weight into the blow,
+struck out with his clenched left fist, catching the unfortunate Indian
+square on the point of the chin.  So terrific was the blow that it
+actually lifted the man clean off his feet and sent him whirling back
+through the air for a distance of nearly four yards before he fell to
+the earth dead with a broken neck.  A great shout of mingled amazement,
+admiration, and terror arose at this wonderful exhibition of strength;
+and thenceforward, influenced either by fear or the spirit of fair play,
+or, it may be, a combination of both, there were no further attempts
+made to take an unfair advantage of those two who were making so gallant
+a fight to save themselves from a fate too hideous to be put into words.
+
+At length the gauntlet was run, the far end of the lane was reached, and
+the two young Englishmen still stood upon their feet.  But not
+unscathed; very far from it.  They had made a gallant fight, and had
+afforded their savage captors a far more exhilarating spectacle than
+they had ever before witnessed, although it had been of a very different
+character from what had been anticipated; and now the two prisoners
+stood, trembling with exhaustion from their superhuman efforts, cruelly
+bruised, bleeding, and altogether too dazed and helpless to make that
+sudden, wild dash for freedom which each had planned in his heart when
+entering upon the terrible ordeal through which they had just passed.
+What was to be the next move in this grim game of life or death?
+
+They were not long left in doubt, for the party of armed men who had
+conducted them on to the ground now forced their way into the lane and,
+arranging themselves in a circle round the two white men, led them back
+to where the cacique of the village sat enthroned.  And as they passed
+back along the lane of humanity which they had fought their way through
+a few minutes previously, many of those whose arms still tingled with
+the jar of the parried blows which they had aimed at them, now greeted
+their return with murmurs of commiseration or admiration.  Then, almost
+before they realised where they were, they found themselves, still
+hemmed in by their armed guards, facing the cacique, who sat for some
+moments silent, regarding them with an inscrutable countenance.  Then,
+raising his hand for silence, he spoke.
+
+"White men," he said, "ye have not fulfilled the terms of the agreement
+which I made with you.  Ye were to run from this end of the lane to the
+other, and ye walked.  And instead of accepting unresistingly--as was
+intended--the blows which were aimed at ye, you took by force and
+superior strength two clubs from my people, wherewith to defend
+yourselves; and, worst of all, ye have killed outright no less than
+four, more men of the Mayubuna and maimed five others so that it will be
+many days before they will again be able to provide food for their wives
+and children.  Therefore, because of all this, and what has gone before,
+your doom is--"
+
+"Nay, nay; be merciful, O my father!" cried a number of women's voices,
+"be merciful!"  And, forcing their way through the throng, a party of
+some twenty women of varying ages--from girls of seventeen or eighteen
+to one withered hag who, from her appearance, might have been a hundred
+years old--flung themselves upon their knees before the cacique.
+
+"Mercy!" reiterated the cacique, in astonishment.  "Who pleads for mercy
+on behalf of these white men?  Surely not you, Insipa, whose only son
+they have done to death, leaving you desolate in your old age?"
+
+"Yea; I, even I, Insipa," answered the hag above mentioned.  "Hearken
+now, O my father," she continued.  "It is a custom among us that if a
+man be killed, and his slayer be taken alive, if the mother or widow of
+the slain man claim the slayer as her slave, to provide food for her in
+the place of the slain man, her demand shall be granted, and the slayer
+shall be given to her for the rest of her life.  Now, behold these two
+white men and see what mighty men they are.  Between them they have
+slain no less than twenty-one men of the Mayubuna, leaving twenty-one
+women and many children with none to protect or find food for them.  Let
+them be given as slaves to us, then, that we whom they have thus cruelly
+bereaved may not suffer from the loss of father, husband, or son.  It is
+our right, and we demand it."
+
+The cacique considered this extraordinary request for several minutes;
+then he turned to Dick and Phil.
+
+"White men," he said, "ye have heard what this woman asks.  Now behold,
+I give you your choice: will ye become the slaves of these bereaved
+women, to till their fields, tend their cattle, hunt and fish for them,
+and generally watch over and protect them and their children in the
+place of those whom ye have slain?  Or will ye go straightway to the
+stake and pay the penalty of your misdeeds by dying a slow and miserable
+death?"
+
+"Since we must needs do the one or the other," answered Phil--who alone
+fully understood the purport of the cacique's speech, and therefore took
+it upon himself to reply--"we choose to become the slaves of these women
+who have intervened to save us from death.  And we will do our best to
+fill the places of those whom we have unfortunately slain, tilling their
+fields, tending their cattle, hunting and fishing for their wives and
+children, and protecting them from all evil."
+
+"It is well," answered the cacique.  Then, turning to the group of
+women, he said: "Take them; they are yours; I have granted your request.
+Nevertheless, methinks you would find it easier to tame two full-grown
+jaguars, fresh from the forest, than to subdue these white men to your
+will.  But that is your affair."  And with a wave of his hand he
+dismissed the party.
+
+"`Subdue them', said he?" muttered the ancient Insipa.  "Ha, ha! we
+shall see; yes, we shall see!  These men are truly young and strong and
+fierce, yea, stronger and fiercer than black jaguars, while Insipa is
+old and weak; nevertheless--here, take them and bind them for me."  She
+turned suddenly and held out two tough, raw-hide ropes to the armed
+guard who still surrounded the prisoners; and they, with a coarse jest
+or two at the old woman's expense, at once proceeded to bind Dick's and
+Phil's hands behind them, after which they placed the two free ends of
+the ropes in the beldame's hands and left the way free for her to lead
+her prisoners away.
+
+"Come, then," cried the old woman, jerking the ropes roughly; "come,
+sons of mine!  Ha, ha!  I have lost one son, who was lazy, who cared not
+for his poor old mother, and often left her for many days without so
+much as the smallest morsel of deer meat, and let her garden be overrun
+with weeds.  And in his place I have gained two--two who are brave
+enough to protect me, and strong enough to till my garden and my fields,
+and to keep my hut well supplied with all that I need.  Ha, ha!  I have
+done well; I am a gainer!  Come, white men, come, and make old Insipa's
+declining years pleasant and happy!"  And she proceeded to drag her
+prisoners away, followed by the other women who were--or believed they
+were--part owners of the bodies of Dick and Phil.
+
+"Now, what does all this mean?  What is to be our fate; and what has
+that withered old mummy to do with us?" grumbled Dick, who had scarcely
+half-understood what had passed since he and Phil had been led back to
+the cacique.
+
+Phil explained, adding, "It will probably be unpleasant enough for a
+time, but we must grin and bear it, lad; and at all events it will be
+less disagreeable than being lashed to a stake and slowly tortured to
+death.  If we had accepted that fate everything would have been at an
+end for us within the next two or three days; whereas by choosing the
+alternative we at least save our lives; and that is the main thing with
+us at present.  There would have been no comfort or satisfaction in
+being tortured to death by a parcel of savages, after having come so far
+and done so much.  Besides, if we are to hunt and fish for these women
+we must be free to come and go pretty much as we please.  And do you
+need me to tell you what we shall do as soon as we obtain our freedom?"
+
+"Of course not," answered Dick.  "We shall just watch our opportunity
+and continue our journey."
+
+"Precisely," agreed Phil.  "And I must confess I am greatly surprised
+that our friend the cacique did not foresee such a possibility.  Well,
+then, it seems to me that what we have to do is to be good boys for the
+present, do everything with a good grace that we have undertaken to do,
+and, generally, use our utmost endeavours to win the confidence of these
+people and disarm the suspicion with which they are certain to regard us
+at the outset, and then our way to escape will soon become clear."
+
+The hut of Insipa was a wretched, neglected hovel of a place, in the
+very last stages of dirt, neglect, and decay, situated on the outskirts
+of the village, and to this delectable abode the old crone conducted her
+two "sons" and inducted them therein.  But before she took them inside
+the hut she carefully examined their hurts; and when at length she had
+satisfied herself that although these were no doubt painful enough, and,
+for the moment, so severe as to incapacitate her prisoners for anything
+but the very lightest of work, there was no serious harm done, she
+dispatched one of the women who had followed her, and who considered
+herself as part owner of the prisoners, to the river for water, another
+for wood to make a fire, while a third was sent into the forest to hunt
+for certain herbs.  Then she took the two men into the hut, released
+them from their bonds, and graciously gave them permission to lie down
+upon a heap of dried fern, which they were glad enough to do after the
+rough and trying experience through which they had so recently passed,
+and in a few minutes both were fast asleep.  They slept soundly for an
+hour or more; and when they awoke Insipa was ready with hot fomentations
+for their wounds and bruises, poultices of macerated leaves for
+application after the fomentations, and finally, food--a piece of roast
+goat's flesh, cassava bread, and a warm drink of somewhat peculiar but
+not unpleasant flavour, after partaking of which they both again fell
+into a profound sleep which lasted until the following morning; for the
+drink had been medicated.  Insipa was anxious that her "sons" should
+begin to work for her at once, and she knew that, after their hurts had
+been dressed, sleep was the very best restorative that she could
+possibly administer to them.
+
+As a matter of fact, when Phil and Dick awoke from their long night's
+sleep they found, to their astonishment, that the ache and stiffness of
+their bruises were gone, and that for all practical purposes they were
+as well as ever, and quite fit to be up and about again.  Insipa was
+delighted with the success which had attended her ministrations, so much
+so, indeed, that instead of ordering them out to find food for her at
+once, she went out and borrowed some from a neighbour, on the strength
+of her new acquisition, brought it home, cooked it, and laid it before
+them, with the information that it would be the last unearned meat they
+would get.
+
+This hint, however, did not greatly interfere with the appetite of our
+friends; for they had already agreed that they were quite well enough to
+resume their journey up the river, and had decided to do so at the first
+opportunity, whenever that might occur.  And they believed that it might
+occur at any moment, that very day, perhaps, although they were quite
+prepared to find that precautions of some sort would be taken, for a
+little while at least, to see that they did not get away.  In this they
+were not mistaken; for they had scarcely finished their meal when they
+were summoned to the presence of the cacique, who informed them that he
+had arranged that one of them should spend the day in hunting, while the
+other should remain in the village, and, under the direction and
+supervision of a member of the village council, till the gardens and
+attend to the cattle of the twenty-one widows whose property they were,
+and that they might settle between themselves which of the two should be
+the hunter.  Now this at once put an effectual stop to any plans for
+immediate escape; for although not a word had passed between the two
+friends on the subject, they were both of one mind that whenever they
+went it must be together; in fact neither would have dreamed of going
+off and leaving the other behind.  Probably the shrewd old cacique had
+guessed as much when he arranged the apparently simple but really
+ingenious scheme whereby at least one of the two white men would always
+be in the village and under close observation.  Of course Dick, being
+the younger, offered Phil the choice of the two occupations; and Stukely
+at once unhesitatingly decided that he would undertake the agricultural
+work, while Dick was to do the hunting; and this arrangement came into
+force forthwith, Dick's duty being to secure all the game and fish he
+possibly could, and take the products of his industry to the cacique,
+who would divide them out equally between the twenty-one widows
+according to the numbers of their families.
+
+To provide flesh food enough to satisfy more than sixty healthy
+appetites was no mean task, particularly in the immediate vicinity of a
+village of five hundred inhabitants, where the whole of the neighbouring
+country was strenuously hunted day after day; but Dick happened to be a
+particularly keen and clever hunter; moreover his training during the
+journey had been of such a character as to develop his speed, strength,
+and endurance to such a degree that he was able to go farther afield
+than any of the Indians, and thus reach a district where the game was
+neither so scarce nor so wild as it was in the immediate neighbourhood
+of the village; also he soon got to know the spots where game was most
+likely to be found.  Consequently after the first three or four days,
+during which he was learning the country, he did quite as well as could
+be reasonably expected, and frequently excited the cacique's admiration
+by the quantity of meat which he contrived to bring in.
+
+As for Phil, he was a Devon man, and consequently had acquired, almost
+unconsciously, a considerable amount of knowledge regarding farming
+matters, so that he found himself more than on a par with the Indians,
+whose knowledge of agriculture was of the most elementary character;
+also he understood the full value of system in the arrangement of work,
+which the Indians did not.  Consequently, by working systematically, and
+making the women do their fair share, he found that he could do the work
+which had been allotted to him, and still find time for his favourite
+hobby of research.
+
+It is not necessary to give a detailed description of our friends'
+doings, day after day, during their sojourn with the Mayubuna Indians;
+the above indication will enable the reader to picture the uneventful
+sort of existence which they led; and it is only needful to add that so
+well did the young Englishmen contrive matters that by the time that
+they had been three months in the village the suspicion and distrust
+with which they had at first been regarded had entirely disappeared, and
+the Indians seemed to have gathered the impression that their white
+prisoners had quite settled down and were content to spend the remainder
+of their lives with them.
+
+But it took fully three months to establish matters on this satisfactory
+basis; and this brought the time on to what may be termed the winter
+season; that is to say, the period of the year when, after a
+long-continued spell of fine weather, during which the crops ripen and
+are gathered in, the season of rain, wind, and violent thunderstorms
+begins which is to soften, nourish, and invigorate the baked earth and
+prepare it to bring forth the luxuriant vegetation of another summer.
+And it was one of those violent thunderstorms which provided our friends
+with the opportunity to escape for which they had been so long and so
+patiently waiting.
+
+The day had been unusually hot, to start with; and about noon the sky,
+which had been clear during the earlier part of the day, had gradually
+become veiled by a thick haze through which the sun revealed himself
+with ever-increasing difficulty merely as a shapeless blotch of
+whiteness in the midst of the haze before vanishing altogether.  Then
+the wind fell, the atmosphere became so oppressively close that the mere
+act of breathing became difficult, and a great silence fell upon the
+scene, for the insects and birds, warned by instinct of what was
+impending, sought shelter in the deepest recesses of the forest, while
+the Indians, unable or unwilling to labour in the enervating heat, and
+also knowing from past experience what was coming, retired to their huts
+and resigned themselves to the overpowering languor which oppressed
+them.  Of all the inhabitants of the village, Dick and Phil were the
+only two who resisted the enervating influence of the hour, for Dick was
+away hunting, as usual, while Phil, having set himself a certain task to
+perform, was not the sort of man who would allow himself to be deterred
+from its execution by such a trifle as mere oppressiveness of weather.
+
+But as the day wore on and the sky grew ever more lowering and the heat
+and closeness more pronounced, he found his work growing increasingly
+difficult and distasteful; and it was with a sigh of deep satisfaction
+that at last, having finished what he had set himself to do, he wended
+his way to the hut which he and Dick had been permitted to erect for
+themselves, and, having laid aside the primitive tools which he had been
+using, continued his way to the creek where, at the conclusion of each
+day's labour, he was wont to indulge in the refreshing luxury of a
+bathe.  While he was still in the water he was joined by Dick, who had
+also done a good day's work, having brought in two deer, which he had
+duly delivered over to the cacique.
+
+By the time that the pair had sufficiently refreshed themselves the
+gloom of the departing day was deepening into the darkness of a
+moonless, starless night; and as they entered their hut the first
+shimmer of sheet lightning which was the precursor of the coming storm
+flickered above the tree-tops of the contiguous forest.
+
+"Phew!" exclaimed Dick, as he flung himself upon the heap of dried fern
+that served him as a bed, "how unbearably hot and close it is, and how
+tired I am!  I doubt if I could walk another mile, if my life depended
+upon it."
+
+"I am sorry to hear that," gravely returned Phil; "for, unless I am very
+greatly mistaken, I believe we shall have an opportunity to escape
+to-night."
+
+"To escape?" reiterated Dick.  "How do you mean, old man?"
+
+"Do you know what is going to happen to-night?" demanded Phil.
+
+"I know that we are going to have a pretty severe thunderstorm, if that
+is what you mean," answered Dick; "but what has that got to do with our
+escaping?"
+
+"What has it to do?" repeated Phil.  "Why, everything, my gentle cuckoo.
+Dost thou not yet know that Indians generally, and the Mayubuna in
+particular, have a very wholesome dread and horror of thunderstorms,
+believing, as they do, that the evil spirits come abroad and hold high
+revel upon such occasions?  If an Indian happens to be struck by
+lightning, his fellow Indians are firmly convinced that he has been
+killed by an evil spirit; hence they are extremely reluctant to venture
+abroad during a thunderstorm.  We have observed that reluctance even in
+the case of the comparatively few unimportant storms that have visited
+the village since we have been here; but hitherto the Mayubuna have been
+too suspicious and too watchful to afford us an opportunity to get clear
+away.  Now, however, I think we have at last succeeded in completely
+lulling their suspicions; they have not been nearly so watchful of us of
+late; and I am very doubtful whether there is a single Indian in this
+village, from the cacique downward, including old Mammy Insipa herself,
+who will be willing to turn out in such a storm as is now brewing,
+merely for the purpose of watching that we two do not run away."
+
+"Yes," agreed Dick, "I have no doubt you are right.  Well, I am quite
+ready to make the attempt whenever you say the word."
+
+"But what about thy fatigue?" demanded Phil.
+
+"Oh," answered Dick, with a laugh, "I am not so tired but that I dare
+say I can manage to do whatever may be necessary to secure our escape
+from this wretched place."
+
+"Very well, then," said Phil; "in that case let us get our supper, make
+our preparations--Heaven knows they will be few and simple enough--and
+then lie down and get what rest we can; it will be two or three hours,
+yet, before it will be safe for us to make the attempt."
+
+The friends were awakened out of a sound sleep by a blaze of lightning
+that flashed across their closed eyelids with the vividity of noontide
+sunshine, followed an instant later by a crash of thunder that caused
+them to start upright from their fern beds in something akin to panic,
+so appalling was the sharpness and intensity of the sound, followed as
+it was by a series of deep, heavy, reverberating booms which might have
+been caused by the broadsides of an entire navy simultaneously
+discharged, and the concussion of which sent a perceptible tremor
+through the earth beneath them.  The booming sounds seemed to echo back
+and forth from cloud to cloud, rumbling and growling as though reluctant
+to cease, but at length it subsided into momentary silence, only to
+burst forth with even greater violence a few seconds later as a second
+flash tore across the ink-black sky.
+
+"That is our signal," remarked Phil quietly, as he rose to his feet.
+"We may safely move now, for the `bad spirits' are abroad with a
+vengeance to-night, and every Indian in the place--man, woman, and
+child--will be cowering with head tightly wrapped in blanket and unable
+to move for fear of what may be seen.  There! listen to that!" as
+another vivid flash illumined the hut, and low, terrified wails burst
+forth from all round about them, mingling with the roar and volleying of
+the thunder--"that gives one some idea of the state of mind that the
+poor wretches are in.  I believe that if the village were to take fire
+they would remain in their huts and burn rather than turn out and face
+the lightning.  Come along; we must get clear away, if we can, before
+the rain comes, because when it begins we shall be able to see nothing.
+Now; have we all our belongings--my medicine case, our pistols and
+ammunition, swords, bows and arrows?  Yes; I think there is nothing
+missing.  Are you ready?  Then--march!"
+
+"But where are we going?" demanded Dick, as they groped their way out of
+the hut in the opaque darkness that followed upon a dazzling flash of
+lightning.
+
+"First, round to the back of the hut, and then past the rear of the
+other huts--since, although I believe we might walk straight through the
+village without being seen, I do not believe in running unnecessary
+risks.  Then, down to the beach," replied Phil.
+
+For the first few minutes of their journey the going was exceedingly
+difficult, the eyes of the pair being alternately dazzled by the vivid
+electric flashes and blinded by the Cimmerian darkness that followed
+them; but by the time that they had groped their way through the village
+and were approaching the beach, the flash and glimmer of the lightning,
+both fork and sheet, had become almost continuous, and they were able to
+see their way for the rest of the distance without difficulty.
+
+"Now," said Phil, when at length they reached the beach and stood among
+the canoes, "our first business must be to choose a handy canoe for
+ourselves--I hope we shall not require her for more than an hour--and
+then send the rest adrift down the river, which will put it out of the
+power of the villagers to pursue us.  It is, of course, a bit hard upon
+them, but it cannot be helped; and after all, they have kept us enslaved
+here for three months, so it is not so very unfair an exchange.  Now,
+this is a handy little craft, and ought to serve our purpose very well,
+even if we cannot find our own canoe again, so help me to haul her up,
+Dick; and then we must push the others off as quickly as we can.  The
+suck of the current will soon draw them down the creek into the main
+stream; and when once they are there the Mayubuna may say goodbye to
+them."
+
+It took them the best part of half an hour to send the whole of the
+canoes adrift, but they did the job effectually, and by the time that
+the last canoe had been thrust off into the middle of the creek the
+first dozen or so were fairly in the main stream and being rapidly
+sucked out toward the middle by the strong current.  Then Dick and Phil,
+after giving a last look round, and flinging a parting glance toward the
+silent and apparently deserted village, thrust off the canoe which they
+had reserved for themselves, sprang lightly into her as she went afloat,
+seized the paddles, and headed down the creek.  Upon reaching the main
+stream they found that the current was running very strongly, showing
+that there had been much rain higher up among the hills; but, on the
+other hand, the storm, which was still raging violently, although it had
+brought no rain as yet, had bred a strong breeze from the northward
+which would be of incalculable value to them if they could but recover
+their own canoe, with her sail; they therefore paddled across to the
+opposite side of the river, where the current was to a great extent
+nullified by eddies, and worked their way upstream, close inshore, until
+they reached the creek near which their own canoe remained--as they
+hoped--concealed, when, turning into it, they paddled up it until they
+arrived at their former landing-place, easily recognisable in the light
+afforded by the incessant lightning flashes.  In like manner they had no
+difficulty in finding the detached clump of bush in which they had
+hidden their canoe on the evening preceding their capture by the
+Mayubuna; and toward this they now hurried, eager to learn whether she
+still remained where they had put her.
+
+As they strode rapidly across the little meadow they noticed that the
+tall grass all round the clump in which they hoped to find their canoe
+was much beaten down, as though a number of people had been walking
+round it, and they also observed several well-defined trails leading
+away from the clump toward the forest, all of which sent their hopes
+down to zero, for the signs all pointed to the fact that someone--or
+something--had made frequent visits to that clump of bush--some of them
+quite recently; and if those visits had no reference to the hidden
+canoe, they could not very well guess what their purpose could be.  But
+one thing was evident: that clump of bush must be approached with
+caution; and accordingly they loosened their hangers in their sheaths,
+strung their bows, fitted an arrow to the string, and then stole
+cautiously forward, their figures strongly outlined in the vivid light
+of the incessantly flashing lightning.
+
+Reaching the spot where a slight thinning of the undergrowth had first
+suggested to them the idea of hiding the canoe there, Dick suddenly
+thrust Phil aside and, cautiously parting the bushes, proceeded to
+insinuate himself into the opening thus made, Phil following him close
+up, with his drawn hanger in his hand, raised ready to strike a blow if
+necessary, although, hemmed closely in on every side, as they were, by
+the tough, elastic stems and boughs of the undergrowth, it was almost as
+difficult to strike a blow with a sword as it was to effectively draw a
+bow.  Working his way quietly but rapidly forward in the effective
+manner which he had acquired by several months' practice in the
+penetration of such growth, Dick at last stretched out his hand and
+touched what he at once knew was the hull of the canoe.
+
+"All right, Phil," he exclaimed, delightedly, "here she is.  Now, if you
+will stay where you are, and widen the opening a little, so that she
+will pass out easily, I will go to the other end, and help you to lift
+her out."
+
+Accordingly, he proceeded to work his way along the length of the canoe,
+forcing the boughs aside to make a passage for himself, until he had
+reached to about mid-length of the canoe, when, the darkness in there
+being almost impenetrable in spite of the continuously flashing
+lightning, he reached his hand over to ascertain whether the sail and
+paddles were still in the craft as they had been left.  As he did so he
+became conscious of a strong musky odour, and while he was still
+pondering what this might portend his hand came in contact with a cold,
+clammy, scaly body which his touch told him, before he hastily withdrew
+his hand with a low cry of astonishment and repugnance, must be not far
+short of as thick as his own body.  And the next instant there occurred
+a sudden rustling that caused the canoe to shake and quiver and the
+paddles in her to rattle, a huge, dimly-seen shape upraised itself in
+the canoe, a gust of hot, fetid breath smote Dick in the face, and a
+loud angry hiss made itself heard even through the heavy booming of the
+thunder.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN.
+
+HOW THEY ESCAPED ONE GREAT DANGER, ONLY TO FALL INTO A GREATER.
+
+There was no need for Dick to ask himself, or his friend, what was the
+nature of this monstrous, indistinctly seen shape that upreared itself
+out of the canoe and poised its head within a foot of his face, its two
+eyes flashing baleful green fires into his as its long forked tongue
+flickered angrily in and out of its slightly opened jaws; he knew it at
+once for one of the enormous boas that dispute the sovereignty of the
+South American forest with the puma, and the black jaguar, that most
+rare and ferocious of all the cat tribe.  And, for an instant, so great
+was his astonishment at thus unexpectedly finding himself at close
+quarters--nay, face to face--with a creature big enough to envelop his
+body half a dozen times over, and strong enough to crush him into a
+shapeless mass, that he was completely paralysed.  He had no fear of the
+serpent, although he was perfectly aware of the awful danger in which he
+stood--he knew that in another instant the enormous body might fling its
+great coils about him and gradually bring into action the tremendous
+pressure which should crush every bone in his body to splinters--but, on
+the other hand, it never occurred to him to make the slightest effort to
+save himself from so hideous a fate.  But as he stood there perfectly
+quiescent for, as it seemed to him, a quarter of an hour or more--the
+actual length of time did not probably exceed three seconds--a sharp
+rattling of the dry twigs over his head and a heavy thud met his ears, a
+little shower of twigs and leaves rained down upon him, and at the same
+instant a terrific upheaval occurred in the canoe, coil upon coil the
+vast length of the serpent's body leaped into view, and plunged over the
+side, there was a violent rustling and crackling of branches for a few
+seconds as the monster snake writhed its irresistible way through the
+neighbouring bushes; and then it was gone.  And as the last sounds of
+its hurried retreat died away, Dick Chichester sank helplessly to the
+ground, violently sick.
+
+For a minute or two the paroxysms of vomiting were simply dreadful, and
+then the feeling of horrible nausea gradually passed away, and, pulling
+himself together, Dick struggled to his feet.
+
+"That's right, lad," he heard Stukely's voice say, as he felt his
+friend's encouraging pat on the shoulder.  "Feel better, now?  That's
+capital.  Faugh! what a disgusting stench!  No wonder it made you sick;
+I feel almost as bad myself.  But I'll bet a trifle that the brute feels
+a good deal worse than either of us, for I must have hit him pretty
+hard; indeed if it had not been for the thick growth that baulked me and
+hindered my stroke I could have cut his head clean off."
+
+"Well, you--you--have--saved my life, Phil, and I--" gasped Dick
+thickly, as he felt for the other's hand and pressed it convulsively.
+
+"Pooh! nonsense; that's all rubbish, you know," interrupted Phil,
+patting Dick on the back, "I should have cut at the brute just the same,
+if thou hadst not been there.  And now, if you feel all right again, let
+us get the canoe out and see what she looks like; a nice mess he will
+have made of her, I expect, making his lair in her; with a murrain on
+him!"
+
+"You have put something worse than a murrain on him, or I am no judge,"
+laughed Dick, a trifle hysterically.  "The brute will certainly die
+before morning.  Now, then, are you ready?  Then--lift!"
+
+With some difficulty they at length extricated the canoe from her
+hiding-place, to find, a good deal to their surprise, that, apart from
+two broken paddles, the craft was very little the worse for having been
+made the lair of a snake so big that he must have practically filled her
+from end to end.  Luckily the mast, yard, and sail had been placed in
+the bottom of her and so had not been broken, although almost the whole
+of the boa's ponderous weight must have rested upon them.  So when
+presently they put her into the water, they were rejoiced to find that
+although she had been lying dry for three months, so completely had she
+been shielded from the sun's rays that her hull was still intact and
+that she leaked not a drop.  This was far better than they had dared to
+hope for, so, stepping into her, appropriating the paddles of the other
+craft, and leaving the latter moored to the bank, they joyfully shoved
+off, and three minutes later were in the main stream, with the canoe's
+head pointed up the river.
+
+Meanwhile, the storm still raged as furiously as ever, the flashes of
+lightning were incessant, the rolling of the thunder was continuous and
+deafening, and the northerly wind was blowing so fiercely that the
+surface of the stream was whipped into small, foam-capped waves.  But
+they were not high enough to imperil the safety of the canoe, moreover
+the wind that roared so savagely aloft among the tree-tops and stripped
+off the dried leaves and rotten branches in blinding showers was a fair
+wind for the fugitives, so they stepped their mast, close-reefed their
+sail, and were presently foaming up the river in midstream--where,
+although they had a strong current to contend with, they were at least
+safe from the branches that flew hurtling through the air--as fast as a
+horse could trot.
+
+Now, all this time the storm had been a dry storm, that is to say, not a
+drop of rain had fallen from the bosom of the scowling clouds that
+seemed bursting with it, but it was bound to come, sooner or later, and
+come it did, with a vengeance, when our friends had been under way about
+an hour, and just as the canoe had shot into a broad, lagoon-like
+stretch of the river where it broadened out to about a mile in width,
+and where consequently the water was shallow and the current scarcely
+perceptible.  And well was it for them that the rain caught them just at
+that point, for otherwise they must perforce have landed until the worst
+of it had blown over.  For it came down, not in the sober, steady,
+respectable fashion in which it falls in temperate climates, but
+literally in sheets, through which it was not possible to see anything
+more distant than an ordinary boat's length.  With it came more wind, so
+that the canoe, with the gale right behind her and a close-reefed sail
+set which, in that condition, was not very much bigger than a man's
+shirt, rushed along with the foam boiling up level with her gunwale, and
+sometimes even in over it.  While this state of affairs prevailed, and
+nothing could be seen beyond the dripping sail glistening in the flash
+of the lightning, the Englishmen continued their headlong flight up the
+river, unable to see where they were steering but keeping the boat
+steadily dead before the wind, confident, from the glimpse they had had
+just before the rain came on, that so long as they were able to do this
+they would be running up the centre line of the river and could not come
+to very much harm.
+
+The first violence of the rain lasted about twenty minutes, and then it
+settled to a quiet, steady downpour for about an hour, during which the
+thunder and lightning gradually subsided until the thunder became a mere
+muttering in the extreme distance, and finally died away altogether.
+But the sheet lightning continued to play intermittently, low down on
+the northern horizon for some time longer, affording light enough for
+the fugitives to see where they were going, and as the wind still
+continued to blow strongly they held on, hour after hour, making the
+most of the splendid opportunity thus afforded them to make good their
+escape, so that when at length the morning came and the wind died down
+with the rising of the sun, they were far beyond the reach of pursuit by
+the Mayubuna.
+
+Now ensued a month of comparative uneventfulness, during which the two
+dauntless young Englishmen forced their way up that great river which,
+where it falls into the Amazon, is named the Maranon, while in its
+higher reaches it is called the Ucayali, and higher still, the
+Quillabamba.  But although their journey up this magnificent stream may
+be fitly described as comparatively uneventful, it must not be inferred
+therefrom that they met with no adventures at all; on the contrary,
+there was scarcely a day when they did not meet with an adventure of
+some sort, but it was scarcely of a sufficiently notable character to
+justify amplification in these pages, being merely the sort of
+occurrence that is inevitable in a river journey through wild country in
+the tropic zone.  For example, there were frequent rapids and cataracts
+to be negotiated, food to be sought for and obtained, in the course of
+which search many strange creatures were seen, many curious and
+wonderful sights witnessed, and occasionally savage animals encountered.
+Also Indians began to be met with at frequent intervals, some of whom
+proved friendly while others were hostile and would fain have disputed
+the right of the white men to be in the country at all--thanks to the
+tyrannical treatment which they had experienced at the hands of the
+Spaniard; and once they encountered a tribe of genuine Amazons, women
+who had turned the usual order of things upside down, having usurped the
+functions of the men, such as fighting, hunting, and fishing, while
+their men folk were compelled to cultivate the land, care for the
+cattle, cook the food, look after the children, and so on!  Then there
+was the gradual change in the nature of the vegetation and the character
+of the scenery as the travellers worked their way upward from the level
+of the great plains, or pampas, into the mountainous region toward
+Cuzco, with the ever-increasing difficulties of the navigation, which at
+length became so great that the canoe had to be abandoned altogether,
+and the journey continued by land, although they still followed the
+course of the river as closely as possible, in order that they might
+always be able to get water, and also because it served them as a guide.
+
+But it was not until they had been journeying a full month, after their
+escape from the Mayubuna, that their next really important adventure
+befell.  They had by this time climbed upward out of the low, hot,
+tropic forest region, and had attained an altitude at which the climate
+might almost be described as temperate, where, while the days were still
+distinctly hot, the nights were cool, sometimes even to the extent of
+sharpness, and where dense morning-fogs were frequent at that particular
+period of the year.  Those fogs were the cause of much inconvenience and
+delay to the pair; for they could neither hunt nor travel in a fog, the
+result being that they were frequently obliged to remain in camp until
+eight or nine o'clock in the morning, instead of resuming their journey
+at daybreak, as had heretofore been their custom.
+
+Such was the case on the particular morning when the young Englishmen
+encountered their next important adventure.  The sun had been above the
+horizon nearly two hours when at length the dense fog which had
+enveloped their camp cleared sufficiently to permit of their proceeding
+upon their journey, but it still hung about here and there in heavy
+wreaths, motionless in the still morning air, when they quite
+unexpectedly came upon one of the old Peruvian roads constructed by the
+Incas.  This road bore evidences of having at one time been a
+magnificent highway; but under the rule of the Spaniards it had been
+neglected until now it was little more than a sandy track over which
+Nature was fast resuming her sway.  But it happened to lead in
+approximately the right direction for the Englishmen, and heavy as was
+the travelling over it, it was less laborious than toiling over a rough,
+trackless country, they therefore promptly decided to follow it so long
+as it ran their way.
+
+About a mile from the spot where our two travellers came upon the road
+it entered a dense wood; and here the fog still hung thickly.  But the
+friends decided that this was of little consequence, since the road,
+though its surface was broken up and much overgrown, was still easily
+distinguishable; accordingly they plunged into the wood without
+hesitation.  A quarter of an hour later, as they rounded a bend in the
+road, they made the exceedingly unwelcome discovery that they had walked
+right into the midst of a party of some fifty Spanish soldiers who,
+having recently partaken of breakfast, were now resting by the roadside
+until the fog should clear.
+
+The encounter was so sudden, so absolutely unexpected on the part of the
+Englishmen, that almost before they realised the presence of the
+Spaniards the latter--who had heard Dick and Phil talking together as
+they approached--had surrounded them, rendering flight an impossibility,
+and in a trice the pair were disarmed and, hemmed in by an escort of a
+dozen armed men, conducted to the spot where the captain--a tall, dark,
+handsome man, in full armour, but without a helmet--with his horse
+standing beside him, was reclining against the trunk of an enormous
+pine.
+
+"Ah, Jorge!" exclaimed this individual, in Spanish, rising to his feet,
+as the party approached; "what have we here?  Prisoners?  Who and what
+are they?  Surely not Indians--although they might well be, from their
+garb."
+
+"Truly, senor Capitan, I know not who or what they are," answered the
+man addressed as Jorge, and who seemed, from his dress and equipment, to
+be some sort of inferior officer, possibly a sergeant; "but we heard
+them approaching along the road, and as their speech was strange I
+deemed it my duty to seize them; I therefore hastily arranged an ambush,
+into which they the next moment walked; and--here they are.  If they
+were not so dark in colour I should say that they might possibly be
+Englishmen."
+
+"Ingles! here!" exclaimed the captain.  "But that is impossible!  Who
+are you, picaros?"
+
+Now, during their six weeks' residence in Cartagena, under the
+hospitable roof of the senoritas Clara and Dolores, the two Englishmen
+had, by assiduous study, acquired a sufficient knowledge of Spanish to
+enable them to understand the nature of the question thus contemptuously
+addressed to them; and Phil--who, as usual, took the lead whenever any
+talking was to be done--at once replied:
+
+"Impossible or not, senor, we are Englishmen; but, beyond that bare
+statement of fact, you must pardon us if we decline to say anything."
+
+"Oh!" retorted the Spaniard.  "You decline to say anything, do you?
+Very good.  I am not at all curious to learn the history of such
+vagabonds as you appear to be.  The fact that you are--by your own
+confession--English, is enough for me.  But there are others who may be
+more interested than I; and, if so, you may rest assured that they will
+find a way to make you speak.  Take them away and secure them, Jorge,"
+he continued, addressing his subordinate; "and take care that they do
+not give you the slip.  I shall hold you responsible for their
+safekeeping.  And as soon as you have secured your prisoners to your
+satisfaction, let the men fall in, and we will resume our march."
+
+The man to whose charge our friends had been committed saluted, and then
+gave the signal for the prisoners to be led away, adding to his signal
+the significant order "Shoot the rascals at once upon the slightest sign
+of an attempt to escape."
+
+At a spot among the trees, situated about a hundred yards from where the
+captain had been standing, the little party came to the place where a
+dozen pack mules had been tethered; and a brief search among the
+heterogeneous articles which comprised the packs furnished the sergeant
+with a raw-hide rope, from which he cut off a couple of lengths
+sufficient to securely bind the hands of Phil and Dick firmly behind
+their backs, and this operation was at once so effectually performed
+that anything in the nature of escape by simply breaking away and
+running for one's life was rendered impossible, quite apart from the
+sinister and significant order to shoot which had been given to the
+soldiers.  A quarter of an hour later the entire party were on the move,
+and the two Englishmen had the mortification of finding themselves
+marched back along the road by which they had come.
+
+Shortly after passing the spot where our friends had struck the road,
+the path--for it was little more--curved away toward the left, and led
+along the top of an extensive plateau of rich pasture land, upon which,
+about midday, they sighted the first herd of cattle that the Englishmen
+had seen since their escape from the Mayubuna; and during the afternoon
+they saw other herds in the charge of peons, showing that the party were
+gradually approaching civilised territory; and about half an hour before
+sunset they marched into a small village, composed chiefly of adobe
+huts, where a halt was called for the night, and where our friends were
+confined in a ramshackle barn of a place in company with the sergeant
+and ten men.  That the sergeant was quite determined not to get into
+trouble by the neglect of any possible precaution soon became perfectly
+evident; for when, about half an hour after the arrival of the party at
+the village, supper was served, the individual in question gave orders
+that before the hands of the prisoners were released to enable them to
+convey food to their mouths, their ankles were to be securely bound
+together; and this was done.  Then, after supper was over, without
+unbinding the ankles of the prisoners their wrists were again bound
+together behind their backs, after which their ankles and wrists were
+drawn as closely together as they could be induced to come, and firmly
+lashed behind them; and in this constrained and exceedingly painful
+posture they were unceremoniously flung into opposite corners of the
+hut, where, upon the bare floor, and suffering torments from the vermin
+with which the place was infested, and from which, in their constrained
+position, they were helpless to defend themselves, they were left to
+pass the night as best they might.
+
+A seemingly interminable night of torture for the hapless prisoners came
+laggingly to an end at last when, about half an hour after daybreak, the
+lashings which had confined their limbs all through the hours of
+darkness were loosed, and they were allowed to scramble to their feet
+and walk to and fro for a few minutes before partaking of breakfast.
+After breakfast the march was resumed; and--not to dwell at unnecessary
+length upon this portion of the narrative--about an hour before sundown
+the entire party marched into a city which one of the soldiers surlily
+informed Phil was Cuzco; and here the two young Englishmen were at
+length safely deposited in an underground dungeon of a building which
+had once been one of the Inca's palaces; escape being rendered
+impossible by the simple process of chaining them to the wall by means
+of a heavy iron chain about six feet in length, one end of which was
+attached to an iron girdle locked round the prisoner's waist while the
+other end was welded to an iron ringbolt, the shank of which was deeply
+sunk into the solid masonry of the dungeon wall.
+
+On the morning of the following day they were temporarily released from
+their loathsome prison--where their bed had consisted merely of a thin
+layer of damp straw cast upon the stone flags with which the dungeon was
+paved, and where the only ventilation consisted of a small iron grating
+let into the masonry above the door--and conducted, under a strong
+guard, into the presence of the Governor of the city, who questioned
+them closely concerning their names, nationality, where they had come
+from, where they were bound for, and why they wished to go there.  At
+first the two Englishmen resolutely refused to answer any of the
+questions put to them; but when at length the Governor, growing
+exasperated at their obstinacy, threatened them with the torture of the
+boot, Phil so far satisfied the man's curiosity as to inform him
+truthfully of their names and nationality, adding the fictitious
+information that, having quarrelled with their captain, they had been
+forcibly put ashore somewhere in the Gulf of Darien, and had since been
+wandering aimlessly about the country, not knowing where to go or how to
+escape from it.  The story was well enough concocted, considering that
+it was made up on the spur of the moment; but it was evident that it did
+not altogether satisfy his Excellency, who finally ordered them to be
+taken back to their dungeon and kept there pending certain enquiries
+which he proposed to make.  Later in the day, when they once more found
+themselves alone, and again chained to the dungeon wall, Dick, in his
+simplicity, ventured to question Phil as to his reasons for resorting to
+fiction instead of boldly telling the truth, or refusing to say anything
+at all; to which Phil replied:
+
+"My gentle buzzard, if I had persisted in refusing the Don's request for
+information, we should have been put to the torture; for when these
+fellows threaten a thing like that, they usually mean it; or, if they do
+not actually mean it at the moment, they would unhesitatingly carry out
+their threat, rather than give themselves the lie; and we should show
+ourselves singularly deficient in common sense were we to submit to be
+tormented for hours, and probably maimed for life, rather than impart a
+little information--so long as that information is of such a nature as
+to harm nobody.  At all costs we must avoid being tortured, if we can;
+for how could we hope to escape, or, having escaped, hope to carry out
+our plans, if our bones were broken, or our limbs twisted out of joint.
+Therefore, as soon as torture was mentioned, I decided that the time had
+arrived when speech was to be preferred to silence.  But I was careful
+to avoid saying anything which might connect us with the _Adventure_;
+because sooner or later news of the exploits of that ship is certain to
+penetrate as far south even as this, and I have a suspicion that the
+participants in those exploits will not be altogether popular with the
+dons.  Also, we must remember that there was a rumour that two of the
+crew of that ship had found shelter and succour in a certain house in
+Cartagena; and if two persons belonging to the _Adventure_ should
+eventually be found at large in this country a certain colour of
+probability might be imparted to the rumour; in which case our gentle
+friends Clara and Dolores might get into serious trouble.  Therefore I
+thought it best on all accounts to mingle a little fiction with my
+facts.  And I trust that long before his Excellency's proposed enquiries
+have borne fruit we shall be far enough away from Cuzco and its
+Governor."
+
+"Do you think, then, that there is the slightest chance of our effecting
+our escape?" asked Dick, glancing expressly at the chain which bound him
+to the wall.
+
+The darkness of the dungeon was too profound for Phil to detect that
+glance; nevertheless he must have guessed at it, for he replied:
+
+"No, my son, I don't think anything of the sort; I know!  Don't ask me
+how I know, for I cannot tell you; but the knowledge is nevertheless
+here," tapping his forehead.  "Keep up your courage, youngster," he
+continued.  "Those chains are nothing.  Neither chains nor stone walls
+can long hold in restraint the man who is destined to be free; and I
+tell you that neither you nor I are doomed to die at the hands of the
+Spaniard.  More I cannot tell you; for although I am as certain as I am
+of my own existence that we shall escape, my foreknowledge is not clear
+enough to enable me to say how that escape is going to be effected."
+
+"I wish I felt half as confident as you seem to do about it," grumbled
+Dick.  "At present it appears to me that nothing short of a miracle can
+help us.  But--well, we shall see."
+
+The lad's pessimism seemed to be fully justified when, on the following
+day, the pair were once more released from the chains that confined them
+to the wall, and were summoned by their jailer to follow him.  They
+obeyed the summons with alacrity, each of them animated by a secret hope
+that an opportunity might present itself for them to break away from
+their custodian and effect their escape from the building, and
+eventually from the city; but this hope was nipped in the bud when,
+immediately outside the door of the dungeon, an armed guard, consisting
+of half a dozen soldiers and a corporal, were seen to be awaiting them.
+Evidently, the moment for escape was not yet.
+
+To the surprise of both, when the prisoners arrived at the top of the
+flight of stone steps leading from the dungeon they found that, instead
+of being again conducted along the passage which led to the Governor's
+quarters, as on the previous day, they were marched along another
+corridor, and presently they found themselves in the street.  But even
+now there was no encouragement for them to attempt to escape, because,
+besides being hemmed in by their escort of half a dozen soldiers, the
+entire party were surrounded by a gaping, scowling, execrating mob of
+ragged, unwashed ruffians, apparently the scum of the city, who would
+have effectually frustrated any attempt on the part of the Englishmen to
+break away from their guard and take to their heels; indeed if one might
+have judged from the expression of their coarse, brutal features, and
+the remarks which fell from their lips, nothing would have pleased them
+better than for the prisoners to have made such an attempt, since it
+would have afforded the mob a legitimate excuse for hunting the pair to
+death.  Nor were the prisoners permitted to remain very long in suspense
+with regard to their destination; for when presently the soldiers
+wheeled their charge into a certain street a loud murmur swept through
+the accompanying mob of--"Heretics! they are heretics, and are being
+taken to the Inquisition!"
+
+So indeed it proved; for some five minutes later they arrived before a
+big, gloomy, jail-like building, constructed of great blocks of stone,
+and having a number of exceedingly small apertures in the wall, each
+aperture being guarded by iron bars of quite unnecessary thickness.  The
+entrance to this place was a great gateway some twelve feet wide and
+nearly twice as high, fitted with a pair of enormously solid wooden
+doors, so heavy that each leaf was fitted with a roller running upon a
+quadrant rail let into the pavement to facilitate opening.  But it soon
+became evident that these ponderous gates were only opened on special
+occasions; for when, having halted the little party, the corporal in
+charge tugged at a handle attached to a chain which hung down from an
+aperture in the wall, and a bell was heard to clang somewhere in the far
+interior of the building, a small wicket cut in one of the big gates was
+presently thrown open by an individual in the garb of a lay brother, and
+the soldiers with their prisoners were invited to pass through it.
+
+The party now found themselves in a lofty, vaulted passage, some
+twenty-five feet in length, the farther end of which opened upon a paved
+courtyard surrounded by cloisters surmounted by lofty buildings
+massively constructed of the same dark-grey stone as the building
+through which they had just passed, and, like it, provided with windows
+strongly protected by massive iron bars, only instead of being all
+small, as were the windows in the exterior walls, some of those which
+looked out upon the courtyard were of very considerable dimensions.  At
+the opposite side of the courtyard, facing the passage through which the
+party had just passed, was another door, giving admission to what
+appeared to be the main building, and to this they were now conducted by
+the lay brother, who, having unlocked the door, threw it open and bade
+them enter the big, gloomy cavern-like, ill-lighted hall which now stood
+revealed.  Once inside this place, the prisoners were delivered over to
+the custody of a huge, brawny brute in the shape of a man who, from the
+fact that he bore a bunch of big keys attached to his belt, was no doubt
+the jailer of the institution.  Then a tall, thin, ascetic-looking man
+in the garb of a priest stepped forward, scanned the two prisoners
+attentively, carefully compared their appearance with the description of
+them contained in a document, which the corporal handed to him, signed
+the document and returned it to the corporal, dismissed him and his
+followers, and waved the jailer to lead his charges away, which the
+fellow immediately did, in morose silence.  Their way lay down a long,
+narrow corridor, having doors opening out of it at intervals on either
+side; and at the precise moment when the prisoners arrived opposite one
+of these doors a long-drawn wail, rising to a piercing shriek, rang out
+from behind it, causing their flesh to creep upon their bones with
+horror, so eloquent of keen, excruciating, almost unendurable physical
+anguish was the sound.
+
+The jailer, who was leading the way, glanced over his shoulder at his
+prisoners with a smile of such gloating, Satanic suggestiveness and
+cruelty on his heavy features as the cry pealed forth that, on the
+instant, the feeling of passive repugnance with which the two Englishmen
+had thus far regarded the fellow was converted into fierce, hot, active,
+unreasoning hatred; for the fraction of a second they glanced
+questioningly into each other's eyes, then, each reading in that
+lightning glance the thought of the other, the pair flung themselves
+upon the fellow.  And while Dick, exerting all his giant strength,
+pinned the man's arms to his sides, and at the same time, by a deft
+movement of his left foot, tripped the fellow up so that he crashed
+violently forward upon his face on the stone pavement of the passage,
+Phil clasped the man's throat with his two hands, compressing his
+windpipe in such a vice-like grip that it was utterly impossible for the
+fellow to utter the slightest sound, and thus locked together, the three
+went down in a bunch under the impetus of the sudden attack, the jailer
+being undermost.  The hard pavement seemed to fairly ring with the
+violent impact of the man's skull upon it, and the next instant Dick
+felt the fellow's tense muscles relax as though the violence of the blow
+had either partially or wholly stunned him, whereupon the youngster,
+still acting upon an impulse that seemed to emanate from somewhere
+outside himself, pushed Phil on one side, flung himself in a kneeling
+posture upon the prostrate jailer's shoulders, and, grasping the man by
+the hair with both hands, pulled up the fellow's head and dashed it
+furiously upon the pavement again thrice, after which the victim lay
+silent, inert, to all appearance dead.
+
+"Roll him over, quick, and unbuckle his belt; we must have his keys,"
+hissed Phil in Dick's ear, and before five seconds had passed the two
+Englishmen were on their feet standing over their victim, while Phil
+rapidly examined the keys, one after the other.  Quickly he selected one
+that showed signs of more frequent wear than the others, and then
+glanced keenly about him.  They were near the far end of the corridor,
+which ended in a wall lighted by a fair-sized window, and there were
+only four more doors to be passed, two on either side, before the end of
+the corridor was reached.
+
+"Stay here until I beckon you, and then bring the man to me," whispered
+Phil, and darted off to the end of the corridor, leaving Dick to mount
+guard over the prostrate body of the jailer.  Rapidly, yet with the
+utmost coolness, Phil tried the key which he had selected in the lock of
+one of the farther doors.  It slid in, turned, and the door swung open.
+A single glance sufficed to assure Phil that the door was that of a
+cell, and that the cell was unoccupied, whereupon he beckoned Dick, who
+hoisted the unconscious jailer upon his shoulders, bore him to the cell,
+and flung him unceremoniously upon the heap of straw which was
+apparently intended to serve as a bed.
+
+"Now, the belt, quick," whispered Phil, who had followed, gently closing
+the door behind him; and, rolling the still insensible body over on its
+face, the pair bent over it and with deft fingers contrived to fasten
+the ankles and wrists of their victim together in such a fashion, that
+the more the man struggled the tighter would he draw the ligature.  Then
+using the formidable-looking knife which the man had worn suspended from
+his belt, they formed a gag by cutting strips from their skin clothing
+and wrapping it round the largest key of the bunch, which they detached
+from the chain and inserted in their victim's mouth, thus rendering it
+as impossible for him to cry out as it was for him to move.  Having
+disposed of the jailer in such a fashion that he would not be likely to
+give trouble for the next hour or two, the pair left the cell, closed
+and locked the door behind them, and stood listening intently to
+ascertain whether the sounds of the recent struggle had attracted
+attention.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIXTEEN.
+
+WHAT HAPPENED IN THE INQUISITION AT CUZCO.
+
+For perhaps half a minute the pair stood outside the cell door,
+listening with all their ears, but not the slightest sound broke the
+silence which seemed to pervade the whole of the vast building.  Then,
+from somewhere in the far distance, there came the sound of a door being
+closed, and almost at the same instant a quavering cry, rising to a
+long-drawn shriek of agony, again pealed forth from behind that awful
+door a few paces along the corridor.
+
+"For mercy's sake, what is it?" whispered Dick, with ashen lips.
+"Surely such sounds can never be human?"
+
+"They are, though!" replied Phil in a low, tense whisper.  "They are the
+cries of some poor soul under the torture--`being put to the question'
+as these fiends of Inquisitors express it.  Oh! if I could but lay my
+hands upon one of them, I would--but come along, lad; we must not dally
+here.  If we are again taken after what we have done our fate will be--
+well, something that won't bear thinking of!"  Then, seizing Dick by the
+arm and dragging the lad after him, Stukely proceeded softly on tiptoe
+along the corridor.
+
+They had arrived within a yard of the door from behind which those
+dreadful sounds had emanated when it suddenly opened and a tall, dark
+man emerged, clad in a long black habit girt about his waist with a cord
+of knotted rope; his features were partially obscured by the hood of the
+garment, which he wore drawn over his head so that it stood up in a sort
+of peak, and wearing round his neck a massive gold chain, from which a
+gold crucifix depended.  His back happened to be toward them, and he had
+closed and latched the door behind him before he turned and saw the two
+Englishmen within arm's length of him.  For a second he stood
+motionless, regarding the two wild-looking figures with blank amazement;
+then a look of mingled terror and anger leapt into his eyes, and it was
+evident that he was about to open his mouth and shout an alarm.  But the
+cry never passed his lips, for in that instant Stukely was upon him with
+the silent, irresistible bound of a jaguar, and in the next he was
+dragging wildly at the Englishman's hands to tear them away from his
+throat.  Nevertheless he might as well have striven to force his way
+through the solid masonry of the adjoining wall as to tear away those
+two relentless thumbs that were compressing his windpipe and choking the
+life out of him, and presently he grew black in the face, his eyes
+rolled upward until only the whites of them were visible, his grip on
+Phil's wrists relaxed and gave way, his arms fell limp to his sides, his
+knees yielded, and he sank slowly to the ground, or rather, was lowered
+to it by Stukely, who still maintained his remorseless grip upon the
+other's throat, kneeling upon one knee beside the now prostrate body.
+
+Presently, however, Phil rose to his feet, and with his eyes still fixed
+upon the body of the priest, whispered to Dick:
+
+"I would fain break the fellow's neck, and so in some sort avenge that
+poor soul in there; but we have no time for vengeance now.  We must be
+clear of this accursed building before that villain revives or our fate
+is sealed; so come along, lad."  Therewith the pair resumed their
+passage along the corridor.
+
+A few seconds later they found themselves back in the great, gloomy
+entrance hall of the building, with not a soul in sight in any
+direction.  Phil came to a halt.
+
+"Now, where is that lay brother who admitted us?" he whispered to Dick.
+"We must have him, or rather, his keys; for without them we cannot get
+out of the place."
+
+"I believe," whispered Dick in reply, "he went in there"--indicating a
+door--"after he had let out the corporal and his guard."
+
+"Then," returned Phil, "let us see if he is in there now."  Then,
+crossing to the door, he tried the handle, turned it, flung open the
+door, and boldly entered the room, closely followed by Dick, who closed
+the door behind him.
+
+The apartment was empty of human occupants, and otherwise presented a
+bare and uninviting aspect, the only furniture in it consisting of a
+table and two chairs.  It was imperfectly lighted by a small window
+looking out upon the cloisters which surrounded the courtyard that the
+prisoners had crossed a quarter of an hour earlier, and a bell suspended
+near the ceiling and attached to a chain leading out through a slit in
+the wall seemed to indicate that it was the room in which the warder of
+the outer gates was accustomed to sit.  But the man was certainly not
+then in the room, nor was there anything to indicate that he had
+recently been there.  If therefore Dick's belief that he had seen the
+lay brother enter had been well-founded the man must have left again
+almost immediately, while the two Englishmen were being conducted to
+their cell by the now imprisoned jailer.  True, he might have passed on
+to an inner room; for there was another door opposite to that by which
+Dick and Phil had entered.
+
+After a hurried glance round, the two friends, moved as it might have
+been by the same impulse, crossed to this door, and, quietly opening it,
+glanced into the adjoining apartment.  A single glance round this room
+sufficed to show that the man whom they sought was not in it, for it
+also was empty, so far as human occupants were concerned.  It was a room
+of very considerable size, and was apparently the refectory, for two
+rows of tables, each capable of seating about fifty persons, ran
+lengthwise down the hall, and were draped with coarse white cloths upon
+which were set out an array of platters, water pitchers, knives, and the
+rest of the paraphernalia used at meals.  This room was very much
+loftier and better lighted than the one which the Englishmen had just
+left, there being four large windows in the outer wall, overlooking a
+large and beautifully kept garden in which several people were working,
+some of them attired in the garb of monks, while others wore the dress
+of lay brothers.  There were two doors in this room, in addition to the
+one by which our friends had entered, one being at the far end of the
+room and communicating with the kitchen of the establishment, if the
+sounds and odours which emanated therefrom were to be trusted, while the
+other and much larger door occupied the centre of the inner wall and was
+obviously used by the inmates of the establishment at meal times.
+
+"Now, what can have become of the man?" demanded Phil in an angry
+whisper, as the pair glanced round the room and noted its deserted
+appearance.  "Are you quite sure that you were not mistaken as to the
+door by which you saw him enter?"
+
+"No," answered Dick in the same subdued tones, "I am not quite sure; but
+I believe I am not mistaken all the same.  But, Phil," he continued, "is
+it really necessary that we should find him?  Cannot we get out of the
+building in some other and safer way than by finding that man, knocking
+him down, and taking his keys from him?  Besides, even if the way were
+free for us to leave here this instant, where could we go?  We could not
+walk half a dozen yards along the street, attired as we now are, without
+attracting attention and being recognised as strangers.  We should
+inevitably be recaptured within ten minutes!"
+
+"Then, what a plague are we to do?" demanded Phil, impatiently.  "To
+remain here is to court recapture as surely as if we showed ourselves in
+the streets.  Why, even now, at any moment a man may enter this room,
+see us, and give the alarm."
+
+"Yes," agreed Dick; "that is very true; and no doubt if we remain here
+long enough that is what will happen.  But this Inquisition seems to be
+a rambling old pile of a place, and I cannot help thinking that it must
+contain many an obscure, little-used recess or cupboard in which we
+might find at least temporary safety and concealment until the small
+hours of the morning, when we might leave the place and make our way out
+of the city with comparatively little risk."
+
+"You are right, Dick," agreed Stukely; "that is undoubtedly our best
+plan--if Dame Fortune will but stand by us.  But it will be plaguey
+risky for us to attempt to remain in here until the small hours of the
+morning.  How can we possibly hope to avoid being seen by some prowling
+priest or lay brother within the next twelve hours?  But pish! what is
+the use of anticipating trouble?  Your plan is certainly the right one,
+and the sooner that we see about carrying it out the better.  Now it is
+quite evident that there is no place of concealment in this room, so
+there is nothing to be gained by dawdling here.  Also, we know that it
+is useless to retrace our steps; and yonder is obviously the kitchen,
+and must therefore be avoided.  That leaves us with no resource but to
+try the big door; so come along and let us see how far our luck will
+hold good."
+
+Without further ado the pair advanced cautiously to the door which Phil
+had indicated, and the latter laid his hand upon the handle, which he
+turned gradually and noiselessly as far as it would go; then, having
+noticed that the door opened inward, he drew it toward him the fraction
+of an inch and glanced through the slit thus created.  Phil now found
+that he was looking into a long and wide corridor, or passage,
+imperfectly lighted by two small windows, one at each end.  There was no
+one to be seen in that part of the corridor which came within his
+somewhat limited range of vision, so, emboldened thereby, he opened the
+door widely enough to enable him to peer out and take a hasty glance
+along the full length of the corridor.  That glance assured him that,
+for the moment at least, the passage was empty; and at the same moment
+he became conscious of the low, sweet notes of an organ being played
+somewhat toward the far end of the building.
+
+"Good!" he whispered excitedly to Dick.  "Do you hear that, lad?  It is
+an organ; which means that the chapel is not very far away; and if we
+can but gain its interior we shall be reasonably safe; for there is sure
+to be a dark nook somewhere in it where we may be able to lie concealed
+for a few hours.  Since the coast seems to be clear just now we may as
+well proceed upon our hunt at once; all hands are probably now engaged
+upon their regular morning's business, and, if so, we may be lucky
+enough to go a good way without meeting anybody, whereas later on the
+whole place will probably be alive with people.  So, come along, lad; no
+time like the present."
+
+Silently as ghosts the pair slid through the open doorway into the
+corridor, drawing the door to and closing it behind them in the very
+nick of time; for as Phil released his hold upon the handle he heard the
+door leading from the kitchen to the refectory open, the hitherto
+subdued sounds of activity in the kitchen suddenly became greatly
+intensified, while voices and the sound of shuffling sandals on the
+stone floor of the refectory came through the door which he had just
+closed.
+
+"Quick, lad, for your life," whispered Stukely in his companion's ear.
+"This way, and run; for we are lost if they come into the corridor and
+find us here!"  And, running tiptoe on their bare feet, the two sped
+down the corridor like mist wreaths driven before the wind.
+
+At the very end of the corridor they came upon a large doorway fitted
+with folding doors, one leaf of which was ajar, and through the aperture
+the notes of the organ softly played floated out to them.  With the tips
+of his fingers Phil gently pushed the door a trifle wider open, and,
+peering in, saw that they were indeed at one of the entrances to the
+chapel which formed part of the Holy Inquisition of Cuzco.  The building
+of which Phil thus obtained a glimpse was unexpectedly large; so large,
+indeed, that he instantly jumped to the conclusion that it was intended
+for the use of the general public as well as for the members of the
+Order, the accommodation being sufficient for at least four hundred
+worshippers.  The door through which they were peering was situated
+underneath a gallery, in which was placed the organ loft, for the notes
+of the instrument floated down to them from immediately overhead.  To
+the right of them stretched away the main body of the church, one half
+of it--the half nearest them--being fitted with pews, while the other
+half, toward the great west door, was furnished with common
+rush-bottomed chairs, evidently intended for the use of casual
+worshippers and the lower orders generally.  To the left lay the
+chancel, fitted with exquisitely carved and gilded stalls, tall,
+elaborately worked brass standards for lamps, gaudily painted and gilded
+statues of various saints, a superb reredos in marble surmounted by a
+cross bearing a fine lifesize figure of the Redeemer; the whole
+illuminated by the rainbow tints which streamed in through the beautiful
+stained glass of the magnificent east window, and a faint odour of
+incense still clung to the air of the place.  The main thing, however,
+or at least that which chiefly interested the two interlopers, was, that
+although the west door stood wide open, affording a glimpse of a broad
+gravel path leading up through a superb garden, beyond which could be
+seen a road, houses, and the traffic of foot passengers, horsemen, and
+vehicles, there was not a soul to be seen inside the church, the
+organist being apparently its only occupant for the moment.  Phil
+therefore wasted no more time, but, pushing the door wide enough open to
+afford admittance to himself and his companion, slipped through,
+dragging Dick after him, and pushed to the door again behind him,
+leaving it ajar as he had found it.  Then, advancing a pace or two, but
+taking care to keep well beneath the shadow of the gallery, the pair
+made a rapid but comprehensive survey of the building in search of a
+hiding-place where they might safely lie _perdu_ for the next few hours.
+
+They noted several places that looked quite promising, if they could but
+reach them, only, unfortunately, there was the organist up aloft, and
+doubtless an assistant to blow the bellows.  If either of them should
+chance to glance down into the body of the church at the moment when the
+fugitives happened to be making for the chosen spot, all would be lost.
+For instance, the choir stalls rose in tiers one behind another, and
+that of course meant that beneath the floor of the rearmost tier there
+would be a hollow space amply sufficient to conceal a dozen men--if they
+could but obtain access to it.  Then there was the high altar.  It was
+doubtless hollow, and possibly access to its interior might be obtained
+at the back; but to gain either of those positions it would be necessary
+to pass over a part of the pavement which Phil conjectured might be seen
+from the organ loft, and he felt very strongly disinclined to take the
+risk of being seen after they had thus far so successfully evaded
+detection.  But he fully recognised that he must not waste much time in
+making up his mind.  There was the priest whom they had left senseless
+outside the door of the torture chamber, to say nothing of the jailer.
+It was simply marvellous that the one had not yet been found or the
+other missed.  As the thought flashed through his mind a confused sound
+of shouting and scurrying feet came to his ears, muffled by distance,
+through the slightly opened door.  And he knew in an instant what that
+meant.  The thing which he had all along been fearing, which indeed he
+knew must very soon happen, had happened; a discovery of some sort had
+been made.  Probably the priest had recovered sufficiently to raise an
+alarm, and now in a minute or two the whole place would be swarming with
+searchers, hunting in every possible and impossible place for the
+missing prisoners.  Something must be done, some decision arrived at
+instantly.  There was no more time for indecision, and Phil once more
+flung a lightning glance about the building.  The walls of the chancel
+on either side of the high altar and up to the level of the sill of the
+glorious east window were draped with rich tapestry, depicting on a
+background of gold thread, on the one side the Annunciation, and on the
+other the Apotheosis of the Blessed Virgin; and Phil noticed that these
+tapestries were suspended from rings strung upon massive brass rods,
+which were supported by brass brackets let into the wall.  It seemed to
+him that those brackets were of such a length as to afford space enough
+for a man to hide between the tapestry--which reached right down to the
+floor--and the wall.  The organ was softly breathing out the notes of
+the "Agnus Dei" from a Mass which the organist was evidently practising,
+and the man would probably be intent only upon his music.  The
+organ-blower, Phil decided, must be risked--perhaps he would be behind
+the organ, or in some part of the loft from which the chancel could not
+be seen;--and, as the voices outside grew louder and seemed to be
+drawing nearer, he plucked Dick by the sleeve, beckoned him to follow,
+and the pair stole softly up the length of the chancel to the altar,
+dropped on their knees, lifted the bottom edge of the tapestry, crawled
+underneath it, let it fall behind them, and rose to their feet in the
+enclosed space between wall and tapestry at the precise moment when a
+great bell began to peal out its alarm note from some distant part of
+the building.  The organist almost immediately ceased playing, and a
+minute later the soft pad-pad of his own and another's sandalled feet
+descending a wooden staircase not far away came, muffled, to the ears of
+the fugitives; then followed the slam of a door, the turn of a key in a
+lock, and the two friends knew themselves to be alone in the church,
+with the west door wide open, affording them the means of instant flight
+into the outer world, if they chose to avail themselves of it.
+
+But that thought came to them only to be rejected on the instant.  They
+were still clad in the skins of beasts, which had taken the place of
+their worn-out clothing; they were unkempt, unshaven, and altogether far
+too conspicuous in every way to justify them in venturing into the
+streets by daylight, or indeed at any time while the inhabitants were
+abroad, therefore they must remain in hiding until darkness fell and the
+people had retired to rest; and both fervently hoped that the citizens
+of Cuzco kept early hours.  Then they began to feel hungry, for it was
+now several hours since they had tasted food; but they had grown
+accustomed to such petty discomforts as hunger and thirst long ago.
+They were as nothing compared with the torture which that poor wretch
+must have been undergoing in the room yonder; and as Phil thought of the
+possibility that, even yet, Dick and he might be recaptured and
+subjected to similar suffering, he worked his way along the foot or two
+of distance that separated him from the high altar, and proceeded to
+examine the latter.  As he had more than half-expected, the structure
+proved to be hollow, being built of massive slabs of marble as to the
+front and sides, but having no back, and for some reason which he was
+quite unable to divine, but which he was most heartily thankful for,
+there was a space left between the sides of the structure and the wall
+of the church just wide enough for him to squeeze through without undue
+discomfort, and so gain the interior of the altar.  This seemed a
+distinctly safer place to hide in than merely behind the tapestry; there
+was room for three or four men to bestow themselves comfortably, and
+they could lie down if they chose, therefore they lost no time in
+transferring themselves to this new place of concealment; and they had
+scarcely settled themselves comfortably therein when they heard a door
+noisily unlocked and thrown open, and the sound of many sandalled feet
+swarming into the church.
+
+Judging from the sounds alone, the fugitives crouching in the interior
+of the altar estimated that about a dozen people had entered the church.
+They seemed to rush forward a few paces and then halt, as though
+staring about them; then followed a few brief, desultory movements, and
+silence.  Finally, a voice said, in Spanish:
+
+"Well, it is perfectly clear that they are not here."
+
+"From what do you draw that inference, brother?" demanded another voice.
+
+"First, from the fact that the door by which we entered was locked on
+the other side; and next, because the great west door is wide open,"
+answered the voice which had first spoken.
+
+"True," answered the second voice.  "Yet neither of those facts is proof
+that the fugitives are not lurking somewhere in the church.  Do you ask
+why?  I will tell you.  First, Brother Gregorio has been here this
+morning, as usual, practising; and we know that it is a habit of his to
+leave the door communicating with the domestic part of the establishment
+unfastened, and very often open, while he practises.  Therefore, if he
+did the same thing to-day--and I happen to know that he did, for I was
+in the church myself half an hour ago--it would be an easy matter for
+the fugitives to gain access to this building and conceal themselves
+somewhere in it.  As to the open door yonder, I attach no importance at
+all to it, for the Englishmen are much too conspicuous in their
+appearance and attire to venture abroad in the city by daylight; they
+would be recaptured in less than five minutes if they did so, and I give
+them credit for being sensible enough to know it.  Consequently, I
+maintain that they are still somewhere within the walls of the
+establishment, and, as likely as not, may be in this church; therefore
+let the place be thoroughly searched at once."
+
+Nothing more was said; but sounds of renewed activity immediately
+followed upon the order to search, the scuffle of footsteps along the
+aisles and on the steps leading to the organ loft distinctly reaching
+the lurking pair as they crouched beneath the altar intently listening,
+to gather, if they might, some indication of the direction in which the
+search was proceeding.  Presently, to their discomfiture, they heard the
+footsteps of apparently two persons approaching the enclosed space
+within the altar rails, the pair talking in low tones as they
+approached.
+
+"For my part," said one, "I entirely disagree with Fray Felipe.  I
+believe the English heretics have escaped, and by that open door; for,
+if not, where are they?  They cannot be in the other part of the
+establishment, for, if so, they must have been seen by someone--unless,
+indeed, they are in league with the devil and have the power of
+disappearing at will.  And they are not in this church; because if they
+had come here they must have seen that open door, and nobody shall
+persuade me that, seeing it, they would not avail themselves of the
+opportunity which it offers."
+
+"Nay, brother," answered the other; "I think Fray Felipe is right; and
+so would you, had you seen the two men.  They looked and were dressed
+like savages, and could never--"
+
+"Pooh!" interrupted the first, impatiently, "that is all nonsense.  If
+they looked as conspicuous as all that what was there to prevent them
+from entering the vestry and appropriating a couple of the spare habits
+that are always hanging there?  If they did that they could walk out of
+the church in broad daylight, and nobody would dream of challenging
+them.  Now, if they are in the church at all, it is my belief that they
+will be found behind this tapestry.  You take that side, brother, and I
+will take this.  Just run your hand along the length of the tapestry;
+and if they are lurking behind it, you will soon find them."
+
+"Ay," grumbled the other, "and, as like as not, be slain by them for my
+pains.  I tell you, brother, that I like it not.  No, they are not
+here," he concluded, as he ran his hand along the tapestry in an
+exceedingly perfunctory manner without discovering any sign of the
+missing prisoners.  "I am beginning to think, with you, Brother Jose,
+that the rascals have escaped."
+
+"Of course they have," agreed the first speaker.  "No, they are not on
+this side either.  Ah!"--as a great bell began to toll somewhere
+aloft--"there is the bell for Mass, thank heaven! and now this foolish
+search will be brought to an end."  Therewith the footsteps retired,
+much to the relief of the concealed Englishmen, who were momentarily
+dreading that it might occur to one or the other of the searchers to
+turn up the tapestry and peep into the opening beneath and behind the
+altar.  But it did not--possibly neither of the worthy brothers was
+particularly anxious to find himself suddenly face to face with a couple
+of desperate Englishmen--and presently the sound of retreating footsteps
+died away in the distance and all was still in the great church.
+
+But not for long; the lurking pair had only time to dispose themselves a
+little more comfortably on the hard marble pavement when other footsteps
+were faintly heard, accompanied by the occasional scrape of a chair in
+the distance, and the fugitives knew that a congregation was assembling.
+Then the great bell ceased to toll, the organ once more poured forth
+its sweet and solemn notes, a door opened, measured footsteps were heard
+approaching, there was a slight momentary bustle as the brethren of the
+Order filed in and took their places; and then the service began, and
+the Englishmen, who were both lovers of music, enjoyed an hour of such
+keen delight as they had not experienced for many a long day.
+
+In due time the solemn service came to an end, the congregation retired,
+there ensued an opening and closing of doors, the sounds of which echoed
+and reverberated hollowly along the aisles and among the arches of the
+sacred building, and then a great silence fell.  For a time the
+fugitives remained huddled up in their hiding-place, silent and
+listening; but at length, convinced that the church was indeed empty,
+they began in low, whispered tones to discuss their situation.  The two
+priests who unwittingly came so near to finding them had furnished them
+with a hint--if they cared to avail themselves of it--as to how they
+might make good their escape even in broad daylight, and, so far as Dick
+was concerned, he would have been quite willing to act upon it by
+raiding the vestry there and then, appropriating one of the habits which
+Fray Jose had said were to be found there, and sallying forth into the
+city without more ado, for his bones were by this time growing sore with
+lying so long upon the hard, cold marble.  But although Phil's bones
+were aching quite as much as Dick's, the elder of the two was very
+strongly disinclined to run the slightest unnecessary risk; he argued
+that, the church having once been subjected to a tolerably thorough
+search, he and Dick were reasonably safe, so long as they chose to
+remain where they were, and that, to venture abroad prematurely, even in
+disguise, for the mere sake of avoiding a few hours of further
+discomfort, would be the very height of folly.  For, how could they tell
+at what moment a door might open and someone enter the church and
+discover them--supposing them to be so foolish as to venture out of
+their place of concealment?  And who knew how many more services were to
+be held during the day?  If it happened that there were no more, then
+indeed it might be safe enough for them to venture out and go in search
+of the vestry and those spare habits; but not otherwise.  Moreover, how
+could they be sure that the habits, if found, would actually prove to be
+as effective a disguise as Fray Jose had asserted they would?  Phil knew
+enough about the Roman Catholic religion to be fully aware that those
+who professed it were sometimes prompted to stop the first priest they
+might chance to meet, and discuss with him some spiritual difficulty, or
+even to invoke his aid in some merely temporal trouble; and what sort of
+a figure, he asked Dick, would they cut in such a case as that?  No;
+hungry and thirsty as he was, and sore as were his limbs through long
+contact with the hard pavement, he was all for remaining where they
+were, at least until nightfall, when probably, if they could procure
+effective disguises, they might venture to sally forth and essay the
+attempt to get out of the city.  And so cogent were his arguments that
+at length he succeeded in silencing Dick, if he did not altogether
+convince him.
+
+Phil's conjecture that there might be further services in the church
+before the day was over proved to be correct, there being two, the last
+of which occurred late enough in the evening to necessitate the lighting
+of the lamps in the building.  And it was while the lamps were being
+lighted that the two Englishmen learned, from the gossip of those
+engaged in illuminating the grand altar, that much perplexity and
+uneasiness had resulted from the fact that, despite the most rigorous
+search of the entire city, no trace of the missing prisoners had thus
+far been discovered, and that the conclusion had therefore been at
+length arrived at that they must have got clear away.  This knowledge
+was eminently satisfactory to the two whom it most intimately concerned,
+for it seemed to indicate that those engaged in the search had at length
+lost heart, and that if the hunt was still to be maintained it would
+only be in a more or less perfunctory manner, and that consequently the
+fugitives might, by the exercise of a proper amount of caution, hope to
+make good their escape from the city.
+
+At length the last service of the day was over, the lurking pair heard
+the closing and locking of the various doors by which the general public
+entered the building, and this was followed by the shuffling of feet
+here and there as the lamps and candles were extinguished, one after the
+other, the low murmur of voices gradually died away, and finally there
+came the loud slamming of a door which, from the direction of the sound,
+the fugitives conjectured to be the door beneath the organ loft, by
+which they had entered the church during the morning, then followed the
+grating of a key in a lock, the rattle which indicated the withdrawal of
+the key, and--silence.  At last, thought the weary pair behind the
+altar, the church was empty, and closed for the night.
+
+To make assurance doubly sure, however, they agreed to remain where they
+were for another half-hour; but when at length they judged that period
+to have elapsed they crept very cautiously out of the place of
+concealment which had served them so well, and made their way to the
+choir stalls, upon the soft cushions of which they rested their weary
+limbs for a short time while their eyes were growing accustomed to the
+gloom of the place.  Then, having agreed that a certain small door,
+immediately opposite that by which they had found their way into the
+church, must be the one giving access to the vestry, they stole silently
+across the pavement, and Phil, having first satisfied himself that the
+room, or whatever it was that lay beyond, was in darkness, found the
+handle and proceeded to turn it as cautiously as though he believed the
+place on the other side to be full of people.  The door proved to be
+unlocked; and a minute later the fugitives found themselves, as they had
+expected, in the vestry of the church.  The room was a small one, but it
+was lighted by a fairly large window, and as the night happened to be
+brilliantly fine and starlit, the gloom here was not nearly so intense
+as it had been in the interior of the church, consequently they were
+able to distinguish without much difficulty that there were indeed, as
+Fray Jose had said, a number of garments of some sort hanging from pegs
+on one of the walls.  Why these garments should be kept there the
+fugitives never troubled themselves to conjecture, the fact that they
+were there was sufficient for them; and they lost no time in
+appropriating and donning two of them.  They were long black garments
+reaching from shoulder to ankle, with large hoods which might be drawn
+up over the head, almost entirely concealing the features when the
+wearer was out of doors, and were confined round the waist by a girdle
+of knotted rope.  Attired in these, the pair felt that they might safely
+brave any but the very closest scrutiny, and they therefore had no
+scruples about sallying forth into the open forthwith.
+
+The window of the vestry overlooked a portion of the extensive garden, a
+glimpse of which they had gained through the great west door of the
+church earlier in the day, and, peering out through it, the two friends
+saw that there was a thick shrubbery at no great distance that looked as
+though it might afford them good cover from which to reconnoitre the
+ground prior to their attempt to gain the street beyond, and they at
+once decided to make for it in the first instance.  Another moment and
+they were at the outer door, which proved to be locked.  But the key
+was, luckily, in the lock, and on the inner side of the door, that
+slight difficulty was therefore soon got over; and a minute later the
+pair drew a great breath of relief as they found themselves once more in
+the open air--and free.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVENTEEN.
+
+HOW THEY ESCAPED FROM THE INQUISITION.
+
+Yes; free--in a sense; yet not wholly so; for they were still within the
+boundaries of the Holy Inquisition, although outside the building.  To
+have done so much as they had, however; to have evaded capture for the
+best part of a day, and finally to have won outside the walls,
+undetected, was no mean achievement; and they felt that, having
+accomplished so much, the rest ought to be an easy matter.
+
+Standing within the deep shadow of the doorway for a minute or two after
+they had silently closed the door behind them, the pair searched with
+their gaze as much of the garden as came within the range of their
+vision, and nowhere could they detect any sign of human presence within
+it; indeed they scarcely expected to do so, for it was now altogether
+too dark for anything in the nature of gardening operations; moreover,
+they surmised that it was about the hour when everybody connected with
+the establishment would be at supper.  Therefore, feeling that the
+moment was propitious, they left the shelter of the doorway, and,
+keeping as closely within the shadow of the building as they could,
+moved off toward the shrubbery, into the dense obscurity of which they
+plunged a minute or two later.  Here, as they wound their way cautiously
+among the bushes, they suddenly found themselves close to a long low
+block of buildings which, being entirely in darkness, they surmised must
+be sheds devoted to the storage of the gardeners' tools, implements, and
+paraphernalia generally, and they at once halted and subjected the
+buildings to careful examination; for, their weapons having been taken
+away from them by the soldiers who had seized them, weapons of some sort
+were now a first necessity with them, and they hoped that the sheds
+might at least afford them a knife apiece, if nothing better.
+Investigation, however, resulted in the discovery that the sheds were
+locked; but this difficulty was soon overcome by the simple process of
+breaking a pane of glass, inserting a hand, unfastening the hasp, and
+entering through the open window, when their enterprise was eventually
+rewarded by the discovery of several formidable pruning knives, two of
+which, together with a couple of short, stout iron bars, and a length of
+thin, strong rope, they unhesitatingly appropriated.
+
+The two adventurers now felt that, whatever might befall them, they were
+no longer altogether defenceless, and leaving the sheds behind them,
+they again plunged into the shrubbery, their object now being to
+discover a way of escape from the garden into the streets of the city.
+
+The first obstacle which they encountered was a stone wall about fifteen
+feet high, surmounted by _chevaux de frise_; and deciding that this was
+rather too formidable to be tackled until they had made a further
+search, they followed the wall for some distance, and eventually arrived
+at a stout wicket gate built of wood.  Of course, it was locked; but
+upon examination they soon came to the conclusion that, with the help of
+their pruning knives and bars, it would not be a difficult matter to
+burst the lock open.  Unfortunately, however, this could not be done
+without making a considerable amount of noise, and they had already
+ascertained, while examining the lock, that a good many people were
+still abroad in the city, for they heard footsteps frequently passing on
+the other side of the wicket; they therefore decided to seek further
+before attempting to force a way out, their decision being influenced by
+the fact that it was evidently still early in the evening, or there
+would not be so many people moving about, and that consequently it might
+be wise to delay their final escape until the bulk of the population had
+retired to rest.  Soon afterward, however, while pursuing their
+investigations, they reached a spot where the wall ended and where the
+grounds were enclosed for some distance by a lofty iron railing which,
+despite the fact that it was formidably spiked at the top, they thought
+might be easily scaled by two men who were accustomed, as they were, to
+climbing the masts and rigging of a ship.  But on the other side of the
+railing was a wide, open street, along which people were constantly
+passing to and fro; the adventurers therefore retired to the shelter and
+concealment of the shrubbery, having come to the resolution not to run
+any unnecessary risk by undue precipitancy, since they had managed so
+excellently thus far.
+
+At length, however, the sounds of traffic in the streets began to
+diminish sensibly, and finally they died away altogether; the good
+people of Cuzco seemed to have gone home to bed at last; so, throwing
+off his disguise for the moment, Dick essayed to climb the high railing
+which was now the only barrier between them and liberty.  The task was
+not at all difficult, except when it came to his clambering over the
+complicated arrangement of spikes at the top; but a steady head and a
+little patience were all that were needed; and in about two minutes
+young Chichester was standing on the pavement outside, once more in his
+clerical disguise, receiving the few articles that Phil passed through
+the railings to him before the latter in his turn climbed over the
+obstacle.  As it chanced, they only just accomplished the feat in time,
+for as Stukely reached the pavement on the right side of the railing,
+footsteps were heard approaching, and Phil scarcely had time to don his
+priest's habit, draw the hood well over his head, and conceal his bar
+and pruning knife in the ample folds of the garment when a belated
+frequenter of one of the numerous posadas of the city staggered past,
+humming in maudlin tones the refrain of a bacchanalian song which he cut
+short when he realised that the two dark figures which he jostled were,
+as he supposed, connected with the dread institution which lay back
+there frowning in the distance.
+
+As soon as this roysterer was fairly out of the way the adventurers
+looked about them to get their bearings.  Their purpose was to leave the
+city by the same way that they had come into it, and then strike
+eastward until they again came to the river, which, in accordance with
+Vilcamapata's instructions, they were to follow to its source.
+Recalling the several twists and turns which they had taken through the
+building after their encounter with the jailer that morning, they
+finally decided that they must follow the footsteps of the drunken man
+until they reached the first street bearing to the right, which would be
+the street by which they had been conducted to the Inquisition that
+morning; once arrived in which they were convinced that they could find
+their way over the remainder of the route.  Accordingly they started
+briskly off, and in the course of a few minutes reached the street which
+they sought, and which they presently verified as the right one by
+passing the great entrance gateway by which they had been admitted to
+the Inquisition building that morning.  That morning!  It seemed much
+more like a week ago!  Still walking briskly, yet without exhibiting
+undue haste, and meeting only an occasional wayfarer here and there who
+took no notice of them except to stand respectfully aside and yield the
+narrow pavement to them as they passed, the two Englishmen wound hither
+and thither along the streets, occasionally identifying some building
+that they remembered to have passed before, until, in a little, narrow
+street, Phil suddenly halted before a small building which bore across
+its narrow front a sign reading, in Spanish, of course--"Mateo
+Cervantes.  Armourer.  Plate and chain mail.  Blades of the finest,
+imported direct from Toledo in Old Spain; musquets; pistolettes; and
+ammunition for the same."
+
+"Ah!" ejaculated Phil, with a sigh of satisfaction; "here we are at
+last.  This is the place that I have been looking for.  I was beginning
+to fear that I had missed it."
+
+"And what a plague want ye with it, now that you have found it?"
+demanded Dick, peevishly; for he was beginning to feel sleepy, and knew
+that many a weary mile must yet be walked before he could hope to get
+any rest.
+
+"What want I with it?" reiterated Phil.  "My gentle mutton-head, read
+the sign over the shop; there is light enough for that, surely, though
+it is but starlight."
+
+Dick read the sign, and his eyes brightened.  "Ah!" he said, "of course;
+I begin to understand.  I have been wondering, all along, what we should
+do without weapons, if we chanced to make good our escape.  These bars
+and pruning knives are well enough in their way, and are better than
+nothing at all, of course; but they won't help us to get game--"
+
+"Precisely," interrupted Phil.  "Therefore, since the Spaniards have
+seen fit to deprive us of our weapons, I propose to make a Spaniard
+provide us with others.  Now, I am going to knock up our friend
+Cervantes, and persuade him to supply our needs, so far as the resources
+of his establishment will allow.  And, to make sure that, after we have
+obtained what we require, the senor shall not prematurely give the alarm
+and set the soldiers upon our track, we must seize and bind him, or
+whoever comes to the door.  So be ready to pounce as soon as the door is
+opened."  And therewith Phil proceeded to hammer loudly upon Senor
+Cervantes' door.
+
+Five or six times did he hammer upon the door with his iron bar, gently
+at first, but with steadily increasing vehemence, before any notice was
+taken of his summons.  At length, however, a thin pencil of light
+appeared through the shutters of a window over the door, the drawing of
+bolts became audible, and just as Phil began to hammer afresh the window
+was thrown open, a figure appeared, and a gruff voice demanded,
+querulously--
+
+"Hallo, there! who knocks at this untimely hour?  Away with you, whoever
+you are, and leave me in peace, or I will sound my rattle and summon the
+watch!"
+
+"The watch!" exclaimed Phil, under his breath, "phew!  I never thought
+of that.  If we should chance to encounter the watch we may yet have
+trouble."  A sudden inspiration came to him, and, stepping back into the
+middle of the road, where his hooded figure might be seen from above, he
+exclaimed, in a deep, solemn voice:
+
+"Mateo Cervantes, in the name of the Holy Inquisition I command you to
+open!"
+
+"The Holy Inquisition!  Ave Maria!  What have I done?" ejaculated the
+figure above, in evident trepidation.  "Your pardon, Reverend Father,"
+he continued, "I knew not who you were.  I will be down instantly."  And
+the light vanished from the window.
+
+"That was a good idea of mine," remarked Phil, in a whisper.  "I thought
+it would fetch him down.  Now, I do not think it will be necessary to
+seize and bind friend Cervantes immediately that he comes to the door.
+He will admit us without question, no doubt; and after we are in and the
+door is closed, we must be guided by circumstances, and act accordingly.
+Here he comes."
+
+A streak of light showed beneath the door; there was a sound of bolts
+being drawn; and presently the door opened and a big, burly, elderly
+man, his touzled hair touched with grey, and his body enveloped in a
+long white nightgown, appeared; holding a candle above his head.  As the
+light fell upon the two hooded figures he involuntarily drew back with a
+gasp, whereupon Phil and Dick stepped into the passage, closing the door
+behind them.
+
+"Holy Fathers," exclaimed Cervantes, dropping on his knees, placing the
+candle on the floor beside him, and raising his hands in an attitude of
+supplication, "I swear to you that I have done nothing; I am a good
+Catholic--"
+
+"Peace!" commanded Phil, raising his hand imperatively.  "How many are
+there in the house with you?"
+
+"How many?" reiterated the trembling man.  "I am alone, Reverend Father,
+quite alone, I give you my solemn word.  My workmen do not live here
+with me; the house is not large enough--"
+
+"It is well," interrupted Phil.  "Now, rise to your feet, friend
+Cervantes, and conduct us to your shop."
+
+"My shop!" echoed the armourer.  "I give you my word, Reverend Sirs,
+that there is nothing in my shop that--"
+
+"The less reason why you should hesitate to lead us thither,"
+interrupted Phil, sternly.
+
+"Of course; of course," agreed the man, anxiously.  "Follow me, your
+Reverences; I have nothing to conceal; nothing to conceal."  Then,
+scrambling to his feet and taking up the candle, the man proceeded a few
+steps along the passage, flung open a door, raised the candle above his
+head in such a manner as to throw the light into the room, and stood
+aside to allow his unwelcome and untimely visitors to enter.
+
+"After you, friend," remarked Phil, waving his hand for the armourer to
+precede them.  "And light a lamp or two," he added, "we must have more
+light than your candle affords."
+
+The man bowed, entered the room, which was in fact the shop, set the
+candlestick down upon a bench, and proceeded to light a couple of lamps
+which stood on wall brackets.  While he was doing this his visitors were
+busily engaged in noting the contents of the shop, so far as the
+imperfect light afforded by the single candle permitted.  The most
+prominent objects, and those which therefore first arrested their
+attention, were half a dozen complete suits of very fine armour, two of
+them being black inlaid with fine gold scroll-work, while the others
+were perfectly plain, but highly polished.  Then there were back and
+breast pieces, greaves, gauntlets, maces, axes, and sheaves of arrows
+suspended from the walls, several very fine bows tied up in a bundle in
+one corner; and last, but by no means least, a large case resting upon a
+counter, in which were set out a number of swords, daggers, and
+poniards.  There were also three long cases ranged along the base of the
+side and back walls of the shop, which the two visitors shrewdly
+suspected contained firearms and ammunition.
+
+"Now, Reverend Sirs," said the armourer as, having lighted the two
+lamps, he turned and faced the two hooded figures, with a bow, "I am at
+your service.  Be pleased to give me your commands."
+
+"It is well," retorted Phil.  "Now, hark ye, friend Cervantes, you are
+credited with being a man of discretion; see to it, then, that ye
+justify your reputation by observing the most complete silence regarding
+this visit.  You understand me?"
+
+"Perfectly, Father," replied the armourer.  "No word or hint will I
+breathe to a living soul about it."
+
+"Good!" replied Phil.  "You will do well to remember that promise, and
+keep it.  Now, for a reason which does not concern you in the least, we
+require certain arms, and they must be the very best you have.  To begin
+with, therefore, show me the two best swords in your stock."
+
+"Arms! swords!" ejaculated the astonished Cervantes, looking keenly at
+his visitors.  Then, suddenly seizing the candle and thrusting it
+forward, he endeavoured to peer into their faces.  "Who are ye?" he
+exclaimed.  "Ye are not--ah!  I have it.  Ye are the two English
+prisoners who this morning--"
+
+Before he could get any further the pair threw themselves upon him and
+bore him to the ground; and while Phil gripped the unfortunate man by
+the throat to prevent him from crying out and raising an alarm, Dick
+whipped out the rope which he had been carrying beneath his habit, and
+trussed up the worthy senor so securely that he could move neither hand
+nor foot.  Then they gagged him very effectively by thrusting the hilt
+of one of his own daggers between his teeth and securing it there.
+
+"Now, hark ye, friend Cervantes," admonished Phil, "it is unfortunate
+for you that you have penetrated our disguises, since it will
+necessitate your remaining as you are until the morning, when no doubt
+someone will arrive to release you.  We need certain weapons, and we
+propose to help ourselves to them; but you need not fear that you are
+about to be robbed; we will pay you generously for whatever we take.
+Now, Dick," he continued, turning to Chichester, "pick your weapons, and
+let us begone, we have none too much time before daylight.  I recommend
+for your choice, a good sword, a musket, a brace of pistols, with a good
+supply of ammunition for each, a stout dagger, a bow, arrows, and a good
+strong machete for general purposes.  That, I think, will be quite as
+much as it will be advisable for us to cumber ourselves with."
+
+"So do I," agreed Dick, dryly.  "For my own part I am not at all sure
+that we could not dispense with the musket, which is a heavy, cumbersome
+thing to carry, and we may never need it.  Still, I suppose we may as
+well take one apiece; we can always throw them away if we find them too
+troublesome.  But how do you propose to pay the man, Phil?  You know
+that we have no money."
+
+"True," assented Phil; "but we have still the two emerald eyes of the
+idol which we found in that cave where we slew the monstrous beast: we
+will give him one of those in payment; and handsome payment it will be,
+too."
+
+"Ay, that it will," agreed Dick.  "I had entirely forgotten about those
+emeralds.  Give him one of them, by all means; we can then help
+ourselves, with a clear conscience, to the best the shop affords."
+
+Swiftly, yet with the greatest care, the two Englishmen selected the
+weapons which they required, together with as much ammunition as they
+considered it wise to cumber themselves with; after which Phil extracted
+from a pocket in his puma-skin tunic one of the emeralds which he had
+mentioned, and holding it close to the eyes of the prostrate armourer,
+said:
+
+"You see that, my friend?  It is an emerald; and its value is about one
+hundred times that of what we have taken from you.  Nevertheless, I am
+going to leave it with you for payment.  See, there it is."  And he
+placed the stone on the floor where Cervantes could see it.  "And now,
+listen to me," continued Phil.  "You probably have it in your mind to go
+to the authorities to-morrow, as soon as you are released, and inform
+them of this visit of ours to you.  Isn't that so?  Yes, I can see by
+the expression of your eyes that I have guessed aright.  Well, friend,
+be advised by me: Don't do it.  Remember that we have escaped from the
+Inquisition; and if the Head of that institution should learn that we
+have been here, he will certainly hold you responsible for our escape
+from the town; and it will be useless for you to say that you could not
+help yourself, that we surprised and overpowered you, and helped
+ourselves to some of your property; he will simply reply that you ought
+not to have allowed yourself to be surprised and overpowered, that you
+knew two prisoners had escaped, and that you should have had wit enough
+to have seen through our disguise and given the alarm before we had time
+or opportunity to overpower you.  And I suppose I need not remind you of
+what your fate will be in that case.  Therefore, think well over the
+matter, and do nothing that you may afterward regret.  You should be
+easily able to concoct a story to account for your present plight that
+should satisfy those who may find you in the morning, without referring
+to us.  And now we will leave you.  Farewell!"
+
+Therewith the two friends extinguished the lamps, and, taking the
+candle, retired from the shop, quietly closing the door behind them.
+The light of the candle enabled them easily to unfasten the outer door;
+and, this done, they blew out the light, silently opened the door, and
+cautiously peered out into the street.  It was silent and deserted,
+therefore, without further ado, they tiptoed down the steps, closing the
+door behind them as they went, and, keeping within the shadows as much
+as possible, hastened in the direction which would take them out of the
+city.  An hour later they were clear of Cuzco, and using the stars as
+their guide, were speeding along a fairly good road which led in a
+south-easterly direction, intending to strike off to the eastward in
+search of the river some twenty or thirty miles farther on, since they
+suspected that the high road would be the last place where their
+pursuers would be likely to look for them.  But about ten o'clock the
+next morning--having encountered meanwhile only a troop of some thirty
+loaded llamas with their attendant drivers, whom, having sighted them at
+a distance, they easily avoided by concealing themselves until the whole
+had passed--they unexpectedly came upon the river again where a bend
+brought it close to the road; they therefore deserted the latter at this
+point, and, although the going was by no means so easy, thenceforward
+followed the river until at length they reached its source high up among
+the Andes of Carabaya.
+
+And now ensued a period of incredible hardship and suffering for the
+adventurous pair; for they were now among the most lofty of those
+stupendous peaks which run in an almost unbroken chain from one end of
+the continent to the other, from the Sierra Nevada de Santa Marta in the
+north to within little more than one hundred miles from the Strait of
+Magellan in the south; and their way lay over boundless snowfields,
+across enormous glaciers gashed with unfathomable crevasses, up and down
+stupendous precipices, and along narrow, ice-clad ledges, where a single
+false step must have hurled them to death thousands of feet below.  To
+journey amid such surroundings was of course bad enough in itself; but
+the hardship of it was increased tenfold for the two Englishmen, from
+the fact that they came new to it and without experience, after months
+of life in the torrid lowlands had thinned their blood and rendered them
+peculiarly sensitive to the piercing cold of those high altitudes, which
+was further intensified by the icy winds which seemed to rage
+continuously about the peaks and come howling at them through the
+ravines.  Add to this the difficulty of obtaining food--for there was no
+life among those mountain solitudes, save an occasional llama or
+guanaco, so wild as to be scarcely approachable, and a condor or two
+soaring aloft at such a height as to be scarcely distinguishable to the
+unaided eye--and the impossibility of making a fire, and the reader will
+be able to form some faint idea of what Phil and Dick were called upon
+to endure while making that awful passage over the mountains.
+Fortunately for them, it lasted only five days; had it been prolonged to
+six they must inevitably have perished.  Fortunately, also, for them,
+they had acquired from the Indians a knowledge of the wonderful, almost
+miraculous, virtue that lay in the coca leaf--with a bountiful supply of
+which they had been careful to provide themselves--otherwise even their
+indomitable hardihood and courage must have succumbed to the frightful
+toil, privation, and exposure which they were obliged to undergo.  A
+detailed description of that five days' journey over the mountains would
+of itself suffice to fill a book, for it would be a record of continuous
+adventure and hairbreadth escapes from avalanches that were constantly
+threatening to overwhelm them; of treacherous snow-bridges that crumbled
+away beneath their feet; of furious, icy winds that, seeming to be
+imbued with demoniac intelligence and malignity, always assailed them in
+some especially perilous situation, and sought to buffet them from their
+precarious hold; and of long hours of intolerable suffering when, during
+the hours of darkness, they were compelled to camp on some snow-patch
+and build themselves a snow-hut as a partial protection from the
+howling, marrow-piercing, snow-laden gale.  Such a narrative, however,
+exciting as it might be in its earlier pages, would soon grow wearisome
+from the rapidity with which one adventure would tread upon the heels of
+another, and can therefore only be hinted at here.  Suffice it to say
+that early in the afternoon of the fourth day, upon surmounting the
+crest of a long ridge of ice-encased rock, at a moment when the demon of
+the mountain had temporarily withdrawn himself elsewhere, and the
+atmosphere was for a brief space calm and clear, the two weary and
+exhausted adventurers caught a brief but entrancing glimpse of a long
+green valley stretching away ahead of them between the two mountain
+ranges, with an island-dotted lake in the far distance, and Sorata's
+dominating ice-clad peak piercing the blue sky to the left of it.  At
+last, at last, their goal was in sight; and incontinently they flung
+themselves down, gasping, upon the iron-hard rock, and gazed entranced
+upon the glorious vision--thrice glorious to them after all that they
+had suffered--until another great snow-cloud evolved itself out of
+nothing and swooped down upon them in a final effort at destruction.
+
+The gale and snowstorm lasted less than an hour, however, and when at
+length the atmosphere again cleared the two friends, who had been
+crouching under the sheltering lee of a great shoulder of rock, rose to
+their feet and again looked forth toward the land of promise.  A vast
+snowfield, corrugated by the wind as the sand of the seashore is by the
+rippling advance of the tide, but otherwise smooth of surface, and
+gently sloping downward, offered them an easy road for the first two
+miles of their descent; and, weary though they were, they traversed it
+in half an hour.  Then came an almost perpendicular descent of some five
+hundred feet to another snowfield, where, in a deep recess that might
+almost have been termed a cave in a great spur of rock, they camped
+comfortably for the night and enjoyed the sweetest rest that they had
+known for many a long day.
+
+When they arose on the following morning, rested and refreshed by their
+long night's sheltered sleep, but weak and famished with hunger which
+even their coca leaves could now but partially relieve, nature was again
+kind to them, for the air was still and so crystalline clear that they
+were able to determine accurately their road for many miles ahead;
+while, most welcome sight of all, in a little sheltered valley, some six
+miles away, on a small patch of green, they perceived a flock of some
+twenty vicuna grazing.  Here, at last was food for them once more, if
+they could but reach within bowshot without alarming the animals; and to
+this task they bent all their energies, with such success that three
+hours later they were gorging themselves to repletion on the raw flesh
+of one of the animals, being still without the materials wherewith to
+kindle a fire.  But this marked the end of their troubles; for before
+the night again closed down upon them they had not only passed below the
+snow-line, but were also fortunate enough to encounter an Indian who was
+herding a flock of llama; and upon Phil addressing the man in his own
+language--of which, it will be remembered, Stukely had acquired a
+knowledge in some extraordinary and quite incomprehensible manner--the
+fellow received them with open arms, conducted them to his hut, fed them
+as they had not been fed since they had fallen into the hands of the
+Spaniards, and not only lodged them for the night, but gave them minute
+instructions how they were to proceed during the following day.  Four
+days later they arrived at the northern extremity of the Sacred Lake.
+
+They reached its margin at the precise moment that the sun sank beyond
+the long line of lofty, rugged, snow-clad peaks that ran parallel to the
+lake on its western side.  The evening was perfectly calm and cloudless,
+save in the west, where an agglomeration of delicate rosy-purple streaks
+and patches of vapour lay softly upon a clear background of palest
+blue-green sky, forming the picture of a fairy archipelago of thickly
+clustering islands, intersected by a bewildering maze of channels
+winding hither and thither, with the thin sickle of the young moon,
+gleaming softly silver-white, hanging just above the whole.  It was one
+of those skies that set the imaginative dreamer's fancy free to wander
+afar into the realms of fairyland and to picture all sorts of strange,
+unreal happenings; the sort of sky that probably suggested to the simple
+mind of the Indian the poetic idea that when gazing upon it he was
+vouchsafed a vision of the Isles of the Blessed where dwell the souls of
+the departed in everlasting bliss; and for full five minutes after the
+two Englishmen had halted by the margin of the lake, the smooth,
+unruffled surface of which repeated the picture as in a mirror, they
+stood gazing, entranced, upon the loveliness of the scene that lay
+spread out before them.
+
+In front of them and almost at their feet lay the placid waters of the
+lake, bordered with reeds and rushes just where they happened to stand,
+its glassy, mirrorlike surface faithfully reproducing every soft,
+delicate tint of the overarching sky, the bank of rosy clouds in the
+west, the cold, pure blue of the snow-capped sierras on their right, the
+ruddy blush of the peaks on their left--upon the summits of which the
+last rays of the vanished sun still lingered, to change to purest white
+even as they gazed--and every clump of sombre olive vegetation between.
+To the right and left of them, a few miles apart, two streams, having
+their sources in the neighbouring mountains, discharged into the lake;
+and so perfectly still was the air that the murmur of their waters came
+faint but clear to the ears of the two comrades who had travelled so
+many hundreds of miles with that scene as their goal.  To right and left
+of them the shores of the lake swept away in many a curve and bay and
+indentation clear to the horizon, and far beyond it; and in the whole of
+that fair landscape never a sign of life, human or animal!  Yet, stay;
+what was that dark film, like a tiny cloud, that came sweeping down
+toward them from far up the lake?  Dick, the practical, was the first to
+catch sight of it, for Phil was standing like one in a trance gazing at
+the scene with a retrospective look in his eyes that seemed to say his
+thoughts were far away.  As Dick watched the approaching cloud-like film
+it resolved itself into a flock of wild ducks, making, as it seemed,
+directly for the patch of rushes near which the two were standing, and,
+with the momentous question of supper looming large in his mind,
+Chichester plucked his companion by the sleeve, pointed to the
+approaching wild ducks, and suggested the propriety of immediately
+seeking some hiding-place until the birds had settled.
+
+"A murrain on you and your ducks, Dick!" exclaimed Stukely, in a tone
+half-pettish, half-playful; "you have jolted me out of a reverie in
+which I was endeavouring to account for the extraordinary feeling that
+sometime in the past I have beheld this very scene, even as I behold it
+now.  Of course I know that it is only a fancy; I know that I have never
+before stood on the soil which my feet are pressing at this moment; yet,
+believe me or not, as you please, all this"--he waved his right hand
+before him to right and left--"is absolutely familiar to me, as familiar
+as though I had lived here all my life!  Nothing is changed, except that
+the clumps of bush seem to have approached a little closer to the margin
+of the lake, and--yes, you see that low bluff yonder?  Well, when I last
+looked upon it--oh, well! never mind; you are laughing at me, and I have
+no right to be surprised that you should do so; but, all the same, I
+know exactly where we are now; I know that there are islands out there
+on the lake, beyond the horizon, and I know which of them it is that we
+must visit--I shall recognise it instantly when I see it; remember my
+words.  And now, come along, and let us see whether we can get one or
+two of those ducks; they seem to be making for the reeds yonder."
+
+The pair crept down to the margin of the patch of reeds, and concealed
+themselves therein; and scarcely had they done so when the flock came
+sweeping along with a great rush of wings, wheeled, and finally settled,
+with loud quacks--probably of satisfaction that their day's work was
+over, and that they were once more back in their haven of rest.  Then
+the two muskets--which the wanderers had tenaciously retained throughout
+their perilous journey across the mountains--barked out their death
+message simultaneously, and the flock rose again with loud squawks of
+alarm, leaving a round dozen of their number, either dead or badly
+wounded, behind them.  Ten minutes later, as the brief twilight was
+rapidly deepening into night, the nude figures of the two Englishmen
+scrambled out of the water, each bearing his quota of dead wild duck,
+and, laying their spoils upon the ground, nonchalantly proceeded to
+resume the quaint garments of skins that now constituted their only
+clothing.
+
+Long into the night sat the pair, crouching over their camp fire, for
+though the days were hot the nights were bitterly cold, even in that
+valley between the two ranges of mountains; and while Dick gazed
+abstractedly aloft into the velvet blackness at the innumerable stars
+that glittered above him through the frosty atmosphere, Phil spoke of
+the strange dreams--which he persisted, half-jestingly and half in
+earnest, in regarding as memories--that visited him so frequently, of
+curious scenes that he had witnessed and remarkable deeds that he had
+done in the far past, either in imagination or reality, he could not
+possibly say which.  And while he talked and Dick listened, vacillating
+between amusement and conviction, some twenty stalwart figures, thin and
+aquiline of feature, copper-hued of skin, and strangely clothed, came
+creeping up out of the darkness until they reached a clump of bush
+within earshot of the pair, where they lurked, waiting patiently until
+the audacious intruders upon their most sacred territory should resign
+themselves to sleep--and to a captivity which, as planned by the chief
+figure of the group, was to be of but brief duration, ending in a death
+of unspeakable horror.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHTEEN.
+
+HOW THEY FOUND AN ENORMOUS TREASURE, AND TOOK IT HOME.
+
+It was past midnight, and the camp fire, which Dick had bountifully
+replenished with stout branches from the neighbouring clump of bush, the
+last thing before stretching himself out to sleep, had dwindled to a
+mass of dull red smouldering embers, when the white-clad figure of an
+elderly man, copper-hued, bald-headed, and clean shaven, approached with
+stealthy footsteps the recumbent bodies of the two slumbering
+Englishmen.  Bending over first one and then the other, he held a
+saturated cloth toward their nostrils in such a manner that the sleepers
+were permitted to inhale, for about a minute each, the faint, fragrant
+fumes that emanated from it; then, abandoning all further caution, he
+withdrew from the fire a half-consumed branch and waved it in the air
+until the smouldering stump was fanned afresh into flame; when, the
+torch having served its purpose as a signal, he flung it back upon the
+almost extinguished fire.  A couple of minutes later those to whom this
+man had signalled approached the camp fire, and while two parties of
+four each raised the recumbent and now unconscious figures of the
+Englishmen to their shoulders, the remainder carefully gathered together
+and took possession of the weapons and other belongings of their
+prisoners, after which, at a signal from their leader the entire party
+moved off, marching inland away from the lake.  Relieving each other at
+frequent intervals, for they found their unconscious burdens heavy--
+especially those who were told off to carry Dick--the party marched a
+distance of nearly eight miles, until, in a sequestered valley among the
+hills, they reached the ruins of what had evidently at one time been a
+city of considerable importance, built equally on both sides of an
+ice-cold mountain stream.  Most of the buildings were in ruins; many,
+indeed, had been razed almost to their foundations--possibly to provide
+material for the maintenance in repair of those that remained intact,
+but there were sufficient of the latter to afford accommodation for
+fully three thousand people, and all of these were inhabited.  Many of
+the inhabited buildings were of considerable size, but, with one
+solitary exception, architectural grace and beauty were conspicuously
+absent, the buildings being, with the exception mentioned, constructed
+of large blocks of stone so perfectly worked that the joints of the
+masonry were scarcely perceptible, but without ornament or adornment of
+any kind whatever, and roughly roofed with thatch.  The exception was in
+the case of the temple, which, like so many in ancient Peru, was
+dedicated to the Sun.  This structure was erected upon the summit of a
+low mound, scarcely important enough in height to be termed a hill, yet
+high enough to allow the building to dominate all the rest of the town,
+and was built of a beautiful white, fine-grained stone, very much
+resembling alabaster.  Also, in startling contrast to all the other
+buildings in the town, it was admirably proportioned, and elaborately
+ornamented with bold mouldings, cornices, and other architectural
+ornaments which, although somewhat barbaric in design, were nevertheless
+exceedingly effective.  But its chief glory lay in the pair of immense
+bronze doors of its main entrance, the entire surface of which was most
+exquisitely engraved with a series of pictures representing the
+ceremonial of sun worship.  The building stood upon an immense
+quadrangular base of massive masonry, the sides of which were worked
+into steps; and some idea of the age of the structure could be gained
+from the fact that immediately opposite the main entrance the steps were
+worn away to a depth of nearly three inches by the innumerable
+multitudes of worshippers who had passed up and down them.  The pavement
+of the interior was of marble of various colours, worked into an
+elaborate pattern; and beneath this pavement there were chambers for the
+confinement of prisoners, and other and more sinister purposes.
+
+It was in one of these subterranean chambers that our friends Phil and
+Dick recovered consciousness on the morning following their arrival at
+the shore of the Sacred Lake; and their amazement at awaking to find
+themselves bound hand and foot on the cold stone floor of a dimly
+lighted dungeon, whereas they had fallen asleep in the open, may be
+readily imagined.  Their first and most natural impression was that they
+had again fallen into the hands of the Spaniards; but they were
+disabused of this idea when, an hour or two later, four stalwart
+copper-hued, sharp-featured men, with long, straight black hair, clean
+shaven, clad in white, sleeveless tunics, with sandals on their feet,
+and each armed with a short, broad-bladed sword of copper, entered the
+cell, leaving two coarse earthenware basins liberally filled with what
+looked like stiff porridge, and two jars containing water.  Placing
+these upon the floor, two of the four proceeded to unbind the hands of
+the prisoners, while the other two drew their copper swords and
+stationed themselves at the door of the cell, with the evident purpose
+of frustrating any attempt at escape which the prisoners might be
+ill-advised enough to make.  Then Phil, inspired by that knowledge which
+he had so mysteriously acquired, at once recognised that he and his
+companion had fallen into the hands of a body of aboriginal Peruvians,
+and his face cleared.
+
+"We are all right, Dick," he exclaimed, joyously; "these fellows are
+evidently a surviving remnant of the original inhabitants of the
+country, of whose existence Vilcamapata told me, and whose language I
+speak.  It will only be necessary for me to tell them who we are, and
+they will free us at once."  But when he addressed first one and then
+another of the quartette, they paid no attention whatever to what he
+said, contenting themselves with signing to the prisoners to eat and
+drink.  Instead of obeying, however, Phil continued to talk to them,
+alternately explaining, ordering, and finally threatening the men; and
+it was not until, some twenty minutes later, when they proceeded to bind
+the hands of both behind their backs again, that Stukely realised, too
+late, that the quartette were evidently deaf and dumb.  Thus Phil missed
+his breakfast that morning, while Dick, the practical one of the two,
+secured his, having fully availed himself of the opportunity afforded by
+his unbound hands to eat and drink.
+
+In this eminently unsatisfactory and comfortless fashion the hapless
+prisoners passed the ensuing ten days, seeing nobody but the four deaf
+mutes, who twice daily brought them food and water, and stood over them
+while they ate and drank, afterward securely binding them again;
+although this seemed to be an altogether unnecessary act of cruelty;
+since so strongly constructed was their place of confinement--even the
+door being a massive slab of stone--that, had they been entirely
+unbound, they could not possibly have forced their way out.
+
+At length, however, on the twelfth day of their captivity, some two
+hours after their morning meal had been served to them, they were quite
+unexpectedly visited by their four deaf-and-dumb jailers, who, having
+unbound their ankles, signed to them that they were to leave the noisome
+hole where they had hitherto been confined; and when the pair passed
+through the stone door they found themselves in a long passage, where
+they were immediately surrounded by an escort of a dozen soldiers armed
+with sword, spear, and shield, all of bronze, and wearing breastplates
+and helmets of polished bronze, the latter adorned with the tail
+feathers of some bird that gleamed with a brilliant metallic golden
+lustre.  Hemmed in by these, the prisoners were marched along the
+passage until they reached a flight of stone steps which the party
+ascended, finding themselves, at the top, in a long, spacious, lofty
+corridor, lighted at intervals by circular openings high up under the
+flat stone ceiling.  Along this corridor also the prisoners were marched
+until they reached a doorway closed by two bronze doors, at which the
+officer of the party first knocked, and immediately afterwards thrust
+open, revealing a room in which were congregated some thirty men attired
+in a garb that Phil at least instantly recognised to be priestly.  By
+these the pair were at once taken over from the armed guard; who
+thereupon retired and were no more seen.  At one end of the room stood a
+table upon which lay heaped a quantity of flowers, and two stalwart
+priests having taken possession of each of the prisoners, the latter
+were led to the table, and the flowers, which had been arranged in the
+form of two long festoons, were thrown round their necks, crossed over
+their breasts, passed round their waists, and finally tied in front,
+with the long ends drooping almost to their feet.  They were evidently
+being decked as the victims of some sort of sacrifice!
+
+Then Phil suddenly wrenched himself free from the hands of the two
+priests who were putting the finishing touches to his adornment, and
+spoke in a low voice to the assembled concourse of priests.  What he
+said was wholly incomprehensible to Dick, for it was in a tongue of
+which young Chichester had no knowledge, but it had a most extraordinary
+effect upon the priests, who first seemed stricken dumb with amazement,
+and finally overwhelmed with paralysing fear.  For several minutes,
+while Phil spoke, in accents of mingled indignation and reproach, the
+priests stood silent and motionless, with many mingled emotions
+displaying themselves upon their expressive countenances; but when at
+length he concluded his tirade by pronouncing certain words in an
+unmistakably threatening tone of voice, the whole assemblage, as though
+moved by the same impulse, threw up their hands with an action that
+clearly expressed the deepest profundity of horror, and then
+incontinently with one accord prostrated themselves on the marble floor
+at the feet of the two prisoners, uttering howls of sorrow and abject
+entreaty.  For perhaps five minutes Phil permitted them to remain in
+this posture; then suddenly he shouted a single word which had the
+instant effect of reducing the prostrate ones to silence, when he again
+addressed them, this time in gentler tones; and when he at length
+concluded, the party rose slowly and humbly to their feet, after which
+two of them stepped forward and, with every appearance of the deepest
+reverence, proceeded to untwine the garlands of flowers and release the
+pair from their bonds.  Finally, the erstwhile prisoners were taken in
+charge by two of the priests, who first conducted them to an apartment
+wherein were all the requisites for a bath, together with a complete
+change of clothing, and afterward to another room, very luxuriously
+furnished, in which they found not only a choice though evidently
+hastily provided meal, but likewise all their weapons, ammunition, and
+other belongings.  While this was being done the remainder of the
+priesthood filed into the temple--where a vast congregation had
+assembled to take part in a specially arranged festival in honour of the
+full moon, to be accompanied by a sacrifice--to explain, as best they
+could, to the assembled multitude that an unfortunate and most
+regrettable mistake had been made; and that, consequently, although the
+festival would proceed, no sacrifice beyond that of a pair of goats
+would be offered!
+
+To Dick Chichester this sudden and extraordinary change in the fortune
+of himself and his friend was utterly incomprehensible; and no sooner
+were they once more alone than he turned to Phil and demanded an
+explanation.  But, to his great surprise, Stukely, for almost the first
+time since that memorable night when they had escaped from Cartagena
+together, seemed inclined to be reticent; he professed himself not to
+understand wholly the sudden and remarkable turn which affairs had
+taken, appeared thoughtful, and inclined to be silent; and would only
+say that the Peruvians had mistaken them for a couple of Spaniards, and
+that they had consequently escaped a terrible death by the very skin of
+their teeth.  And when Dick further pressed him with several very
+obvious questions, the only reply which he could extort was, that in the
+excitement of the moment certain words, the meaning of which he did not
+in the least understand, had involuntarily escaped his lips, and that it
+was undoubtedly those mysterious words which had wrought the singular
+change in the priests' attitude toward them; of which change he had felt
+himself justified in taking the utmost advantage immediately that it
+became apparent.  He added that, although danger seemed for the moment
+to be past, the situation was still exceedingly difficult and delicate,
+demanding the utmost care and circumspection in handling; and he wound
+up with an earnest request to Dick to cease from questioning him
+further, as he wished to think the matter out and decide upon the plan
+of action which it would be best to pursue under the circumstances.
+
+A week ensued during which Dick and Phil saw very little of each other,
+for the latter was engaged during practically the whole of each day in
+conference with either the chief priest or the authorities who governed
+the town, and sometimes with both together; while at night Stukely
+manifested an unmistakable desire to be left alone to puzzle out some
+problem that seemed to be worrying him.
+
+But at length, when they had been exactly a week in the town, Phil
+returned late in the evening to the quarters which he and Dick had been
+jointly occupying in the temple; and it was at once apparent to the
+younger of the two that the troubles and difficulties with which Stukely
+had been wrestling were at an end, for he was once more his former self,
+frank, genial, self-reliant, and in exuberant spirits.
+
+"It is all right at last, Dick," he exclaimed, flinging himself down
+upon a couch; "I have straightened everything out; and to-morrow we
+start for the Sacred Island, with labourers, tools, provisions, and in
+short, everything that we require.  And, as things have turned out, it
+was very fortunate for us that we fell into the hands of these people;
+for otherwise we should never have succeeded in penetrating to the
+hiding-place of the treasure and getting safely away again.  Now,
+however, we are going there with their full knowledge and approval--they
+have even insisted on furnishing us with all the help we may require--
+consequently we shall have nothing to fear from those who are guarding
+the island, and who, had we approached as strangers, would certainly
+have destroyed us."
+
+"In that case," said Dick, "I suppose we ought to congratulate ourselves
+upon what has happened, although I do not hesitate to acknowledge now
+that I thought it was all up with us when we were hauled up before the
+priests, last week, and decorated with flowers.  But what has happened
+to bring about this fortunate turn in our affairs?  Don't you think that
+you may as well explain the whole affair to me?"
+
+"Certainly I will," agreed Stukely, "indeed it is necessary that you
+should understand the situation, in order that you may know how to
+comport yourself in the presence of the people.
+
+"First of all, then, this town is called Huancane.  It was a place of
+very considerable importance in the time of the Incas, being, in fact,
+one of the places to which the Inca was in the habit of resorting during
+the period of the extreme summer heat, both on account of its proximity
+to the lake, and also because of the exceptional salubrity of the
+climate.  Now, at the time of the conquest of the country, a few
+Spaniards settled here; upon which the Peruvians, in accordance with a
+pre-arranged policy, entirely abandoned the town and retired to certain
+secret hiding-places among the mountains, believing that the Spaniards
+could not possibly contrive to exist here, if left entirely to
+themselves.  But, to the astonishment of the Peruvians, the Spaniards
+not only contrived to exist, but they steadily increased and multiplied
+to such an extent that there were some three hundred of them settled
+here, and supporting themselves entirely upon the products of the
+valley.  Then came a change respecting which the Peruvians of to-day are
+exceedingly reticent, but one thing is certain, Huancane developed a
+remarkable and mysterious unhealthiness of climate that rapidly cleared
+it of every Spaniard, so that for two or three years the town was
+uninhabited and fell rapidly into decay; after which the Peruvians
+returned to it, and have been here ever since.  So much for the history
+of Huancane.
+
+"Ever since that time the Peruvians have been very jealously on the
+watch against any return of the Spaniards to this part of the country; a
+watch for them has always been maintained; and when, from time to time,
+small parties have appeared in the neighbourhood they have--well--
+vanished.  Our friends here are very reticent about these
+disappearances, too.
+
+"Now, it seems that on the day of our arrival at the margin of the lake
+we were seen and watched all day, under the impression that we were
+Spaniards; and when night came and we slept, a party stole upon us,
+stupefied us in some fashion--they did not explain how--and brought us
+eight miles or so from our camp to the town, where, as I understand,
+rather elaborate preparations were subsequently made for our dispatch
+from this world to the next.
+
+"That plan, as you know, fell through in consequence of certain remarks
+which the exigencies of the situation prompted me to make.  I somehow
+had an idea that we were being mistaken for Spaniards; and the
+decorating of us with those wreaths of flowers also seemed to me a
+sinister sign; I therefore concluded that the moment for an explanation
+had arrived; and I began by informing them that we were not Spaniards,
+but were such inveterate enemies of them that we had sailed across the
+Black Water in a great canoe for a whole moon and more with the express
+object of fighting them.  Then, suddenly, that story of Vilcamapata's
+came into my head, and I hinted that there was more than met the eye in
+the fact of our presence in this country.  I suddenly assumed a high and
+mighty demeanour, reproached them for their blindness and inability to
+recognise the friends who stood before them, and finally, moved by some
+impulse for which I am wholly unable to account, rapped out certain
+words that flashed into my mind, of which I knew not the meaning, but
+which I somehow seemed to understand were words of power.  And they
+were, too; for, from what has since transpired, I understand that they
+were the mysterious words the utterance of which by a complete stranger
+was to be the sign to the Peruvians that Manco Capac, the first of the
+Incas, had returned to earth to free them from the hated Spanish yoke!
+
+"Now, of course, I know that the utterance of those magic words at what
+was, for us, a most critical moment, was a very extraordinary, almost a
+miraculous thing; but I have had very little time to dwell upon it thus
+far; for when I saw the astonishing result of the words which I had
+spoken, my mind was at once exercised with the task of turning the
+utterance to the best possible account.  But here I was met by a great
+difficulty, for while the attitude of the priests became instantly
+changed from relentless hostility to submissiveness so complete as to be
+absolutely servile, I was without the knowledge which would have
+supplied the key to the situation, and I therefore had to conduct myself
+with the utmost circumspection lest I should say or do something which
+would nullify the good effect which I had unwittingly produced.  By
+adopting an attitude of extreme reticence, however, and allowing the
+others to do all the talking, I gradually attained to the knowledge that
+I am regarded as the reincarnated Manco; and now our copper-coloured
+friends are all on fire with eagerness for me to initiate the operations
+which shall eventuate in the expulsion of the Spaniard from this
+wonderful country.  Many of them are desirous that I shall at once
+assume the style and title of Inca, make Huancane my headquarters, and
+send forth a summons to all the Peruvians scattered throughout the
+country to come in and enrol themselves under my standard--I understand
+that, even now, there remain enough of them to sweep the Spaniards into
+the sea, if properly led.  And Dick, my lad, the idea is not without
+attractiveness, by any means.  I assure you that I have quite seriously
+considered it--tried to picture myself as Inca--with you as Lord High
+Admiral of my fleet, and Generalissimo of my army--and the prospect
+appeals to me very strongly, so strongly, indeed, that I intend to give
+it much further consideration.  For, somehow, I feel that the position
+would exactly suit me, and that I should suit the position.  The task of
+driving out the Spaniard and restoring the country to its position of
+former power and splendour would provide us both with many years of
+strenuous work and wild adventure, eh?  Meanwhile, however, there are
+several formidable obstacles in the way of an immediate adoption of the
+proposal, and these obstacles I have laid before the chief priests and
+the half-dozen nobles who govern this place, and they have recognised
+the reasonableness of my contention, and are willing to leave everything
+in my hands.  We arrived at a complete understanding and agreement upon
+this matter to-day; and I thereupon boldly informed them that the first
+step which I proposed to take was to secure possession of certain
+treasure, the existence and situation of which has been revealed to me;
+and that I demanded their assistance in the task of its recovery.  There
+were one or two of them who were shrewd enough to enquire in what way I
+proposed to employ the treasure when I had secured it; but that question
+I refused to answer, hinting that, in the present position of affairs,
+the less they knew about my plans the better it would be for everybody
+concerned; and with that rather ambiguous assertion they have been
+obliged to remain content.  The outcome of the whole affair, however, is
+that to-morrow we start for the Sacred Island, accompanied by a gang of
+thirty labourers provided with the necessary tools; so now I think I may
+say that, with one very important exception, all our troubles are over."
+
+"And pray what is that one important exception?" demanded Dick.
+
+"The question of how we are going to convey the treasure home when we
+have secured possession of it," answered Phil.
+
+"Ah!" responded Dick, emphatically, "yes; that is going to be a puzzler.
+For there are only us two; and--"
+
+"Quite so," interrupted Phil, "there are only us two, as you say.
+Nevertheless, I am not going to worry myself unduly over it, for I have
+no doubt that the problem will solve itself, as all the others have
+during our wonderful journey.  And Dick, my son, the resolution which
+has brought us two, all alone, from Cartagena to this spot, will not
+fail us when the time comes for us to decide how we will transport our
+treasure to England; so don't you worry either, lad.  And now, good
+night; I am tired to death, for I have scarcely slept a wink during the
+last five or six nights."
+
+The expedition which set out from Huancane on the following morning was
+unexpectedly imposing from the point of view of the two Englishmen; for,
+in addition to the thirty labourers promised by the authorities, there
+were half a dozen llamas, four of which were harnessed to a couple of
+vehicles somewhat resembling hammocks suspended from long poles, these
+being intended for the accommodation of the Englishmen, while the other
+two were loaded with food for the expedition, each labourer carrying his
+own tools.  Each llama had its own driver; the expedition therefore
+consisted of thirty-eight people, all told, including the two white men.
+Its route lay along the eastern side of the lake; and it covered a
+distance of twenty-five miles before camping for the night.  On the
+following day, when the afternoon was well advanced, the party arrived
+at a point where at a distance of some three miles from the shore, a
+small islet rose out of the bosom of the lake, the highest point of
+which was crowned with a group of extensive and very imposing-looking
+ruins.  This islet the guide in charge of the expedition declared to be
+the Sacred Isle; and Phil, strong in the assurance springing from the
+knowledge of which he was so mysteriously possessed, agreed with him.
+
+The next question was, how to reach the islet, for there were no boats
+or craft of any kind upon the lake; but that difficulty was quickly met
+by the labourers, who at once set to work to cut a large quantity of
+reeds, which they bound together in such a fashion that they formed a
+commodious and exceedingly buoyant raft, upon which the entire party,
+with the exception of the llamas and their drivers, crossed over the
+first thing on the following morning.
+
+The passage of the raft from the mainland to the island, propelled as
+she was by paddles only, occupied about an hour and a half; and as the
+unwieldy craft gradually approached her destination the two white
+passengers on board her began to realise that the island ahead was
+considerably larger than they had first imagined, being fully a hundred
+acres in extent; while the character of the ruins made it clear that not
+only had the island been chosen, for some inexplicable reason, as the
+site upon which to erect a vast and very magnificent temple dedicated to
+the worship of the Sun, but that a monastic establishment of
+corresponding importance had also been founded there.  Now, however, the
+whole of the buildings were roofless and in ruins; yet, even so, they
+were sufficiently imposing to imbue Dick at least with several new and
+startling ideas regarding the extent of the civilisation to which the
+Peruvians had attained under the rule of the Incas.  As for Phil, he
+seemed to have undergone a complete yet subtle transformation during
+that short journey across the waters of the lake; his eyes blazed with
+eagerness, his nostrils dilated as though after a prolonged absence he
+was once more breathing his native air; he carried himself with a new
+and kingly dignity that somehow seemed to render him unapproachable; he
+gave his orders with the calm finality of tone of an absolute monarch;
+his knowledge of the place which he was approaching was so intimate as
+to be positively uncanny, as was evidenced when the raft drew near the
+island: those in charge would have run her ashore at the nearest point,
+but as soon as Stukely perceived what they would be at he turned to them
+and said rebukingly:
+
+"Not there; not there! bear away to the south.  Do you not know that
+there is a bay on that side of the island, with a wharf at which we can
+land comfortably and conveniently?"
+
+Apparently the Peruvians did not know; yet when the balsa rounded the
+point, there was the bay, and there the stone pier or wharf of which
+Phil had spoken!
+
+The first thing to be done, upon their arrival, was to instal the party
+in as comfortable quarters as the ruins afforded; and this was
+accomplished more easily than had seemed possible at the first glance.
+For although, as viewed from the lake, not only the temple but also all
+the other buildings had appeared to be roofless, a closer inspection
+revealed the fact that one of the small chambers which formed a part of
+the main building of the temple was still intact, even to its coved roof
+of solid masonry; and this Phil at once ordered to be cleared out and
+prepared for the reception of Dick and himself; while, as for the rest,
+a building was soon found which, with the aid of a few branches cut from
+the neighbouring grove of trees, and a quantity of rushes, which grew
+abundantly along the margin of the bay, could be quickly covered in
+sufficiently to render it habitable.  These preparations kept the
+Peruvians busy for the remainder of that day; and while they were thus
+employed Phil and Dick devoted themselves to a minute inspection of the
+temple proper.
+
+This had evidently at one time been a magnificent building, probably the
+finest of its kind in the entire country; but now it was in a state of
+utter ruin, its beautiful roof and walls having been stripped entirely
+of the massive hammered and engraved gold and silver plates which, Phil
+asserted, had once adorned them, while its marble pavement was heaped
+high with immense fragments of masonry, some of which were evidently
+portions of a boldly moulded cornice that had once adorned the inner
+walls of the structure, while others bore upon their faces signs of
+having been exquisitely sculptured in alto or basso rilievo.  It was a
+melancholy sight, even to the unimpressionable Dick, this irreparable
+ruin of a once noble and surpassingly beautiful building; but Phil, as
+he gazed round him in silence, was so deeply moved that, for the moment,
+he seemed to have entirely forgotten the object of his visit to the
+place; seeing which, Dick at length wandered away and left his friend to
+himself and his own mysterious self-communings.
+
+Later on, when they again met to partake together of the evening meal
+which had been prepared for them, Phil, who, though still in a somewhat
+melancholy mood, seemed to have become once more almost his normal self,
+endeavoured to explain to Dick the emotions which had swayed him all
+through the day.
+
+"It was one of my strange fits, again, that overcame me," he said.  "You
+know, Dick, that I have been subject to them, off and on, as far back in
+my life as I can remember.  They come upon me without previous warning
+or apparent cause, sometimes in the form of extraordinarily vivid
+dreams, and sometimes as more or less vague memories, awakened by a
+chance sound, or sight, or odour.  Either of these apparently slight
+causes has sufficed, at times, to recall scenes in which I seem to have
+been an actor far back in the past; so far back, indeed, that if they
+really occurred at all it must have been long before I--that is to say,
+my present body--was born.  Now, don't laugh at me, lad; no doubt, when
+I talk thus, I must seem to you to be stating absurdities,
+impossibilities; for you have often told me that you have never
+experienced the curious sensations of which I speak; but let me tell you
+that, however extraordinary they may seem to you, to me they appear the
+most natural thing in the world, because they occur to me so frequently,
+and because they began to come to me when I was still too young to
+recognise their extraordinary character.  The most remarkable thing
+about them, to my mind, is that they all seem to bear a close
+relationship to each other; they all appear to refer to the same period
+of time, and the same locality; that locality being this country of
+South America, and especially Peru.  Is it not a strange thing that I
+should have dreamed of being associated with a people, one of whom I
+instantly recognised in the person of Vilcamapata?  And is it not
+equally strange that in my dreams I should have acquired a knowledge of
+the language spoken by him and these people who are now with us?  Yet
+you know that such was actually the case.  And now I tell you, Dick,
+that when I stood among the ruins of this once splendid temple to-day,
+the feeling was strong upon me that I was not standing within its walls
+for the first time!  I could shut my eyes and recall a dim and
+tantalising vision of it in all its pristine glory; I seemed to again
+see those ruined walls standing erect and perfect, with their decoration
+of gold and silver plates and ornaments, their sculptured panels, their
+heavy cornice, and the magnificent golden roof surmounting all.  Oh, it
+is tantalising to remember so much and yet so little; to have these
+memories flash athwart one's mind only to vanish again before one has
+time to fix and identify them!  Why do they not come to me perfectly--if
+they must come at all?  These fleeting memories puzzle and perplex me;
+nay, more, they worry me; for I cannot help thinking that they must have
+a purpose; if I could but know what it is.
+
+"And now, to turn from generalities to particularities.  I am worried as
+to the locality of the hidden treasure.  You will remember that
+Vilcamapata's last words to us were that something--which I have always
+believed to be the treasure--lies beneath the great marble floor of this
+temple; and until to-day I have believed that I had but to come here and
+straightway find the entrance giving access to the vaults in which the
+treasure lies hidden.  Yet I have spent the whole day in wandering among
+the ruins in search of that entrance--without success; I have been quite
+unable to find any opening which promises to lead to the underground
+part of the structure.  And all day, too, I have been haunted by an
+elusive memory of some secret connected with, the hiding of the
+treasure, which memory continually seems to be on the point of becoming
+clear and illuminating, only to fade away into nothing again.  We are
+here, however; that is the great point; and I swear that I will not go
+away again without the treasure, even though it should be necessary to
+raze the temple to its foundations, stone by stone, in order to find
+it!"
+
+For a time it seemed that nothing short of such drastic measures would
+serve the purpose of the two adventurers; for, search as they would,
+they could find no door or opening of any description giving access to
+the chambers which Vilcamapata had given them to understand existed
+beneath the floor of the main building; indeed, so far as their
+discoveries went, there might have been no such chambers at all,
+although Phil was most positive as to their existence.  But they made a
+beginning of a kind, by setting the labouring gang to work to clear away
+all the debris and rubbish which lay piled high upon the temple floor;
+and in the course of a fortnight sufficient progress had been made to
+lay bare about one-fourth of the marble floor at the eastern end of the
+building, including the once beautiful but now sadly damaged altar
+dedicated to sacrifices to the Sun.  And then the secret which had so
+persistently eluded Phil was revealed; for one of the rear corners of
+the altar had been broken away by the fall of a heavy mass of masonry
+from the roof, exposing the interior of the structure, which, it now
+appeared, was hollow.  But it revealed more than that; it revealed the
+fact that the massive slab which formed the rear of the lower portion of
+the altar was movable, being pivoted on stone hinges at one end, so that
+by applying pressure in a certain way to the other end it could be made
+to swing inward, giving access to a flight of steps leading downward.
+The hinges, it is true, had become stiff from long non-usage, so that it
+now needed the united strength of half a dozen men to revolve the slab,
+but when once it was forced open it remained so, and there was no
+further trouble in that respect.  Yet, even then, it was found to be
+impossible to penetrate to the subterranean chambers at once, for when
+an attempt was made to do so, the torches which the would-be explorers
+carried refused to burn in the mephitic atmosphere; and time therefore
+had to be allowed for the exterior air to penetrate and displace the
+poisonous vapours which had accumulated in the chambers during the many
+years that they had remained hermetically sealed.
+
+At length, however, after the process of ventilation had been permitted
+to proceed for nearly a week, the air in the subterranean passages was
+found to be fresh enough to be breathed without much difficulty, and to
+allow of the torches burning in it with scarcely diminished luminosity,
+and the search for the treasure chamber was resumed.  And now it was
+discovered that the labyrinth of passages and chambers extended far
+beyond the area covered by the superstructure, many of the chambers
+having evidently been used as prison cells, in some at least of which
+the unhappy prisoners had been interned and apparently left to perish of
+hunger and thirst; for, upon being broken open, they were found to still
+contain the mummified bodies of the unfortunate wretches; while others
+seemed to have been used by the priests as places of retirement and
+meditation.  One exceptionally large chamber, too, had been used as the
+place of interment for the successive chief priests of the temple; for
+their bodies also, withered and shrunken in the dry atmosphere of the
+place, were found ranged round the walls of the mausoleum, clad in their
+sacerdotal vestments, and enthroned in bronze chairs of very beautiful
+and elaborate workmanship.
+
+Finally, after the two Englishmen had been exploring this elaborate
+system of underground chambers for nearly three hours, they came upon
+the object of their search--and stood for awhile breathless and dumb in
+the presence of apparently incalculable wealth!
+
+The chamber was by far the largest that the pair had thus far entered;
+so large indeed was it that the light of the torches which they carried
+was not nearly powerful enough to illuminate the entire chamber.  But
+even what they beheld at the first glance was enough to take their
+breath away; for upon forcing open the door they found themselves
+confronted by an enormous mass of dull white, frosty-looking metal
+which, upon closer inspection, proved to be composed entirely of
+bricks--hundreds, thousands of them--of pure silver, each brick weighing
+about thirty pounds, or just as much as a man could conveniently lift
+with one hand.  For several minutes the pair stood gazing enraptured at
+this enormous mass of precious metal, experiencing such sensations as it
+is given to few men to feel--for it must be remembered that both had
+been brought up amid such conditions that the possession of a few
+hundred pounds would be regarded by them as wealth!  Then, as if moved
+by the same impulse, they turned to each other and burst into a torrent
+of mutual congratulation, mingled with expressions of amazement that
+there should be so vast a quantity of wealth in the world.  For a few
+joyous minutes they could scarcely speak rationally to each other, so
+intense was their delight; but presently they pulled themselves together
+and proceeded with their investigations.  Passing round the enormous
+pile of silver they were again brought to a stand by a pile of metal of
+almost equal size, but this time it was dull ruddy yellow in colour--in
+fact, gold!  Gold, piled up like the silver in a solid mass also
+composed of bricks a trifle larger than those of the less valuable
+metal, being actually of such a weight that a brick was as much as one
+man could conveniently lift with both hands.  But this was not all; for
+beyond this pile of gold bricks they came upon row after row of great
+leather sacks which, upon being opened, were found to contain more gold,
+either in the form of rough nuggets, just as they had been taken from
+the mine, or dust which had evidently been washed out of the sand of
+some river.  The sight came near to driving them demented, for there
+were tons of the precious metal; far more of it indeed than they could
+possibly hope to ever carry away.  But even this was not all; for at the
+far end of the chamber they came upon three great bronze coffers of
+elaborate and exquisitely beautiful workmanship, which, upon being
+opened, were found to be more than half-full of crystals--diamonds,
+rubies, and emeralds--that reflected the light of their torches in a
+perfect blaze of vari-coloured effulgence so dazzlingly brilliant that
+for the moment they could scarcely credit the evidence of their eyes.
+And with all this at the end of their journey, they had been jealously
+hoarding and guarding first the pair and latterly the remaining one of
+the emeralds that had formed the eyes of the idol, and the few gold
+scales that had decorated its clothing!  The idea seemed so absurd, so
+supremely ridiculous, that when it occurred to Phil and he mentioned it
+to Dick, the pair of them burst into peal after peal of laughter that
+soon became hysterical; indeed the pair were very much nearer to being
+driven crazy than either of them dreamed of, by the sudden sight of such
+incalculable wealth.  Fortunately for them, however, they were in the
+pink of health and condition, thanks to their long, arduous journey
+through the wilderness and their continuous life in the open air; and
+since a sound mind goes with a sound body, their mental processes were
+in the best possible condition for withstanding the shock, thus suddenly
+brought to bear upon them; and eventually after their hysterical
+outburst of joy had spent itself, they once more became rational beings,
+and fell to discussing the momentous question of how all this treasure
+was to be transported to England.  They soon came to the conclusion that
+to transport it all to England--or rather to the coast, for, once there,
+the rest should be easy--would be an impossibility; and they finally
+decided to take the gems, and as much of the gold as they could find
+means of conveyance for.  This last, namely, the means of conveyance to
+the coast, was the problem that now confronted them; and they eventually
+agreed that there was only one way of solving it, and that was by
+returning to Huancane and enlisting the services of the high priest and
+the other authorities of the town in their favour.  Accordingly, with
+that object in view, they closed the door of the treasure chamber again,
+and made it temporarily secure; after which they returned to the upper
+air and electrified their Peruvian followers by directing them to make
+immediate preparations for a return to Huancane; and such was the energy
+which they contrived to infuse into the natives that they not only
+crossed to the mainland but also accomplished a very satisfactory return
+march before sunset, that night.
+
+The return of the adventurers to Huancane with the news that the secret
+hiding-place of the treasure had been discovered caused the utmost
+rejoicing among the inhabitants, for somehow the idea that the elder of
+the two strangers was the reincarnated Manco Capac had got abroad, and
+what is more, had found general acceptance; and now every native in the
+place, and for miles round, was in a perfect fever of impatience that
+operations for the recovery of the country from the Spaniards should be
+pressed forward with all possible speed.  Therefore when Phil intimated
+that he required a strong transport train to assist in the conveyance of
+the treasure to the coast, nobody thought of demanding his reasons for
+the conveyance of the treasure out of the country; they simply, one and
+all, devoted their energies to the collection of the train and the armed
+guard which Phil declared would also be necessary.  And when Stukely,
+determined to avail himself to the utmost of their obliging mood,
+further intimated that he would also need at least thirty Peruvians to
+man the ship which he intended to capture, the said Peruvians of course
+to proceed across the Great Water with him, he met with no difficulty in
+securing as many volunteers as he needed.  But the formation and
+equipment of such an expedition as Phil had demanded was not to be
+accomplished in a day, or even a week; therefore while men, animals, and
+arms were being got together at Huancane, a messenger, armed with the
+necessary authority, was sent forward along the route which would be
+followed by the caravan, with instructions to the natives all along the
+route to collect a certain quantity of food for the men and fodder for
+the animals, in order that the passage of the expedition to the coast
+might be expedited as much as possible.  While this was being done, Phil
+and Dick, having taken formal leave of the Huancane authorities,
+returned to the Sacred Island, and, assisted by a dozen Peruvians,
+proceeded to transport to the mainland as much of the treasure as they
+thought they would be able to convey to the coast.  This, of course, was
+soon done, and then all that remained to them was to wait patiently for
+the transport train, without which they could do nothing really worth
+the doing.
+
+At length, after they had been idly waiting for nearly three weeks, the
+train duly arrived.  But what a train it was!  Two hundred llamas, with
+a driver for every ten beasts; two hundred and fifty armed men to
+protect the caravan from possible--but not very probable--attack by the
+Spaniards; and forty men, every one of whom were prepared to follow Phil
+to the world's end and back, if need be.  Ten of the llamas were
+intended for the transport of provisions on the march from one village
+to another, and were already loaded to the full extent of their
+capacity; four were harnessed to the curious hammock-like arrangements
+which had been provided for the accommodation of Phil and his friend on
+the march; and the remaining hundred and eighty-six animals, as well as
+the forty volunteers for sea service, were available for the
+transportation of treasure, each llama being provided with a pair of
+saddle bags the broad connecting band of which sank so deeply into the
+wool of the creature that there was not the slightest fear of the bags
+slipping.
+
+This transport train was so very much stronger than the Englishmen had
+dared to hope for that they instantly recognised the possibility of
+carrying away nearly twice the quantity of gold which they had
+originally arranged for; and the day following the arrival of the train
+was accordingly devoted to the transport of further gold bricks from the
+island to the mainland, until a full load was provided for every animal,
+including those which were harnessed to the hammocks, Phil and Dick
+preferring to make the journey on foot.
+
+On the following morning, however, the imposing caravan started, with
+the first light of day, upon its journey toward the coast, winding its
+way along the eastern margin of the Sacred Lake until it reached its
+southern extremity, when it swerved away to the south-westward across
+the valley in which the lake lay embosomed, toward the towering
+snow-peaks of the western cordillera of the Andes.  The first three days
+of the journey were quite pleasant and uneventful, for during that time
+the caravan was winding its slow way across the mountain valley; but on
+the fourth day the train entered a mountain pass which the Peruvians
+asserted was known only to themselves--and which they had chosen in
+order to avoid the possibility of collision with the armed forces of the
+Spaniards; and thenceforward, for four full days, the train wound its
+perilous way along narrow pathways bounded on the one hand by towering,
+inaccessible, rocky cliffs, and on the other by ghastly precipices, of
+such awful depth that their bases were frequently hidden by the wreaths
+of mountain mist floating far below; across frail swing bridges
+stretched from side to side of those awful, fathomless rifts called
+_barrancas_ which seem to be peculiar to the Andes; or up and down
+steep, rugged, almost precipitous slopes where a single false step or a
+loose stone would send man or beast whirling away down to death a
+thousand feet below.  But the llamas seemed to be more sure-footed than
+mountain goats, and despite their loads they scrambled up and down
+apparently inaccessible places, or plodded sedately along the narrowest
+and most dizzy ledges without accident, while the Peruvians seemed to be
+absolutely at home among the peaks and precipices.
+
+But at length, after four full days of incessant peril, the train
+emerged from the last mountain pass and found itself upon a sloping,
+grassy plateau on the western slope of the Andes, with the limitless
+Pacific stretching away into the infinite distance, and the perils and
+hardships of the journey were at an end; for thenceforward the road
+wound its serpentine way downward through a series of ravines that, wild
+and savage enough at first, gradually widened out into gentle, grassy,
+tree-clad slopes that led down to the sandy plains which lie between the
+lower spurs of the Andes and the ocean.  It took the train two days to
+cross these plains, which, under the neglect of the Spaniards, were fast
+returning to the desert state from which, under the wise rule of the
+Incas, they had been reclaimed; and finally, on the seventeenth day of
+the journey the entire train arrived safely at the little Peruvian
+village on the site of which the important port of Arica now stands.
+And thanks to the precautions adopted by the guide of the party, not a
+Spaniard had been encountered on any part of the journey.
+
+But the good luck of the party did not end here; for on the very night
+of their arrival a small Spanish coasting craft of about seventy tons
+was sighted by the light of the full moon, becalmed in the offing; and
+manning four fishing canoes with the forty Peruvian volunteers, Dick and
+Phil paddled off and took her without the slightest difficulty, towing
+her safely into the bay before sunrise, where they brought her to an
+anchor.  Her crew of fifteen Spaniards were easily disposed of by the
+return train, who took them far enough up into the mountains to render
+it impossible for them to do any harm, and then turned them adrift.  The
+craft herself--named _El Ciudad de Lima_--proved, upon examination, to
+be a very fine, stanch little vessel, nearly new, in ballast; she
+therefore required nothing to be done to her to prepare her for her long
+voyage, save the storage of a sufficient quantity of water and
+provisions; and this, with the assistance of the Peruvians, was soon
+obtained.  Before sailing, however, Phil, at Dick's suggestion, had her
+completely emptied of all her ballast and stores of every description,
+and then hauled close in to the beach, in a sheltered position, and
+careened, so that her bottom might be carefully examined, and all weed
+removed from it.  Then, when this was done, the gold bricks were stowed
+right down alongside her keelson, upon plenty of dunnage, and on top of
+them was stowed the gems, packed in strong wooden boxes, the joints of
+which were afterward caulked and well paid with pitch, the boxes finally
+being thickly coated all over with pitch.  Then, on top of and all round
+the gold and the boxes of gems, a sufficient quantity of sand to ensure
+ample stability was placed; and on top of that again the water and
+provisions were stowed.  To do all this to Dick's satisfaction demanded
+nearly a month's strenuous labour; but when it was all finished and the
+little craft--re-christened _Elisabeth_--was finally ready for sea, Dick
+pronounced her fit to face the heaviest weather and the longest voyage.
+As she was only a small craft, the pair decided that twenty of the forty
+Peruvian volunteers would suffice as a crew, and these twenty were
+selected because of their superior fitness for the work of sailors, as
+exemplified during the preparation of the little ship for sea.
+
+At length, everything being ready, the little craft hove up her anchor
+and sailed out of the bay on her long voyage round the southern
+extremity of America and up through the vast Atlantic ocean.  To say
+that this voyage, undertaken in so small a vessel, and with a crew of
+men who had never before looked upon the sea, was an adventurous one,
+full of peril, and marked by countless hairbreadth escapes from capture
+and shipwreck, seems superfluous; indeed so full of adventure was it
+that a detailed description of what the little vessel and her crew went
+through would require a larger volume than the present for its adequate
+recital.  It must suffice therefore to state that the adventurers
+ultimately arrived safely and with their precious cargo intact in
+Plymouth Sound, some six months after her departure from the Peruvian
+fishing village, to the unbounded astonishment and delight of those who
+had long given up Phil and Dick for dead.  The meeting with old
+friends--and relatives, so far as Dick was concerned--the landing and
+eventual disposal of the gems and gold, with every necessary precaution,
+must be left for the reader to picture in detail; but it may be
+mentioned that while Dick purchased a big estate and built himself
+thereon a magnificent mansion not far from Plymouth, speedily becoming
+one of Plymouth's most important citizens, using his enormous wealth
+wisely and well, and ultimately earning his knighthood for his valiant
+conduct in assisting to disperse the Spanish Armada, Phil Stukely was so
+enamoured of the idea of returning to Peru, becoming its Inca, and
+driving out the Spaniards, that he actually fitted out an expedition
+with that intent.  How he fared and what ultimately became of him it may
+perhaps be the privilege of the present historian some day to relate.
+
+My story of the great and wonderful adventure of Philip Stukely and Dick
+Chichester is ended; yet upon reading the pages which I have with so
+much labour compiled I am conscious of a certain sense of
+incompleteness, conscious that something still remains untold.  I feel
+that to let the narrative go forth to the world without offering some
+sort of an explanation of the source of Stukely's extraordinary and
+uncanny knowledge of Indian lore, and of the ancient Peruvian language--
+which he had never learned--would be unfair to the reader.
+
+But in the rough yet voluminous notes of the adventure which Sir Richard
+Chichester amused himself by jotting down at his leisure after his
+return to England, which he left to his heirs at his death, and which
+fell into my hands some twenty years ago, I find no word which throws
+the slightest light upon the subject.  Yet from the time when I first
+skimmed through those notes I have been moved by an ardent desire to put
+them into narrative form, in order that Englishmen of to-day may be
+afforded yet one more example of the indomitable courage and tenacious
+perseverance that distinguished their forefathers during the stirring
+and glorious days of good Queen Bess.  But until quite recently I have
+been deterred from undertaking the pleasant task, for the reason that
+certain portions of the narrative are of such a character as either to
+strain the credulity of the reader to breaking point, or to cause him to
+denounce the good Sir Richard as a--shall we say--perverter of the
+truth.  And I should be exceedingly reluctant to do anything which would
+produce the latter result; for it seems perfectly evident, from
+contemporary records, that the worthy knight was held in highest esteem,
+by all who were brought into contact with him, as a man of unimpeachable
+honour and probity, whose word was always to be relied upon, and who was
+so unimaginative, so thoroughly matter-of-fact, and of so simple,
+straightforward a character generally, as to be completely above the
+suspicion of any slightest tendency to embellish a story by the
+perpetration of an untruth.  Quite recently, however, I was made
+acquainted with certain extraordinary facts which may possibly bear upon
+the matter, and which, although not absolutely conclusive, appear to
+corroborate Sir Richard's astounding statements; and as they may perhaps
+prove of interest to the reader, I now set them forth.
+
+It chanced that a few months ago I was a guest at a dinner party at
+which men only were present, and that I was seated next to a very
+brilliant young American physician who was devoting himself especially
+to the study of Heredity.  It being his hobby, he soon contrived to turn
+the conversation toward that topic, and, after a few general remarks,
+told several very startling stories illustrative of certain contentions
+which he advanced.  Among others he related the case of a young Western
+farmer whose ancestors had emigrated from the little village of
+Langonnet, in Brittany, to America, some two hundred and fifty years
+ago.  They had passed through the usual vicissitudes of fortune
+experienced by the early settlers, and in process of time had become so
+absolutely Americanised that even their very name had become corrupted
+almost out of recognition as of French origin.  The young farmer in
+question possessed only a very elementary education, and had never been
+taught French, yet almost from the moment when he first began to speak
+he occasionally interpolated a French word in his conversation, and the
+practice extended as he grew older.  Finally, it transpired that certain
+property in the neighbourhood of Langonnet which his ancestors had
+abandoned as practically worthless had become so valuable that enquiries
+as to the whereabouts of the owners had been set on foot, the
+descendants had been with much difficulty traced, and the young farmer,
+as being the person most directly interested, crossed to France to
+investigate.  And now comes the marvellous part of the story.  The young
+man had no sooner arrived in Langonnet--which, be it remembered, he was
+now visiting for the first time in his life--than he began to recognise
+such of his surroundings as remained unaltered since the emigration of
+his French ancestors, and, more strange still, perhaps, was able to
+converse in the Breton dialect with little or no difficulty by the time
+that he had been twenty-four hours in the village!
+
+The point which the narrator sought to illustrate and emphasise was that
+not only is heredity responsible for the transmission and persistence of
+certain peculiarities of face, form, and character, but also that in a
+few isolated cases it has actually been known to _transmit knowledge_!
+
+As soon as my neighbour had finished his story and replied to several
+comments upon it, I put to him the case of Philip Stukely, asking him
+whether he thought that the uncanny knowledge manifested by that
+gentleman was also due to heredity, to which he replied that he had not
+a doubt of it, and that, if I chose to investigate, I should probably
+discover either that Phil had Peruvian blood in his veins, or that some
+long dead English ancestor of his had once been in Peru and remained
+there for several years.  I have not yet been able to undertake the
+suggested investigation, and were I able to do so I am afraid that after
+so great a lapse of time it would be found impossible to pursue it very
+far; but I cannot help thinking that the story of the American physician
+tends to explain to some extent, if not completely, the source of
+Stukely's amazing and otherwise inexplicable gift of knowledge, and
+accordingly I offer the suggestion for what it may be worth.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Two Gallant Sons of Devon, by Harry Collingwood
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TWO GALLANT SONS OF DEVON ***
+
+***** This file should be named 24565.txt or 24565.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/5/6/24565/
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.